JP2019000384A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can favorably realize variety of a game.SOLUTION: A game board unit has a game board on which a game area is formed. Under the game area, a variable prize-winning unit 83R is arranged which is turned into a ball entry object, when a transition to a special game state which is more advantageous for a player than normal is carried out. The variable prize-winning unit 83R has a first ball entry part 331 and second ball entry part 341 which are arranged in a left and right sides in parallel, and a movable body 450R which is arranged between those ball entry parts 331, 341. The movable body 450R is held in a manner that allows pivoting to a left and right sides along a front surface of the game board. A top surface 452R of the movable body 450R is a rolling surface for a game ball. The movable body 450R is pivoted to change its posture so that the top surface 452R is turned into a descending slop to either of the first ball entry part 331 and second ball entry part 341, which forms, between both of the ball entry parts 331, 341, a guide passage that guides a game ball into either of the ball entry parts 331, 341.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 52

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When the game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter the entrance means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between an accepting state and a non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-78904 A

  In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in the configuration in order to realize diversification of games by the variable entry means.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably realizing diversification of games.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention described in claim 1
A game board in which a game area is formed;
Entry means provided in the game area,
Game state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the special gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state are provided,
The entrance means is
A first entrance part that is a destination for a game ball when the first special game state is entered;
A second incoming portion that is a destination for a game ball when the second special gaming state is entered;
A movable body pivotally supported and having a rolling surface on which a game ball can roll;
A drive unit for driving the movable body,
A posture changing means for changing the posture of the movable body by drive control of the drive unit;
The posture changing means is
By changing the posture of the movable body so that the movable body is rotated and the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the first ball-entry portion in the first special game state. A first guide route forming means for forming a first guide route for guiding the game ball to the first entrance part;
In the second special game state, by rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the second entrance part And a second guide path forming means for forming a second guide path for guiding the game ball to the second entrance part.

  Diversification of games can be suitably realized.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of a game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back side. It is a rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a back pack unit. (A) The elements on larger scale of FIG. 6 which show a variable winning unit and its periphery structure, (b) The perspective view which looked at the variable winning unit from the front side. (A) It is an AA line fragmentary sectional view of Drawing 11 (a), (b) It is a transverse sectional view of a variable prize-winning unit. (A) Schematic which shows a drive mechanism, (b) A arrow directional view of Fig.13 (a), (c) B arrow directional view of Fig.13 (a). (A) Schematic diagram showing the movement of the drive mechanism, (b) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the drive motor and the state of each variable winning device. (A1) Schematic showing the variable winning unit in the first guiding state, (a2) Schematic showing the first guiding route, (b1) Schematic showing the variable winning unit in the second guiding state, (B2) It is the schematic which shows a 2nd guide route. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success or failure lottery. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a distribution table. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process performed by MPU of a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a game state transfer process. It is a flowchart which shows the state switching process of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the entrance into a 1st entrance part. It is the schematic which shows the flow of the entrance into a 2nd entrance part. It is a schematic diagram showing the relation between the hit type and the increase of the holding ball. It is the schematic which compared the variable winning unit shown to 1st Embodiment, and the conventional variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit. (A) It is a perspective view which shows the variable winning unit in 2nd Embodiment, (b) It is a front view of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. (A) Schematic which shows the variable winning unit in 3rd Embodiment, (b) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between a movable body and a movable core. (A) The front view which shows the variable winning unit in 4th Embodiment, (b) The perspective view of a variable winning unit, (c) The longitudinal cross-sectional view of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. (A) Schematic diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning unit in the fifth embodiment, (b) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning portion and the number of winning balls, (c) Switching of guidance destinations in the opening / closing execution mode FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the state switching process of a variable winning unit. (A) It is a flowchart which shows the process for guidance start, (b) It is a flowchart which shows the process for completion | finish of guidance. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a change of a guidance destination. It is the schematic which shows the switching of a guidance destination. It is the schematic which shows the switching of a guidance destination. (A) Schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit in the sixth embodiment, (b) (c) Schematic diagram showing switching of guidance destinations, (d) Schematic diagram showing another variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit. (A) It is a perspective view which shows the variable winning unit in 7th Embodiment, (b) It is a front view of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. (A) Schematic showing variable winning unit in the eighth embodiment, (b), (c) Schematic showing state change of variable winning unit, (d) Schematic showing flow of game balls. (A) Schematic which shows the transmission path | route of the driving force in 9th Embodiment, (b) The flowchart which shows the process for guidance start, (c) The flowchart which shows the process for completion | finish of guidance. It is a timing chart which shows a motion of each movable plate. It is the schematic which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the state change of a variable winning unit. (A) Schematic showing variable winning unit in the tenth embodiment, (b) Schematic showing holding structure, (c) Schematic showing state change of variable winning unit. (A) Schematic showing variable winning units in the eleventh embodiment, (b), (c) Schematic showing the flow of game balls. (A) Schematic diagram showing a variable winning unit in the twelfth embodiment, (b), (c) Schematic diagram showing the flow of game balls, (d) Schematic diagram showing the relationship between per type and operation period, (E) It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the hit type and the increase in the holding ball. (A) Front view of variable winning unit in 13th embodiment, (b) Perspective view of variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the switching of a guidance destination. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit. (A) It is a front view of the variable prize unit in 14th Embodiment, (b) It is a longitudinal cross-sectional view of a variable prize unit. It is the schematic which shows the switching of a guidance destination. It is the schematic of the variable winning unit in 15th Embodiment. It is the schematic of the variable winning unit in 16th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit. It is the schematic which shows the modification of a variable winning unit.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 3, the configuration in the game area in the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting a long frame material to four sides, and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame shape as a whole. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in an island facility or the like of the game hall.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, a lower portion is connected to the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. The right side can be turned to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

  As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main part 12 is disposed at the inner frame 13 as a base body, the front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and the rear of the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is provided. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in a front view of the gaming machine.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view of the gaming machine. ing. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can be rotated backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation front end side in a front view of the gaming machine. It is said that.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that a substantially entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 in the front-rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front-rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, in view of safety and security improvement, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other with a predetermined gap therebetween. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a synthetic resin panel member having transparency instead of the glass panel.

  Around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21), light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. For example, an annular illumination part 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or at a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp portion 27 is provided at the center of the annular illumination portion 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10 to light up when a failure such as an error occurs. A prize ball lamp unit 28 that is lit is provided. In addition, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 to output sound effects, BGM, and the like according to the gaming state (see FIG. 3).

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to a game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing excess game balls in the upper tray 33 and games that have not reached the game area PE (see FIG. 3) among the game balls launched by the game ball launching mechanism. When the ball is returned to the player, it has a function as a tray for storing the discharged game ball.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later. The game ball firing speed increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 increases, and the game ball is played when the operation amount is adjusted to a predetermined amount by the player. The region PE is reached. Further, by adjusting the operation amount by the player, it becomes possible to divide game balls into a right route and a left route, which will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of a synthetic resin and includes a front door side upper tray passage that leads to the upper tray 33 and a front door side lower tray passage that leads to the lower tray 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving port portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the entrance portion of the front door side upper plate passage is formed by dividing the receiving port portion into left and right by a partition wall. The portion and the entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are partitioned. The upstream side of the front door side upper dish path and the front door side lower dish path are connected to a game ball distributing section described later, and the game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish path are guided to the upper plate 33 and are moved to the lower side of the front door. The game ball that has entered the dish passage is guided to the lower dish 34.

  Projecting shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

  Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly configured by an inner frame base body 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof). When the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be listed. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

  Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although illustration is omitted, the support fittings 71 and 72 have shaft portions, and a bearing portion provided on the front door frame 14 is inserted into these shaft portions, so that the front door frame with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. 14 is rotatably supported.

  A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is disposed on the rotating front end side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member to be described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and the front door collar member 76 is disposed in a scattered manner in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction). have. In the inner frame base body 50, a slit for projecting to the front side of the inner frame 13 corresponding to each of the front door flange members 76 corresponds to the flange receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14. It is formed in this way. By engaging the front door eaves member 76 protruding through the slits with the front door eaves member 76 provided on the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door eaves member 76, The front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened. The locking device 75 has an inner frame collar member 77 extending to the rear side of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 77 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  The inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75) is provided with a cylinder lock 78 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 75. The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking units (each of the hook members 76 and 77, the interlocking hooks and the like) constituting the main part of the locking device 75, and is disposed adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the lock of the front door frame 14 on the inner frame 13 is released, and the key inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). The inner frame 13 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A housing recess 51 for housing the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The housing recess 51 is recessed to the rear of the gaming machine according to the outer shape of the game board unit 80, and the game board unit 80 is fixed to the housing recess 51 by a manual lock mechanism in a state of being fitted from the front of the gaming machine. . A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the housing recess 51, and the rear configuration of the game board unit 80 (a rear block 80 b described later) protrudes behind the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. . The window hole 52 is almost entirely covered from the front of the gaming machine by the game board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is provided on the back side of the game board 80a mainly formed of a wooden board material, and various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable effect mechanism, etc.) described later. Is integrated with a back block 80b mounted on the base body 251.

  On the front surface of the game board 80a, the above-described game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed. As already described, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). In the glass unit 22, the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE are the same in the game area PE. It is arranged so that it is not lined up back and forth at a point. Thereby, the ball blockage in the game area PE is suppressed. The game board 80a is not limited to wooden, and can be made of synthetic resin.

  Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the rear.

  The game board 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-rear direction). As shown in FIG. 6, a general winning port 81, an operating port unit 82, a variable winning unit 83, a through gate 84, and the like are disposed in each opening. When game balls enter the general winning port 81, the operation port unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83, these game balls are detected by detection sensors provided corresponding to the respective winning portions, and a predetermined number is determined based on the detection results. Awards such as award balls (payout of game balls) are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that have not entered the various entrances are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86. . In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 86, the game ball entering the general winning port 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83 is also expressed as "winning". To do.

  The game board 80a is provided with various game parts such as a large number of game nails 87 and a windmill 94 in order to appropriately distribute the flow path of the game balls. The flow paths of the game balls are differentiated by various configurations such as the game nails 87 and the windmills, and the above-described winning in the general winning opening 81 and the like occurs with an appropriate probability.

  A central opening is formed at the center of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached so as to cover the center opening from the back side of the game board unit 80. The variable display unit 85 and the like belonging to the back block 80b are located behind the central opening, and the variable display unit 85 and the like can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening (opening cover).

  An operating port unit 82, a through gate 84, and the like are disposed around the central opening. The operating port unit 82 is provided with an upper operating port 91 disposed below the variable display unit 85 and a lower operating port 92 disposed below the upper operating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91, 92, the lower operating port 92 is provided with an open / close type entrance assist device (entrance assisting means) or an electric accessory 93 as an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 93 includes a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece. The electric accessory 93 has the same open state (auxiliary state) that allows or facilitates entry into the lower working port 92. It is possible to switch to a closed state (non-auxiliary state) where entry is impossible or difficult.

  The through gate 84 is arranged on the upstream side of the lower operating port 92 (specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 85), and the winning is made by lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 84. In this case, the electric accessory 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  When a ball enters the upper working port 91, three game balls are paid out. When a ball enters the lower working port 92, four game balls are paid out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above.

  The variable winning unit (special pitching device or special pitching means) 83 has a plurality of pitching portions, and guide states for guiding the game balls to these pitching portions (the first guide state and the second guide described in detail later). State) and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed. In normal times, the variable winning unit 83 is maintained in a non-guided state, and when winning the opening / closing execution mode (opening / closing execution state) in the internal lottery (big hit: a special advantage that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state) It is configured to be switched to the guidance state (when winning the transition to the gaming state). The opening / closing execution mode is a mode that will be shifted to when a big win is won. In the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, eight) winnings is defined as one round. It is set to be repeatedly switched to the guidance state with an upper limit of a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds).

  Next, the variable display unit 85 will be described supplementarily. The variable display unit 85 includes a symbol display device 95 that variably displays symbols (variation display) using a winning at the operation ports 91 and 92 as a trigger. The symbol display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. When a big win is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or big win). The symbol display device 95 is not necessarily a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or 7-segment display device.

  A center frame 96 is provided on the game board 80a so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from the front side, and in this fixed state, the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 are raised from the front side of the game board 80a. The gap dimension between the two is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. This prevents the game ball flowing down the game area PE from colliding with the symbol display device 95, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 85 (specifically, the center frame 96). The route is roughly divided into the right route detouring from the left and the left route detouring from the left.

  A stage on which the game ball can roll to the left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion constituting the lower portion of the center frame 96. The game ball that has flowed in from the inflow port formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 is discharged onto the stage through a warp passage formed in the center frame 96. Regarding the stage, specifically, the game ball that has reached the stage is relatively easy to flow into the upper working port 91 as compared to the game ball that does not pass through the stage so that the game ball can flow into the upper working port 91 relatively easily. This contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on this stage. In the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with the transparent opening cover, and the game ball that has reached the stage is restricted from moving to the back block 80b (variable display unit 85) side.

  A first reservation lamp portion and a second reservation lamp portion are provided on the front surface of the frame portion constituting the lower portion of the center frame 96. The first hold lamp unit corresponds to the upper operation port 91, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the upper operation port 91 is held up to 4 times, and the number of the hold is displayed by turning on the first hold lamp unit. It has become. The second holding lamp portion on the right side corresponds to the lower operating port 92, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the lower operating port 92 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting of the second holding lamp portion. It has come to be.

  The operation ports 91 and 92 are arranged at positions close to the variable display unit 85. Since it is possible to shift to the special game state with a winning at the operation ports 91 and 92 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the operation ports 91 and 92 and grasps whether or not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, it is considered that the symbol display device 95 is noted. Providing the operation ports 91 and 92 closer to the variable display unit 85 is a device for concentrating a portion that the player wants to focus on around the variable display unit 85.

  A game area partition member 98 that partitions the game area PE together with a guide rail 100 described later is disposed at the right end of the game board 80a. The game area partition member 98 is provided with a stopper member and a main display unit 99 with which game balls flying along the guide rail 100 collide. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after the momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a depressing function that weakens the momentum of the game ball that has collided.

  Here, the main display unit 99 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, and a part thereof is arranged to face the glass unit 22. A main display portion on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main controller described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main controller.

  The main display unit displays the lottery result based on the winning to the upper working port 91, and the lower working port for displaying the lottery result performed based on the winning to the lower working port 92. And a display unit. In the upper working port display section, a variation display of the picture is performed with a winning at the upper working port 91 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, an internal lottery performed based on the winning at the upper working port 91 is performed. The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 91 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the upper working port display unit, and a predetermined result is given as the stop result. After the pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the lower working port display section, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the lower working port 92 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 92 is performed. The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 92 is the winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the lower working port display section, and the predetermined result is the stop result. After the pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

  Here, on the basis of winning at any one of the operation ports 91 and 92, the display of the variation is started on the corresponding operation port display unit, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped until the game is stopped. It corresponds to one time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above-mentioned contents. For example, a single display area is provided, and even if any one of the operation ports 91 and 92 is won, the single game area In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped once in a state where a predetermined stop result is displayed. It is also possible.

  In addition to the above two display units, the main display unit 99 has a through gate display unit for displaying a lottery result based on a winning to the through gate 84. In the through gate display unit, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 84 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is clearly shown as the result of stopping the variation display. Is done. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the through gate 84 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit, and the change display is displayed. After being stopped, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 93 provided in the lower operation port 92 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is retained up to a maximum of 4 times, but the number of suspension is displayed on the main display portion of the main display unit 99. A holding number display section is provided.

  About the main display part explained in full detail above, while being visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, it is avoided that the game ball moves in front of these various display parts. Therefore, the visibility is ensured.

  Referring to FIG. 5 again, the configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described. Below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50, a game ball is launched into the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game Ball Launching Mechanism 110)
The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50, thereby The inner frame base body 50 is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. The firing rail 112 is formed with a groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section, and the front and rear positions of the game ball are defined by fitting the game ball into the groove portion.

  A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board unit 80 side, in detail. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the game board unit 80.

  The guide rail 100 partitions the game area PE together with the game area partition member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the plate) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. . In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 that are arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is formed by both the rails 101 and 102. Has been. The guide passage 103 includes an inlet portion 104 that is opened to the tip side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112, and an outlet portion 105 that is located above the gaming area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → the guide rail 100 (the entrance portion 104 → the exit portion 105). In the game board unit 80, on the front side of the exit portion 105, more specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101, there is a reverse prevention member 106 that prevents the game ball that has reached the game area PE from returning back into the guide passage 103. It is attached and it is restrained that the launch of the following game ball is prevented by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered at a substantially central portion of the game area PE. For this reason, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, in contact with the outer rail 102 due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. That is, when a game ball is launched so as to be delivered to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guide passage 103 substantially constitutes a pass area (passage path) through which the game ball passes. However, the area along the inner rail 101 is an area through which the game ball does not pass.

  As shown in FIG. 5, the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 are configured such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board unit 80. Has been placed. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board unit 80. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing both the rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game board unit 80.

  A foul ball passage is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball path is formed integrally with the path forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return to the inside of the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage through the gap. Become. The foul ball path leads to the front door side lower dish path, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball path are discharged to the lower dish 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A through-hole penetrating the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 in the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14). A passage forming member 121 is disposed on the side. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50 and has a main body side upper dish path 122 and a main body side lower dish path 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish passage 123 communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. In addition, a receiving portion of a passage forming unit attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and a front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage 122, A front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage 123.

  An opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper dish path 122 and the main body side lower dish path 123 is attached below the passage forming member 121 in the inner frame base body 50. The opening / closing member 124 is urged to a front position that closes the main body side upper dish passage 122 and the main body side lower dish passage 123. When the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening / closing member 124 is urged by this urging force. By being in the closed state, falling off of the game balls from the passages 122 and 123 is avoided. On the other hand, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path 122 and the front door side upper dish path communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path 123 and the front door side lower dish path communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base body 50 and the game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. A bearing portion 133 is formed on the bearing bracket 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. A plurality of fixing levers 134 are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state.

  As already described, the bottom portion of the housing recess (game board housing portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 80 housed in the housing recess 51. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80 b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 52. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, the back block 80 b is attached to the back of the game board unit 80. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 opened to the game board 80a side, and the base board 251 is fixed to the back of the game board unit 80, so that the game board 80a and the back block 80b is integrated.

  The front side of the base body 251 is an arrangement area for a movable production mechanism and the like, and the rear side is an arrangement area for a control device for controlling these various components and the variable display unit 85 (design display device 95). It has become.

  More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes toward the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the symbol display device 95 (see FIG. 6) described above with respect to the protruding portion, and the symbol display device. A display control device for driving 95 is attached. The symbol display device 95 and the display control device are arranged so that the symbol display device 95 is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50). Furthermore, a notification / production control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the base body 251 so as to be positioned behind the display control device.

  The notification / production control device 140 includes a notification / production control board that controls sound output, lamp display, and control of the display control device in accordance with instructions from the main control device described later. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

  A main controller unit 160 is provided below the notification / effect controller 140 so as to cover the base body 251 from the rear. The main controller unit 160 includes a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b), and a main control unit 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. Yes. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a box sealing portion 164 as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened. However, by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole that forms the box sealing portion 164, the box sealing portion 164 can be applied. The base and the box cover are coupled so as not to be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the unauthorized opening is performed. Even after opening, the sealing process can be performed again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking pin into at least one locking hole portion among the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the substrate box 163 is opened, such as when a failure occurs in the accommodated main control board or when the main control board is inspected, a connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the substrate box 163 main body. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, a locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected by a base seal part 165 so that they cannot be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin similarly to the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion so that the board box 163 and The mounting base 161 is coupled so as not to be separable. This makes it easier to grasp the fact that the substrate box 163 has been illegally removed.

  A portion of the front surface of the base body 251 facing the lower back of the game board unit 80 corresponds to the game board opening of the general winning port 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning unit 83, and on the downstream side. A collection passage (not shown) that collects in one place is formed. Thereby, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 81 etc. are gathered below the game board unit 80 through the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting game balls won in various winning ports.

  A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 by the collection passage are led out into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 86 leads to the discharge passage, and a game ball that has not won any winning port is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 86.

  In addition, the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b includes a general winning port detection sensor for detecting a game ball won in the general winning port 81 and a working port 91 as detection sensors for the above-mentioned respective winning portions. , 92 is mounted with a detection sensor for an operating port that detects a game ball that enters the game ball, and a winning detection mechanism is constituted by these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main controller 162, and detection information (detection signals) is output from the respective detection sensors to the main controller 162.

  Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. .

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 10, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. 212. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which left and right side surfaces and an upper surface are closed and only a lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

  The base part 211 is provided with an external terminal board. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal board, and various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the game hall side through these output terminals. As shown in FIG. 11, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins 214 at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the bearings provided on the inner frame 13 are the bearings. The back pack unit 15 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted through the portion 133. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixing levers 134 provided on the inner frame 13 are inserted, and the base portion 211 is contacted from the rear in a state where the fixing levers 134 are inserted through the insertion portions. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by contact.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail 222 that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221, and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit 225 provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

  The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. It is formed so that it communicates with the upper plate 33 through the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening communicates with the lower plate 34 through the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been.

  At the lower end portion of the base portion 211, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and a payout control device 242 and a power supply / launch control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is accommodated in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 224, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power / fire control device 243 has a power / fire control board accommodated in a board box 246. A predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the power source / launch control board, and further, control of launching of the game ball accompanying the operation of the game ball launch handle 41 by the player is performed. Specifically, drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball launching mechanism 110 and drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

  Further, the power source / launch control device 243 is provided with a power switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched to the on state (on state) or the shut off state (off state).

  Here, this pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing various data, and even if a power failure occurs, it retains the state at the time of the power failure and returns to the state at the time of the power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure. It can be done. For example, when the power supply is shut down by a normal procedure as in the case of a game hall being closed, the state before the shutdown is stored and held. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 166 provided in the main controller 162, the RAM data is initialized.

  These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the gaming machine main part 12 (inner frame 13) and exposing the back side of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, when the opening of the gaming machine main part 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the gaming machine. In other words, the various switches are difficult to operate when the gaming machine main part 12 is closed, and are operated from the front side of the gaming machine by a person who does not own the key for the locking device 75 (for example, a fraudster). Making it difficult.

  In the gaming machines of the type described in detail above, the display effect function is enhanced by increasing the size of the symbol display device 95. However, if the symbol display device 95 is to be enlarged, the area where the game ball flows down (the game area PE) is compressed, and there are restrictions on the arrangement of various game components arranged in the game area PE. Becomes stronger. In order to allow various game parts to coexist in a limited game area PE, there is room for improvement in the structure of these game parts. In the present embodiment, one of the features is that the configuration related to the variable winning unit 83 provided in the game board unit 80 is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the variable winning unit 83 will be described supplementarily. FIG. 11A is a partially enlarged view of the variable winning unit 83 and the game board unit 80 (FIG. 6) showing its peripheral configuration, FIG. 11B is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83, and FIG. 12A is variable. FIG. 11 is a longitudinal sectional view (partial sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 11A) showing the internal structure of the winning unit 83, and FIG. 12B is a cross-sectional view showing the internal structure of the variable winning unit 83.

(Variable winning unit 83)
An opening 89 (see FIG. 12) penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed at a lower portion of the game board 80a, specifically, at a position between the out port 86 and the operating port unit 82. The variable winning unit 83 is fixed to the game board 80a in a state of being fitted into the opening 89 from the front of the game machine.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the variable winning unit 83 includes a housing 310, and a pair of left and right ball entering portions 331 and 341 are formed on the front surface portion 312 of the housing 310 so as to protrude from the front surface of the game board 80a. Is formed. Ball passages 333 and 343 are formed in the main body 311 of the housing 310 to guide the game balls that have entered the balls 331 and 341 to the back side of the game board 80a. The game balls that have moved to the back side of the game board 80a through the ball passages 333 and 343 are returned to the island facility in the game hall through the collection passage of the back block 80b.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, detection sensors 334 and 344 for detecting game balls passing through the ball passages 333 and 343 are disposed at intermediate positions of the ball passages 333 and 343. The detection sensors 334 and 344 are connected to the main control unit 162, and the main control unit 162 (specifically, MPU) is directed to the ball entry units 331 and 341 based on detection information (detection signals) from the detection sensors 334 and 344. The presence or absence of the ball is monitored. When the main controller 162 determines that the entrance to the entrance units 331 and 341 has occurred, a privilege is given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, a difference is provided between the privilege based on the entrance to the first entrance 331 and the privilege based on the entrance to the second entrance 341. Specifically, when a ball enters the right ball portion 331 (corresponding to “first ball portion”), a first predetermined number (specifically, fifteen balls) is awarded as a privilege. When the entry to the left entry 341 (corresponding to “second entry”) occurs, it is more advantageous to the player than the benefit based on the entry to the right entry 331. A second predetermined number (more specifically, 10) game balls are awarded as a privilege. In the following description, the right entrance portion 331 is referred to as a “first entrance portion 331”, and the left entrance portion 341 is referred to as a “second entrance portion 341”.

  As shown in FIG. 11, the first ball entry portion 331 and the second ball entry portion 341 allow the game ball to pass through the entrance portion 332 of the first entry portion 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second entry portion 341. Are arranged so as to face each other with a small gap (specific region SE). That is, both the game ball entering the first entrance part 331 and the game ball entering the second entrance part 341 are configured to pass through the specific area SE, and the specific area SE is both It is an introduction portion to the inlet portions 332 and 342.

  Behind the specific area SE, movable bodies 350 and 360 that are slidable in the front-rear direction are disposed. The movable bodies 350 and 360 have a substantially flat plate shape, and are arranged in an inclined state so that the plate surface faces obliquely upward. A housing portion 313 that houses the movable bodies 350 and 360 is formed in the main body portion 311 of the housing 310. The accommodating portion 313 communicates with slits 314 and 315 formed in the front surface portion 312, and the movable bodies 350 and 360 accommodated in the accommodating portion 313 can appear and disappear from the specific area SE through the slits 314 and 315. It has become. In the following description, a position protruding to the specific area SE through the slits 314 and 315 (specifically, a position where the protruding amount is larger than the radius dimension of the game ball) is referred to as a protruding position, and is specified by being stored in the storage portion 313. A position where the protrusion to the region SE is avoided is referred to as a retracted position.

  The movable bodies 350 and 360 stand by at the retreat position in the normal game state, and move to a projecting position from the retreat position when the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state is entered. It will move accordingly.

  The main body 311 of the housing 310 is formed with guide grooves that engage the left and right ends of the movable bodies 350 and 360. By these guide grooves, the moving direction of the movable bodies 350 and 360 intersects (orthogonally) with the juxtaposed direction of the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341, specifically, the thickness direction of the game board 80a. It is prescribed as follows. The engagement between the guide groove and the movable bodies 350 and 360 is maintained even when the movable bodies 350 and 360 are in any of the retracted position and the protruding position.

  In the specific area SE, the movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the protruding positions, so that a guide route for guiding the game ball to the ball entering portions 331 and 341 is formed. Here, the relationship between each movable body 350, 360 and the guide route (guide destination of the game ball) will be described.

  When the movable body 350 is disposed at the protruding position, the first guide path (see FIG. 15 (FIG. 15)) is inclined downward from the second entrance 341 side to the first entrance 331 side by the upper surface 351 of the movable body 350. a)) is formed. That is, when the movable body 350 is arranged at the protruding position, the first guide route that follows the first ball entry portion 331 appears in the specific area SE. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE changes its direction by hitting the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and heads toward the first ball-entry portion 331, thereby avoiding passing through the specific area SE. In the following description, this movable body 350 is referred to as a first movable body 350. The first movable body 350 functions as a “ball receiving portion” that receives a game ball flowing down the game area PE from below by being arranged at the protruding position.

  On the other hand, when the movable body 360 is disposed at the projecting position, the second guide is inclined downward from the first ball entering portion 331 side to the second ball entering portion 341 side by the upper surface 361 of the movable body 360. A path (see FIG. 15B) is formed. That is, when the movable body 360 is arranged at the projecting position, a second guide route that continues to the second entrance 341 appears in the specific area SE. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE changes its direction by hitting the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360 and heads toward the second incoming ball portion 341, thereby avoiding passing through the specific area SE. In the following description, this movable body 360 is referred to as a second movable body 360. The second movable body 360 functions as a “ball receiving portion” that receives a game ball flowing down the game area PE from the lower side by being arranged at the protruding position.

  As described above, with respect to the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, the first variable winning device having the first winning portion 331 and the first movable body 350, the second winning portion 341 and the second movable body 360 are included. Are combined with a second variable winning device having the above, and the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are switched to an accepting state in which a game ball is received and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult to enter the ball than the accepting state. It is possible. In view of such circumstances, a gap (upper inlet OE) between the upper end portion of the first incoming ball portion 331 and the upper end portion of the second incoming ball portion 341 is an inlet (inlet port) to each variable winning device. ).

  The first movable body 350 extends from a location close to the upper end edge of the inlet portion 342 of the second incoming ball portion 341 to a location adjacent to the lower end edge of the inlet portion 332 of the first incoming ball portion 331, and is moved to the second movable body 350. The body 360 extends from a location close to the upper end edge of the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331 to a location close to the lower end edge of the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341. That is, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 intersect each other at an intermediate position between the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341. Specifically, the second movable body 360 is formed with a notch 363 penetrating in the thickness direction of the second movable body 360. The recess 363 extends in the sliding direction so as to straddle the front end portion and the rear end portion of the second movable body 360, and the first movable body 350 is inserted into the recess portion 363. Both movable bodies 350 and 360 are in an intersecting state.

  Here, the vertical widths of the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the respective entrance portions 331 and 341 are larger than the gap between the entrance portions 332 and 342, and the specific region SE is horizontally long. Then, the difference in height between the most upstream portion (the end on the second ball entering portion 341 side) and the most downstream portion (the end on the first entering ball portion 331 side) of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360. The difference in height between the most upstream portion (the end on the first incoming ball portion 331 side) and the most downstream portion (the end on the second incoming ball portion 341 side) is equal to the vertical width of the inlet portions 332 and 342. In addition, the lateral widths of the movable bodies 350 and 360 in the direction in which the balls 331 and 341 are arranged side by side are the same as the gap (specifically, it is slightly smaller). For this reason, the crossing angle of the part facing the upper side and the lower side at the intersection of both movable bodies 350, 360 is an obtuse angle (specifically 120 °), and the crossing angle of the part facing the right side and the left side is an acute angle (swell) The angle is 60 °). In addition, the inclination with respect to the horizontal surface of the 1st movable body 350 is smaller than 45 degrees (specifically 30 degrees), and the inclination with respect to the horizontal surface of the 2nd movable body 360 is similarly smaller than 45 degrees. (Specifically 30 °).

  In a front view of the gaming machine, the specific area SE is divided into an upper area, a lower area, a right area, and a left area by the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, and a position overlapping with the lower area among these areas The out port 86 is located at the end. That is, the out port 86 is disposed between the first incoming ball portion 331 and the second incoming ball portion 341.

  Of the game balls that have reached the specific area SE, those that have not entered either the first entrance part 331 or the second entrance part 341 flow into the out port 86 and are discharged from the game area PE. Will be. Although the variable winning unit 83 is arranged at a position closer to the inner rail 101, the diameter of the game ball is between the inner rail 101 and the first and second balls 331 and 341. The game ball that has reached the lower portion of the game area PE without passing through the specific area SE flows into the out port 86 so as to cross the lower part of the variable winning unit 83.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the drive source for the first movable body 350 and the drive source for the second movable body 360 are shared, and the power from the drive source (drive motor 321) is driven. One of the features is that it is configured to be transmitted to each movable body 350, 360 through a mechanism. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the drive mechanism of the variable prize winning unit 83 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. 13 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the drive mechanism, FIG. 13 (b) is a view as seen from an arrow A in FIG. 13 (a), FIG. 13 (c) is a view as seen from an arrow B in FIG. 13 (a), and FIG. FIG. 14B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the movement of the drive motor 321 and the state of each winning device.

  A drive motor 321 is mounted on the main body 311 of the housing 310. The drive motor 321 is connected to the main controller 162, and the output shaft 322 rotates based on a drive signal from the main controller 162 (specifically, MPU). The drive motor 321 is a stepping motor, and the rotation angle is controlled by a pulse of a drive signal from the main controller 162.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, a drive gear 323 (specifically a bevel gear) is fixed to the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321, and a drive is provided between the drive gear 323 and each movable body 350, 360. A transmission block 325 that transmits force to the movable bodies 350 and 360 is disposed.

  For example, when the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are slid back and forth, the movable bodies 350 and 360 are configured such that power is transmitted to the central portion in the width direction of the movable bodies 350 and 360. Can be prevented from shifting to the left or right (rotation such as swinging). However, as described above, since both movable bodies 350 and 360 shown in the present embodiment intersect at the central portion, it is difficult to transmit power to the central portions of both movable bodies 350 and 360. In addition, since the movable bodies 350 and 360 are horizontally long in the first place, when power is transmitted to the central portion, a difference is easily generated between the left and right end portions. This is assumed to hinder the stabilization of the operation of the movable bodies 350 and 360. Hereinafter, a device for eliminating such inconvenience will be described. The transmission block 325 includes a transmission unit for the first movable body 350 and a transmission unit for the second movable body 360, and the basic configuration is common to these transmission units. Therefore, in the following description, first, the transmission unit for the first movable body 350 will be described, and this will be used in the description of the transmission unit for the second movable body 360.

  The transmission unit for the first movable body 350 is disposed on the left and right sides of the drive gear 323 and engages with the drive gear 323 to rotate following the drive gear 323 (a composite of a bevel gear and a spur gear). Gear) and a rack 329 that moves in the front-rear direction as the driven gear 326 rotates. The rack 329 is connected to the left and right ends of the first movable body 350, and the first movable body 350 slides back and forth as the rack 329 moves back and forth. By transmitting the power of the drive gear 323 to the left and right ends of the first movable body 350, the generation of low tension due to power transmission is suppressed, and the movement of the first movable body 350 is stabilized.

  When the driven gear 326 is provided on the left and right of the drive gear 323, the rotation directions of the drive gear 323 are reversed. Therefore, by interposing the reversing gear 328 between one driven gear 326 and the rack 329, the rotation direction, that is, the operation direction of the rack 329 is unified.

  The basic configuration of the transmission unit for the second movable body 360 is the same as that of the transmission unit for the first movable body 350, and includes a driven gear 327 that engages with the drive gear 323, a reverse gear 328, and a rack 330. Have. Here, the driven gear 327 is disposed between the driven gear 326. Specifically, the driven gears 326 and 327 are arranged so as to be alternately spaced at equal intervals in the rotation direction of the drive gear 323.

  As shown in FIG. 14 (a), the drive gear 323 has a plurality of teeth arranged in the rotational direction, and the engaging portions 324a that engage with the driven gears 326 and 327 and the teeth are omitted ( Blank portions 324b (which avoid engagement with the driven gears 326 and 327) are alternately formed. More specifically, the drive gear 323 has an engaging portion 324a (0 ° to 89 °) → a blank portion 324b (90 ° to 179 °) → an engaging portion 324a (180 ° to 269 °) → The second movable body 360 is divided into four parts so as to be a blank portion 324b (270 ° to 359 °), and the driven gear 326 for the first movable body 350 and the drive gear 323 are engaged. When the driven gear 327 for the second movable body 360 and the drive gear 323 are engaged, the engagement with the driven gear 326 for the first movable body 350 is avoided. Is avoided.

  When both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are in the initial state in which they are disposed at the retracted position, when the drive motor 321 rotates counterclockwise (first specific direction), the driven gear follows the drive gear 323. 326 rotates. As a result, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position (see FIG. 14B). When the drive motor 321 operates in this way, the engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 327 is avoided. For this reason, it is avoided that the power of the drive motor 321 is transmitted to the second movable body 360, and the second movable body 360 remains in the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, when the first movable body 350 moves to the protruding position, the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 is aligned with the upper end edge of the inlet portion 342 of the second incoming ball portion 341 and the first edge. It is arranged on an imaginary line connecting the lower edge of the entrance portion 332 in the entrance portion 331, and descends from the second entrance portion 341 side to the first entrance portion 331 side in the specific area SE to the first entrance portion 331. A first guide route GP1 for guiding the game ball is formed.

  In this way, when the first variable winning device is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE enters the first entering portion 331. Further, in the receiving state, the moving path (for example, the second guide path GP2) of the game ball toward the second entering part 341 is cut off by the first movable body 350 and bounces back to the first movable body 350. It is avoided that the game ball thus made enters the second entrance 341.

  When the return condition is satisfied after the first movable body 350 is placed in the protruding position (acceptance state), the drive motor 321 rotates clockwise (second specific direction) and follows the driven gear. 326 rotates. As the drive gear 323 returns to the initial angle (0 °), the first movable body 350 returns from the protruding position to the retracted position (see FIG. 14B). When the drive motor 321 operates in this way, the engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 327 is avoided. For this reason, it is avoided that the power of the drive motor 321 is transmitted to the second movable body 360, and the second movable body 360 remains in the retracted position.

  When the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position, the first guide route GP1 formed in the specific area SE disappears, and the above-described first variable winning device switches from the accepting state to the non-accepting state.

  Next, in the initial state where both movable bodies 350 and 360 are disposed at the retracted position, when the drive motor 321 rotates in the clockwise direction (second predetermined direction), the drive gear 323 is followed. The driven gear 327 rotates. As a result, the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position (see FIG. 14B). When the drive motor 321 operates in this manner, the engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 326 is avoided. For this reason, it is avoided that the power of the drive motor 321 is transmitted to the first movable body 350, and the first movable body 350 remains in the retracted position.

  As shown in FIG. 15B, when the second movable body 360 moves to the protruding position, the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360 and the upper end portion of the inlet portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331, and the second It is arranged on an imaginary line connecting the lower end of the entrance portion 342 in the entrance portion 341, and is inclined downward from the first entrance portion 331 side to the second entrance portion 341 side in the specific area SE to the second entrance portion 341. The second guide route GP2 for guiding the game ball is formed.

  In this way, the second variable winning device is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state, so that the game ball that has reached the specific area SE enters the second entering unit 341. Further, in the receiving state, the moving path of the game ball (for example, the first guide path GP1) toward the first entrance portion 331 is cut off by the second movable body 360 and rebounds to the second movable body 360, and the like. It is avoided that the game ball thus entered enters the first entrance part 331.

  When the return condition is satisfied after the second movable body 360 is placed in the protruding position (acceptance state), the drive motor 321 rotates counterclockwise (first predetermined direction) and follows to follow. The gear 327 rotates. As the drive gear 323 returns to the initial angle (0 °), the second movable body 360 returns from the protruding position to the retracted position (see FIG. 14B). When the drive motor 321 operates in this manner, the engagement between the drive gear 323 and the driven gear 326 is avoided. For this reason, it is avoided that the power of the drive motor 321 is transmitted to the first movable body 350, and the first movable body 350 remains in the retracted position.

  When the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position, the second guide route GP2 formed in the specific area SE disappears, and the above-described second variable winning device switches from the accepting state to the non-accepting state.

  In the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, it is configured to transmit to the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 using a link mechanism. In this link mechanism, the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position in conjunction with the movement of the first movable body 350 to the protruding position, and the first movable body 360 in conjunction with the movement of the second movable body 360 to the protruding position. The movable body 350 moves to the retracted position. For this reason, when one of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 is arranged at the protruding position, it is avoided that the other is arranged at the protruding position. That is, it is avoided that both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are in the state of being disposed at the protruding positions. By limiting the movable bodies located in the specific area SE in this way, it is possible to suppress the game balls that have reached the specific area SE from staying in the specific area SE.

(Electric configuration of the pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  An MPU is mounted on the main control board provided in the main controller 162. The MPU is a ROM for storing various control programs executed by the MPU and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. It is an element including a RAM, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, such as a ROM function or a RAM function, may be included as another element.

  The MPU is provided with an input port and an output port. On the input side of the MPU, a power failure monitoring board provided in the main controller 162, a payout controller 242, various detection sensors, and the like are connected. A power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board, and power is supplied to the MPU via the power failure monitoring board. Further, as a part of various detection sensors, a detection sensor for the general winning opening 81, a detection sensor for the upper operation opening 91, a detection sensor for the lower operation opening 92, a detection sensor for the through gate 84, and the variable winning unit 83 Detection sensors 334 and 344 are connected, and based on the detection information (detection signals) from these various detection sensors, the MPU of the main controller 162 executes a winning determination (entrance determination) for each winning part. Is done. In addition, the MPU executes a jackpot generation lottery based on winning at the upper operating port 91 and the lower operating port 92 and also executes support generation lottery based on a winning at the through gate 84.

  On the output side of the MPU, a power failure monitoring board, a payout control device 242 and a notification / production control device 140 are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on a winning determination result to the winning corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area of the ROM is referred to. When a winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to paying out 10 game balls is output, and a winning to the first winning portion (first variable winning device) 331 is specified. In the case of winning, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 15 game balls is output, and when the winning to the second winning part (second variable winning device) 341 is specified, paying out 10 game balls When the winning ball command corresponding to is output and the winning to the upper working port 91 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output and the winning to the lower operating port 92 is specified. In this case, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / production control device 140. In this case, the command information storage area of the ROM is referred to when these various commands are output. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU, there are a drive unit for driving the electric accessory 93 attached to the lower operation port 92, a drive motor 321 for driving the movable bodies 350 and 360 of the variable winning unit 83, and a main display unit 99 (main display). )), The number of holdings display part, various display units for entering the ball, and the like. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board, and the MPU executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the special game state (opening / closing execution mode), drive control of the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83 is executed in the MPU so that the variable winning device is switched between the receiving state and the non-receiving state. In addition, in the MPU, the drive control of the drive unit for the electric accessory 93 is performed so that the electric accessory 93 is opened and closed when the electric accessory 93 in the lower working port 92 is opened (support winning). Is executed. In each game round, the display control of the upper working port display unit or the lower working port display unit in the main display unit 99 (main display unit) is executed in the MPU.

  Furthermore, an external terminal board is connected to the output side of the MPU. The external terminal plate is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. When the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU can output a jackpot signal to the management controller on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board relays between the main control board and the power / fire control device 243, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 243. The payout control device 242 controls payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power source (external power source) in a game hall or the like. Based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board, the payout control device 242 and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. .

  The power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 (specifically, the solenoid 111) is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met. More specifically, an operation level detection sensor and a touch sensor provided on the game ball launch handle 41 are connected to the power source / launch control device 243. The operation level detection sensor is a sensor that detects an operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41, and based on information from the operation level detection sensor, the game ball launch mechanism 110 emits a strength of the game ball (launch speed). ) Will be decided. The touch sensor is configured to output information when the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41, and the power source / launch control device 243 touches the game ball launch handle 41 based on this information. It is the structure which can grasp | ascertain whether it is. When it is determined that the player is touching the game ball launch handle 41 based on information from the touch sensor and the operation level detection sensor determines that the game ball launch handle 41 is operated, the game ball is fired. Will be allowed.

  Information from the touch sensor is transmitted to the main control device 162, and thus to the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 150, via the power supply / launch control device 243.

  The notification / production control device 140 includes a notification / production control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU includes a ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM. A RAM, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data during execution, is incorporated.

  The MPU of the notification / production control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162 and controls the display control device 150. It is something to control. Specifically, in the notification / production control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the symbol variation display mode in the symbol display device 95 and the symbol stop display mode (for example, the symbol of the symbol to be finally stopped) are displayed. The type of combination) is determined, the presence / absence of reach and the content of reach production are determined, and the determined content is assigned to the command and transferred to the display control device 150.

  The display control device 150 includes a display control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU has a ROM storing various control programs and fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM. RAM, a video display processor (VDP), a character ROM that stores image data, a video RAM that temporarily stores image data read from the character ROM, and the like are incorporated. Yes. The MPU executes display control of the symbol display device 95 based on the command input from the notification / production control device 140.

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  The MPU of the main control device 162 uses various counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit (setting of the light emission mode), setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 95, etc. Specifically, the winning random number counter C1 used for lottery occurrence, the hit type counter C2 used when determining the hit type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and the symbol display device 95 fluctuates. In the reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery when executing, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the hit random number counter C1, the display unit for the operating port of the main display unit 99 and the symbol display device 95 The variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time is used. Furthermore, the electric accessory release counter C4 used for the lottery to determine whether or not the electric accessory 93 of the lower working port 92 is in the electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value every time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main controller 162. In the reserved ball storage area of the RAM, a reserved area for the operation port and an execution area are provided. The holding area includes the first to fourth areas as the upper working port holding area, and the winning random number counter C1 stored in the lottery counter buffer according to the winning history to the upper operating port 91 Each numerical information of the type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is stored in any area as the hold information.

  In the first area to the fourth area, when winning to the upper working port 91 occurs continuously several times, each numerical information is stored in the order of the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area. Stored in series. Since four areas are provided in this way, up to four game ball entry histories to the upper operation port 91 are stored on hold.

  Further, the first working area to the fourth area are provided as the lower working opening holding area, and the winning random number counter C1 and the winning type counter stored in the lottery counter buffer according to the winning history to the lower working opening 92 are provided. Each numerical information of C2 and reach random number counter C3 is stored in any area as hold information.

  In the first area to the fourth area, when winning to the lower working port 92 occurs continuously several times, each numerical information is stored in the order of the first area → the second area → the third area → the fourth area. Stored in series. By providing four areas in this manner, up to four game balls entering history into the lower operation port 92 are stored on hold.

  The execution area is an area for moving each value stored in the first area of the holding area when the variable display is started on the working port display section of the main display section. Is determined based on various numerical information stored in the execution area.

  Specifically, each counter is configured so that the hit random number counter C1 is incremented by one in the range of, for example, 0 to 599, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the winning random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial random number counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the winning random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the winning random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 91 or the lower operation port 92.

  The value of the random number for winning the jackpot is stored as a success / failure table (a success / failure information group) in a success / failure table storage area as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 603. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the low probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, three random numbers (ie, winning information) for winning the jackpot are “7”, “307”, and “507”. It is. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0 to 599”, “7”, “307”, “507” correspond to the jackpot result, and the substantial jackpot probability by one lottery is 1/200. It has become. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, the random number value (that is, the winning information) for winning the jackpot is “5”, “7”, “36”.・ ・ 30 "572" and "598". That is, “5”, “7”, “36”... “572”, “598” among the values of the random number counter C1 of “0 to 599” correspond to the jackpot result, and by one lottery The substantial jackpot probability is 1/20. If the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary. In each lottery mode, except for the value of the random number that is a big hit, the game is missed.

  The hit type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 49, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (ie, 49). Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. A difference between the plurality of jackpot results is set in the drive control mode of the variable winning unit 83 in the opening / closing execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode includes an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode with the first winning portion 331 as the destination, and an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode with the second winning portion 341 as the destination. It is divided roughly into.

(Distribution of game results)
The distribution destination of game results for the win type counter C2 (that is, the lottery result by the lottery determination and the distribution lottery) is stored in the distribution table storage area as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM of the main controller 162. It is stored as (distribution information group). Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the distribution table includes a distribution table (first distribution information group) for the upper working port in FIG. 17A and a distribution for the lower working port in FIG. A table (second distribution information group) is set.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, in the distribution table for the upper working port, as a distribution destination of game results, 16R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence game result), 8R probability variation jackpot result A (high probability correspondence game) Result), 8R normal jackpot result (low-probability game result) is set, and in the distribution table for the lower working port, as shown in FIG. The jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result), 8R probability variation jackpot result B (high probability corresponding game result), and 8R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding game result) are set.

  The 16R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the first winning mode corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the number of continuation rounds is 16R. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes a high probability mode and is supported. It is a jackpot result that the mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that have been shifted due to the 16R probability variable jackpot result are continued until the next jackpot result.

  The 8R probability variation jackpot result A is a jackpot result in which the second winning mode corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the number of continuation rounds is 8R. After the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. This is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that have been shifted due to the 8R probability variable jackpot result A are continued until the next jackpot result.

  The 8R probability variation jackpot result B is a jackpot result in which the first winning mode corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the number of continuation rounds is 8R, and after the opening / closing execution mode ends, the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode. This is a jackpot result in which the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode that have been shifted due to the 8R probability variable jackpot result A are continued until the next jackpot result.

  The 8R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the second winning mode corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode is executed and the number of continuous rounds is 8R. After the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the winning / losing lottery mode becomes a low probability mode and supported. It is a jackpot result that the mode becomes the high frequency support mode. The high-frequency support mode that has been shifted due to the 8R normal jackpot result is continued until the number of game times executed during the mode reaches 100 times.

  In the distribution table for the upper working port, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 49”, “0 to 9” corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the 8R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to the result A, and “30 to 49” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result. On the other hand, in the distribution table for the lower working ports, among the values of the hit type counter C2 of “0 to 49”, “0 to 14” corresponds to the 16R probability variation big hit result, and “15 to 29” is 8R. Corresponding to the probability variation jackpot result B, “30 to 49” corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot result.

  For example, the variation type counter CS is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 198, for example, and reaches a maximum value (that is, 198) and then returns to 0. The variation type counter CS mainly controls the variation display time in the upper working port display unit and the lower working port display unit of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D) and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 95. It is used in the determination in the MPU of the device 162. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the variation display in the upper working port display unit and the lower working port display unit and determining the variation pattern at the time of the symbol variation start by the symbol display device 95.

  The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured so that, for example, 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 250, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), it returns to 0. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and stored in the electric utility reservation area of the RAM of the main controller at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 93 of the lower working port 92 to the open state based on the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 190, the electric accessory 93 is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 191 to 250, the electric accessory 93 is not controlled to the open state.

  As already described, in the MPU of the main controller 162, at least the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is used to determine the variation display time in the upper working port display unit and the lower working port display unit. In the determination, the ROM display area for fluctuation display time table is used. Further, the MPU uses the value of the hit random number counter C1 and the value of the hit type counter C2 stored in the execution area to determine the stop result in the upper working port display unit and the lower working port display unit DR. However, the ROM stop result table storage area is used for the determination.

(Various processes executed by the MPU of the main controller 162)
Next, each control process executed by the MPU of the main controller 162 will be described. The MPU process is roughly divided into a main process that is started when the power is turned on, a normal process that is executed after the main process ends, and a timer interrupt process that is started by periodically interrupting the normal process. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing will be described first, followed by normal processing.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is started periodically (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec) by the MPU of the main controller 162.

  In step S101, various detection sensor reading processes are executed. That is, the state of various detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the detection sensor (detection information from the detection sensor) is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. For example, when it is determined that a ball has entered the upper working port 91, a winning detection flag for the upper working port is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM, and a ball has entered the lower working port 92. Is determined, the winning detection flag for the lower working port is stored in various flag storage areas. When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 84, a winning detection flag for through gate is stored in various flag storage areas. If it is determined that a ball has entered the first ball entry unit 331, a winning detection flag for the first ball entry unit is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM, and the second ball entry unit 341 is entered. When it is determined that the winning ball is generated, the winning detection flag for the second winning portion is stored in various flag storage areas of the RAM.

  Thereafter, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM.

  In the subsequent step S103, the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and are cleared to 0 when the counter values reach the maximum value. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM.

  In a succeeding step S104, a through winning process associated with winning through the through gate 84 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not a through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric utility holding area. On the condition that the number of stored accessory holdings is less than 4, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in the step S103 is stored in the electric component holding area. If the through-gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas, the winning detection flag is deleted and the winning process for the through-gate ends.

  After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105. In step S105, the winning process for the working ball part accompanying the winning to the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and this timer interruption process. Exit.

  In the winning process for the operating pitching portion, first, whether or not a game ball has won a prize (starting winning) at the upper operating port 91 is stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM for the winning detection flag for the lower operating port. Judge by whether or not. When it is determined that the winning detection flag is stored, that is, when the game ball receives a detection signal indicating that the winning to the upper operation port 91 has occurred, three game balls are paid to the payout control device 242. Set a prize ball command to be issued. Then, an external signal setting process is performed to output information indicating that a game ball has won a prize to the upper operating port 91 to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has been made to the upper working port 91.

  Thereafter, the value stored in the reserved number storage area in the reserved area for the upper working port is read, and the reserved stored number related to the upper working port stored in the reserved area is set. Subsequently, an information acquisition process for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is performed, and the winning process is completed.

  On the other hand, when the winning detection flag for the upper operating port is not stored in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, that is, when a winning is generated not in the upper operating port 91 but in the lower operating port 92, the payout control device A prize ball command for paying out 4 game balls is set in 242. The set prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in an external output process of a normal process described later.

  Subsequently, an external signal setting process is performed so that information indicating that a game ball has won a prize at the lower operating port 92 is output to the hall computer HC on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer HC recognizes that a winning has occurred in the lower working port 92.

  Then, after reading the value stored in the reserved number storage area of the reserved area for the lower working entry part and setting the reserved memory number related to the lower operating port stored in the reserved area, information acquisition Process, and this winning process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the game ball has not won any of the upper operating port 91 and the lower operating port 92, the main winning process is finished as it is.

  In the information acquisition process, first, it is determined whether or not the set number of reserved start storages is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the start pending storage number is the upper limit, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is. If the start pending storage number is less than the upper limit, the start pending storage number of the corresponding result display area is incremented by one, The value stored in the reserved number storage area (hereinafter referred to as the common reserved number) is incremented by one.

  Thereafter, the updated values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS are set to the first storage area, that is, 1 in the free storage area of the corresponding result display area holding area. Store in the storage area corresponding to the incremented number of pending storage.

  That is, when the start pending storage number for the upper working port is set, the updated winning random number counter C1, the winning type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variation type counter CS are set to the upper working entrance ball. The first storage area among the free storage areas of the reserved area for the club, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the number of the start reserved memory for the upper working ball entering part incremented by one is stored.

  In addition, when the number of start-pending memories for the lower operating port is set, the updated values of the hit random number counter C1, the hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 are set as the hold numbers for the lower action entry portion. It is stored in the first storage area among the free storage areas of the area, that is, the reserved area corresponding to the number of the start reserved memories for the lower operating ball entering portion incremented by one.

  Subsequently, this is processing for causing the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 150, which are control devices on the sub-side (sub-side), to recognize that a winning has occurred in the upper operation port 91 or the lower operation port 92. Execute hold information confirmation processing and hold command setting processing. Thereafter, when the winning detection flag is stored, the flag is erased and the information acquisition process is terminated. The hold command set in the hold command setting process is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in the normal output external output process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on, and the main process of the game is executed in the normal process. As an outline, the processing of steps S201 to S207 is executed as a periodic processing with a period of 4 msec, and the counter update processing of steps S209 and S210 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the normal process, in step S201, output data such as a command set in the timer interrupt process or the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if a prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. In addition, if a command for an effect such as a command corresponding to an effect for game times such as a change start command, a type command, a change end command, or a command corresponding to an effect for an opening / closing execution mode is set, it is notified. Transmit to the production control device 140. Further, the output setting for the external terminal board is performed according to the information set in the external output buffer of the RAM.

  Next, in step S202, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the variation type counter CS is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM.

  In subsequent step S203, a game number control process for advancing the game of each game time is executed. In this game times control process, determination of success / failure of jackpot or the like and allocation determination of jackpot type, setting of symbol fluctuation display by the symbol display device 95, display unit for the operation port in the main display unit 99 (main display unit) Perform display control.

  Thereafter, in step S204, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. Although details will be described later, this gaming state transition process causes the gaming state to transition to a special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode), a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode, and the like.

  In step S <b> 205, an electric combination support process for driving and controlling the electric combination 93 provided in the lower operation port 92 is executed. In this electric role support process, an electric role release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 93 using the numerical information acquired from the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric utility reservation area of the RAM. (Support lottery) is performed, and when the electrified open state is won, the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 93 is executed. In addition, display control of the through-gate display unit in the main display unit 99 (main display unit) is performed so as to teach the lottery result of the electric role release lottery.

  As already described, the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode are set as the mode of support by the electric accessory 93, and the transition to any one of the support modes is performed in the gaming state transition process. In this case, the high frequency support mode is set when the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM, and the low frequency support mode is set when the flag is not set.

  In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is set by determining whether or not the high frequency support flag is set in various flag storage areas of the RAM. In the case of the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric utility item 93 is in the open state when the electric role open state is won is set more than in the case of the low frequency support mode. Set a longer opening time. Further, in the high frequency support mode, when the electrified open state is selected and the open state of the electric accessory 93 occurs a plurality of times, the next open state is started after the completion of one open state. The closing time until is set to be shorter than one opening time.

  Incidentally, when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the support mode is forcibly set to the low frequency support mode even if the high frequency support flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM.

  In a succeeding step S206, a game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, a predetermined operation is performed on the condition that a launch permission signal output from the power source / fire control device 243 is input based on the launch operation being performed on the game ball launch handle 41. The solenoid 111 of the game ball launching mechanism 110 is excited once in the firing period (0.6 sec in the present embodiment). Thereby, a game ball is launched toward the game area PE. That is, when an irregular hit such as a so-called stop hit is not performed, the launch of the game ball is repeated at a predetermined cycle on condition that the launch operation is performed.

  In a succeeding step S207, it is determined whether or not a power failure flag is set in the RAM. The power failure flag is a flag that is set when the occurrence of a power failure is confirmed in the power failure monitoring board and a power failure signal is input from the power failure monitoring board to the NMI terminal of the MPU, and is erased in the next main processing.

  If the power failure flag is not set, the last process of the plurality of processes that are repeatedly executed is completed, so whether or not the next normal process execution timing has been reached in step S208, that is, the previous normal process It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the next normal processing execution timing. That is, in step S209, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated, and in step S210, the variation type counter CS is updated.

  Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S206 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and varies. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random. The variation type counter CS can also be updated at random.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S207 that the power failure flag has been set, the power interruption has occurred, so the power interruption processing from step S211 is executed. That is, in step S211, the generation of timer interrupt processing is prohibited, and after that, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in step S212. After the RAM access is prohibited in step S213, the power supply is completely shut down and processed. Continue infinite loop until no longer runs.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the gaming state transition process of step S204 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 20, in the game state transition process, first, in step S301, it is determined whether or not the special game state (in the opening / closing execution mode). If it is not in the opening / closing execution mode, the process proceeds to step S302, and whether or not it is the timing at which one game round is completed (specifically, the timing at which a predetermined display period elapses after the variable display ends). Determine. If it is not the timing at which the game round has ended, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If it is the timing when the game round is completed, the process proceeds to step S303, and whether the game result of the current game round (the result of the above-mentioned lottery lottery) corresponds to the transition to the special game state (opening / closing execution mode). Determine whether or not. Specifically, whether the 16R probability variation jackpot result corresponding flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot result A correspondence flag, the 8R probability variation jackpot result B correspondence flag, or the 8R normal jackpot result correspondence flag is stored in the RAM of the main controller 162. Determine whether or not. If none of the above flags is stored, the gaming state transition process is terminated as it is.

  If any of the flags is stored, a special game state (opening / closing execution mode) start process is executed in step S304. By the start process, the operation restriction of the variable winning unit 83 by the lock device is released, and the operation of the variable winning unit 83 is allowed until the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  In step S305, it is determined whether or not the stored jackpot result corresponding flag is compatible with 16R. If an affirmative determination is made in step S305, "16" is set in the round number counter OC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM in step S306. If a negative determination is made in step S305, “8” is set in the round number counter OC provided in the various counter areas of the RAM in step S307.

  After executing the processes of steps S306 and S307, it is determined in step S308 whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the first winning mode. That is, it is determined whether or not the above-described 16R probability variation jackpot result or 8R probability variation jackpot result B is supported. If a positive determination is made in step S308, the process proceeds to step S309. In step S309, the first winning mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas of the RAM.

  After executing the process of step S309 or when a negative determination is made in step S308, the process proceeds to step S310, and an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 and the display control device 150 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / production control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed. The contents of the effect include a display mode in the symbol display device 95, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 140 to the display control device 150 as a display content command. In the display control device 150, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / production control device 140, the display content corresponding to the current opening / closing execution mode, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 95 is executed so that the moving image display of the character or the like, the background image, etc. are switched. After executing the process of step S310, an external signal setting process is executed in step S311 and the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  Returning to the description of step S301, if it is determined in step S301 that the special gaming state is being performed (in the opening / closing execution mode), the process proceeds to step S312. In step S312, it is determined whether or not the opening standby time has elapsed. If the opening standby time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, in step S313, a state switching process (ball entry control process) of the variable winning unit 83 is executed. Here, the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(State change process of variable winning unit 83)
In the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83, first, in step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being guided to either the first ball entering unit 331 or the second ball entering unit 341. . Specifically, this determination is performed based on the drive state of the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83. If the guidance to the ball entering parts 331 and 341 is not in progress, it is determined in step S402 whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is “0”. If an affirmative determination is made in step S402, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S402, the process proceeds to step S403. In step S403, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is “0”. The timer counter TC is a counter that is referred to when grasping the guidance period and the non-guidance period (interval period) to the pitching units 331 and 341, and the value is obtained every time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 18) is executed. Is decremented by "1". If a negative determination is made in step S403, this state switching process is terminated.

  When the value of the round number counter OC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter TC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S404, and whether or not the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the first winning mode. Determine. Specifically, it is determined whether or not it is an opening / closing execution mode in which the first entrance portion 331 is a guidance destination. When an affirmative determination is made in step S404, the process proceeds to step S405, and a process of forming a flow path (first guide route GP1) to the first ball entry portion 331 is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to rotate the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 by 90 ° in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction). On the other hand, if the current open / close execution mode corresponds to the second winning mode, a negative determination is made in step S404, and the process proceeds to step S406. In step S406, a process of forming a flow path (second guide route GP2) to the second incoming ball portion 341 is executed. Specifically, a drive signal is output to rotate the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 by 90 ° in the second specific direction (clockwise direction).

  After executing the process of step S405 or step S406, the process proceeds to step S407, where “15000” (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC, and in the subsequent step S408, “8” is set in the winning counter PC. That is, in the variable winning unit 83 in the present embodiment, (1) occurrence of a predetermined number (8) of winnings and (2) elapse of a predetermined guidance period (30 sec) are set as round end conditions (guide end conditions). Is done.

  After executing the process of step S408, a guidance start command is set in step S409 to indicate that the guidance to the ball entering parts 331 and 341 has been started (round has started), and this state switching process is performed. finish. The set guidance start command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). Based on the received release command, the notification / production control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the start of guidance, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  Returning to the description of step S401, if it is determined in step S401 that the guidance to the first ball entering part 331 or the second ball entering part 341 is in progress, the process proceeds to step S410, and the value of the timer counter TC is “0”. Is determined. If the value of the timer counter TC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S411, and whether or not a game ball has won a prize for one of the first and second balls 331 and 341 set as the guidance destination. Is determined based on the detection signals from the detection sensors 334 and 344. If no winning has occurred, this state switching process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if a winning has occurred, a winning command setting process is executed in step S412. The winning command is output to the notification / production control device 140, and the production in the opening / closing execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is changed by the winning command.

  After the command setting process is executed in step S412, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the succeeding step S414, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is "0". .

  When an affirmative determination is made in step S414, that is, when the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S410 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC is determined to be “0”). ) Means that the round end condition (guidance end condition) is satisfied. In this case, a guidance end process is executed in step S415. Specifically, when the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the first winning mode, the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 is rotated 90 ° in the second specific direction to return to the initial state. A drive signal is output to the drive motor 321. On the other hand, when the current open / close execution mode corresponds to the second winning mode, the drive motor 321 is rotated so that the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 is rotated by 90 ° in the first specific direction and returned to the initial state. A drive signal is output to.

  After performing the process of step S415, it progresses to step S416 and the update process of round number counter OC is performed. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter OC is not “0”, the same round number counter OC is decremented by 1 and when the value of the round number counter OC is “0”, the same round number counter OC. The value of “0” is maintained as “0”.

  Thereafter, in step S417, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter OC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S417, the process proceeds to step S418. In step S418, "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC.

  After executing the process of step S417, a guidance end command is set in step S419, and this state switching process ends. The set guidance end command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / production control device 140 determines the contents of the production corresponding to the end of the round based on the received guidance end command, and controls various devices so that the contents of the decided production are executed.

  Returning to the description of step S417, if it is determined in step S417 that the value of the round number counter OC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S420. In step S420, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas of the RAM.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S421, this state switching process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / production control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode end based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  Returning to the description of the gaming state transition process (FIG. 20), after executing the state switching process in step S313, it is determined in step S314 whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is “0”, and in step S315. It is determined whether the waiting time for ending has elapsed. If the value of the round number counter OC is not “0” or if the ending waiting time has not elapsed, the gaming state transition process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the round number counter OC is “0” and the waiting time for ending has elapsed, in step S316, after executing the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode, End the state transition process. When the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, the lottery mode is set to the high probability mode, and the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is set to the high frequency support mode. On the other hand, when the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the normal jackpot result, the lottery mode is set to the low probability mode and the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is set to the high frequency support mode. Unlike the case of the probabilistic jackpot result, an upper limit is set for the number of times of support in the high-frequency support mode that normally shifts after the jackpot result. Specifically, “100” is set in the game number counter stored in the various counter areas of the RAM. As a result, the high frequency support mode is maintained until the game times are performed 100 times after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode when “100” is reached. .

  Here, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 22 and 23, a supplementary description will be given of the flow of games in the first winning mode and the flow of games in the second winning mode.

  In the first winning mode, the drive target is limited to the first movable body 350, and when the round start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 22 (a) → FIG. 22 (b), the first movable body The former of 350 and the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position. As a result, a first guide route GP <b> 1 is formed in the specific area SE between the entrance parts 331 and 341, which is inclined downward to the first entrance part 331.

  In this state, the game ball that has flowed down the game area PE and has reached the specific area SE of the variable winning unit 83 changes its moving direction so as to face the first ball-entry portion 331 side, and is placed on the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350. By moving along, it flows into the inlet portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331. At this time, since the movement of the game ball toward the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341 is limited by the first movable body 350, the inflow of the game ball reaching the specific area SE to the entrance portion 342 is prevented. Avoided.

  When the number of winnings to the first pitching portion 331 reaches the predetermined number (upper limit number) or when the guidance period elapses before reaching the upper limit number, FIG. 22 (b) → FIG. 22 (c) As shown, the first movable body 350 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. Thereby, the guidance of the game ball to the first ball entering part 331 is released, and it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE to enter the first ball entering part 331.

  When a predetermined interval period elapses after the guidance is completed, the first movable body 350 moves to the protruding position again as shown in FIG. 22 (a) → FIG. 22 (b). Thereby, guidance to the 1st entrance part 331 will be resumed. In the first winning mode, such a movement of the first movable body 350 is repeated, so that the winning to the first entering part 331 frequently occurs, and the winning ball based on the entering to the second entering part 341 Increases the player's ball.

  In the second winning mode, the object to be driven is limited to the second movable body 360, and when the round start condition is satisfied, as shown in FIG. 23 (a) → FIG. 23 (b), the first movable body The latter of 350 and the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position. As a result, a second guide route GP2 is formed in the specific area SE between the ball entering portions 331 and 341, which is inclined downward to the second ball entering portion 341.

  In this state, the game ball that has flowed down the game area PE and has reached the specific area SE of the variable winning unit 83 changes its moving direction so as to face the second ball-entry unit 341, and moves to the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360. By moving along, it flows into the inlet portion 342 of the second incoming ball portion 341. At this time, since the movement of the game ball toward the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331 is limited by the second movable body 360, the inflow of the game ball reaching the specific area SE to the entrance portion 332 is prevented. Avoided.

  When the number of wins to the second pitching part 341 reaches the above-mentioned upper limit number, or when the above-described guidance period elapses before reaching the upper limit number, FIG. 23 (b) → FIG. 23 (c). As shown, the second movable body 360 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. Thereby, the guidance of the game ball to the second ball entering part 341 is released, and it becomes difficult for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE to enter the second ball entering part 341.

  When a predetermined interval period elapses after the guidance ends, the second movable body 360 moves again to the protruding position as shown in FIG. 23 (a) → FIG. 23 (b). Thereby, guidance to the 2nd entrance part 341 will be resumed. In the second winning mode, the movement of the second movable body 360 is repeated, so that the second winning portion 341 wins frequently, and the winning ball is based on the entering into the second winning portion 341. Increases the player's ball.

  The first entrance part 331 and the second entrance part 341 have the same entrance probability of the game balls that have reached the specific area SE, but are given based on the entrance to the entrance parts 331 and 341. There are differences in benefits. For this reason, when the first winning mode and the second winning mode are compared, there is a difference in the rate of increase (increase speed) of the holding ball. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 24, the change of the holding ball according to the type of the jackpot result will be described.

  The 16R probability variation jackpot result corresponds to the first winning mode, and the game ball guide destination is set to be the first winning portion 331. The privilege based on the entrance to the 1st entrance part 331 becomes 15 prize balls, and the player's possession ball will increase greatly.

  The 8R probability variation jackpot result B also corresponds to the first winning mode, and the guidance destination of the game ball is set to be the first pitch portion 331 as in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot result. However, for the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the number of rounds executed is “16”, whereas the number of rounds executed in the 8R probability variation jackpot result B is “8”. For this reason, although the increase speed of the holding ball is equivalent to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, the total number of winning balls is about half of the 16R probability variation jackpot result.

  The 8R probability variation jackpot result A is the same as the 8R probability variation jackpot result B in that it shifts to the high probability gaming state compatible with the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The number of rounds to be executed is also “8”, which is the same as the 8R probability variation jackpot result B. However, the 8R probability variation jackpot result A corresponds to the second winning mode, and the guidance destination of the game ball is set to be the second winning portion 341. The bonus based on the entrance to the second entrance 341 is 10 prize balls, which is less than the award based on the entrance to the first entrance 331. Since the first ball portion 331 and the second ball portion 341 have the same probability of entering a game ball, the rate of increase of the player's ball and the total number of acquisitions are below the 8R probability variation big hit result B. It will be.

  The 8R normal jackpot result corresponds to the second winning mode, similar to the 8R probability variation jackpot result A, and the player's ball speed increases compared to the 16R probability variation jackpot result and 8R probability variation jackpot result B. The total number of acquisitions will be lower.

  Thus, the monotonousness of the game in the opening / closing execution mode is suppressed by providing a difference in the privilege granting mode. Diversification of games can be realized by using a plurality of variable prize-winning devices with different privileges. However, if an area occupied by these variable winning devices is to be secured, it becomes difficult to coexist with other game parts arranged in the game area PE. The variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment is devised so that the first variable winning device having the first winning portion 331 and the second variable winning device having the second winning portion 341 coexist. Thus, the occupied area can be remarkably reduced. Here, with reference to FIG. 25, the difference from the conventional variable winning unit will be supplementarily described. FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram showing the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, and FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram showing a conventional variable winning unit 83X. For convenience of explanation, these two variable winning units are shown. Are listed side by side.

  In the gaming machine shown in FIG. 25 (b), the present embodiment is different in that the variable winning unit 83X is configured by two variable winning devices (a first winning portion 331X and a second winning portion 341X). This is the same as the variable winning unit 83 shown (see FIG. 25A). Here, the first ball entry portion 331X has a horizontally long shape, and the entrance portion 332X of the first ball entry portion 331X can be opened and closed by a first movable body 350X (first shutter) having a horizontally long shape. Covered. The second entrance portion 341X is also horizontally long, and the entrance portion 342X of the second entrance portion 341X is covered with a second movable body 360X (second shutter) that is also horizontally long. ing. When the first movable body 350X moves from the closed position to the open position, the first entrance part 331X enters the entrance portion 332X, and the second movable body 360X moves from the closed position to the open position. , The entrance to the entrance portion 342X of the second entrance portion 341X is allowed.

  In the variable prize unit 83X, the variable prize unit 83X is reduced in size by vertically arranging two variable prize devices formed horizontally. However, since the introduction area of the game ball to each of the winning portions 331X and 341X is individually set, the area occupied by the entire variable winning unit 83X is large.

  On the other hand, in the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment, the region (specific region SE) sandwiched between the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341 is directed to these ball entering portions 331 and 341. It functions as an introduction area, and the introduction area to each of the ball entering portions 331 and 341 is shared. Specifically, the inflow port OE to the specific area SE substantially functions as a ball entrance for both variable winning devices. Thereby, even if it is a case where the introduction area | region is enlarged and the pitching frequency to the pitching parts 331 and 341 is improved, it is suppressing that the variable prize-winning unit 83 enlarges resulting from it. As a result, as shown in FIG. 25, the vertical width dimension L1 of the variable winning unit 83 shown in the present embodiment is about half of the vertical width dimension L2 of the conventional variable winning unit 83X.

  According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In a type of gaming machine in which a privilege is given to the player by entering the entrance part formed in the game area PE, the player is better when the entrance part is larger than the smaller part. It is easy to give the impression that it is easy to enter. However, when an attempt is made to dispose a large ball portion in the game area PE, there is a concern that the area occupied by the ball portion in the game area will increase and the degree of freedom of arrangement will be significantly reduced. Especially when trying to realize diversification of the game by using a plurality of entrances with differentiated benefits based on the entrance, there are multiple large entrances in the game area PE. It is assumed that the influence on the arrangement will be even stronger.

  In this respect, in the present embodiment, each region (specific region SE) sandwiched between the first ball entry portion 331 (specifically, the entrance portion 332) and the second ball entry portion 341 (specifically, the entrance portion 342) is entered. The game balls that have been used as introduction areas for introducing game balls into the ball parts 331 and 341 and that have reached the specific area SE are used as the “guiding means” by the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, so that each of the incoming ball sections 331. , 341, the occurrence of the inconvenience is suppressed. That is, while reducing the size of the incoming ball portions 331 and 341 themselves, the gap between the first incoming ball portion 331 and the second incoming ball portion 341 (that is, the inlet OE to a predetermined area) is as if to the incoming ball portions 331 and 341. It can appear as if it were an entrance. As a result, actually, the small entrances 331 and 341 can be made larger than the actual size. Enlarging the appearance of the entrance by using the two entrance parts 331 and 341 in this way gives the player the impression that the entry is easy, and is advantageous for improving the game motivation.

  In addition, each entrance part 331,341 shown in this Embodiment is the entrance part of those entrance parts 331,341 when the separation distance of the 1st entrance part 331 and the 2nd entrance part 341 is a game machine front view. It is comprised so that it may become larger than the opening width (vertical width) of 332,342. As a result, the visual effect can be suitably exhibited while suppressing the useless expansion of the occupied area of the variable winning unit 83. Moreover, the movable bodies 350 and 360 described above are almost entirely contained in the specific area SE, and the protrusion of the specific area SE to the outside is suppressed in a front view of the gaming machine. Such a configuration is preferable in order to exhibit the visual effect.

  When the variable winning unit 83 is in the first guidance state and the second guidance state, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE passes (passes through) the specific area SE as it is. , 341 is assumed to impede the impression that the gap is the entrance. Here, in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350 that forms the first guide route GP1 and the second movable body 360 that forms the second guide route GP2 receive the game ball flowing down the game area PE and receive the game ball PE. The flow direction is changed so as to face the balls 331 and 341 which are guide destinations. The first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are formed so as to straddle the inlet portion 332 of the first incoming ball portion 331 and the inlet portion 342 of the second incoming ball portion 341. For this reason, almost all of the game balls that have reached the specific area SE under the conditions of the first guide state and the second guide state are directed to the first ball entering part 331 or the second ball entering part 341. It will be guided, and it is the structure by which the passing of the game ball mentioned above is avoided. Thereby, generation | occurrence | production of the said problem can be suppressed suitably.

  In the configuration in which the game balls are guided to the ball entering portions 331 and 341 by the inclination of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, if the inclination is loose, the period required for guidance becomes long. If the inclination is increased, the vertical width of the variable winning unit 83 is increased. It becomes bulky. Therefore, the horizontal width of each of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 in the direction in which the entrance parts 331 and 341 are juxtaposed is made equal to the distance between the entrance parts 331 and 341, and the difference in height between the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is calculated. By aligning with the vertical width of 341, smooth guidance of the game ball can be realized while maximizing the guide routes GP1 and GP2 so as to be within the specific area SE.

  In the case where the two entrance parts 331 and 341 are arranged side by side and the entrance parts 332 and 342 are opposed to each other, there is a high possibility that the entrance to the entrance part that is not the guidance destination will occur. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, each guide route GP1, GP2 is formed so as to block the inflow port OE of the specific area SE and the entrance portion of the entrance part that is not the guide destination. It is possible to favorably avoid entering a non-entering part.

  In the configuration in which the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 are formed in the specific area SE, a gap (flow) between the two ball entering portions 331 and 341 is obtained by overlapping a part of the two guide routes GP1 and GP2. A game ball that has passed through the entrance OE) can be earned as a guide object, and both guide routes GP1 and GP2 can preferably coexist in a limited range.

  When the specific area SE functions as an introduction part to the first ball entering part 331 and the second ball entering part 341, it is difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts in the specific area SE. . Therefore, by using this specific area SE as the operation area of the first movable body 350 for the first guide route GP1 and the second movable body 360 for the second guide route GP2, the operations of the movable bodies 350 and 360 are performed. In securing the area, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of a dead space in which other game parts cannot be arranged around the variable winning unit 83. This is a preferable configuration for improving the degree of freedom of arrangement of the variable winning unit 83.

  The first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are slidable in the thickness direction of the game board 80a, and the movable paths 350 and 360 project into the specific area SE to form the guide paths GP1 and GP2. Is done. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the operation area of the movable bodies 350 and 360 to a portion outside the specific area SE in the game area PE. Therefore, the coexistence of the variable winning unit 83 and the peripheral parts can be suitably realized.

  As described above, it is preferable to use a plurality of variable prize-winning devices each having a movable body and a pitching portion in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the winning device increases and restrictions on the arrangement of the winning device become stronger. There is a concern that the restriction of the arrangement in this way may hinder the above-described effect of improving the attention level. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 formed by the movable bodies 350 and 360 are intersected, and one of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 is crossed. Parts are standardized. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the occupied area of the winning device, and to appropriately exhibit the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the destination of the game ball is reversed while overlapping a part of the guide routes GP1 and GP2, it is possible to prevent the guide destination of the game ball from becoming difficult to understand due to the compression of the occupied area.

  The first movable body 350 that forms the first guide route GP1 and the second movable body 360 that forms the second guide route GP2 receive a game ball that flows down the game area PE, and a flowing-in portion whose flow direction is a guidance destination It is configured to change so as to face the 331, 341 side. While the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 intersect each other at an intermediate portion between the guide routes GP1 and GP2, the overall length of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 (the receiving width of the game ball) is increased. The enlargement of the winning device resulting from that can be suitably suppressed. It should be noted that the intersection between the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 is located in a specific region SE that is a region sandwiched between the first entrance portion 331 and the second entrance portion 341, and both The total length of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 and the inclination with respect to the horizontal plane are the same. Thereby, further downsizing of the winning device is realized.

  As shown in the present embodiment, both the entrance balls 331 and 341 are arranged such that the entrance portions 332 and 342 face each other, and the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are inclined downward toward the entrance portions 332 and 342. It becomes an inclined passage. As described above, in the configuration in which the game ball is guided using the inclination of the guide routes GP1 and GP2, the moving speed of the game ball depends on the inclination angle. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the intersection of the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 in the specific area SE, the total length of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 (the width of the game ball) It is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the size of the winning device resulting from the increase in size.

  In the configuration in which the first guide path GP1 formed by the first movable body 350 and the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360 intersect, the presence of the one guide path is the other side movable body. It can be a factor that hinders the movement of. In this regard, in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are slidable in the thickness direction of the game board 80a. In a state where the first movable body 350 is arranged at the protruding position (corresponding to the “guide position”), a part of the first movable body 350 protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80a, thereby forming the first guide path GP1. In a state where the second movable body 360 is disposed at the projecting position (corresponding to the “guide position”), a part of the second movable body 360 projects from the front surface of the game board 80a, thereby forming the second guide path GP2. Will be. With such a configuration, the presence of the first guide route GP1 becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the second movable body 360, or the presence of the second guide route GP2 becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the first movable body 350. It can suppress suitably. Thereby, the fall of the setting freedom degree of the operation timing of the 1st movable body 350 and the 2nd movable body 360 can be relieve | moderated suitably.

  As described above, in the configuration in which both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are slid in the thickness direction of the game board 80a, a recess 363 (corresponding to an “insertion section”) is formed in one movable body 360, and this depression By inserting the other movable body 350 through the notch 363, it is possible to preferably avoid the movement of the other movable body from being obstructed by one movable body.

  In the configuration in which the movable bodies 350 and 360 have a flat plate shape and the rolling surfaces of the game balls in the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the plate surfaces, the rolling surfaces (intersections) are formed by the recesses 363. A blank is generated. If this blank becomes excessively large, the game ball spills through the blank, and the guide function can be lowered. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, among the thickness dimensions of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, at least the movable body 350 in which the recess 363 is not formed (inserted through the insertion portion). By forming the thickness dimension of the movable body 350) on the side so as to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball, occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  When a ball enters the first ball player 331, 15 prize balls are awarded to the player as “first privilege” and a ball enters the second ball player 341. Will receive 10 prize balls as the “second privilege” to the player. In this way, when there is a difference in the superiority of the respective ball entry portions 331 and 341, the game ball guidance is not smoothly performed with respect to the first ball entry portion 331 on the side advantageous to the player. It is assumed that it becomes a factor that reduces the game motivation of the player, or a factor that makes it difficult to differentiate the game due to a decrease in the superiority of the first incoming ball portion 331. Therefore, the blank is generated in the second guide route GP2 toward the second entrance portion 341 having a smaller privilege, not the first guide route GP1 toward the first entrance portion 331 having the greater privilege. Thus, the occurrence of these various inconveniences can be suitably suppressed.

  Regarding the above-described first guide route GP1 and second guide route GP2, it is difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts on the route. Therefore, a configuration in which the region where the first guide route GP1 is formed is used as the operation region of the second movable body 360 and the region where the second guide system GP2 is formed is used as the operation region of the first movable body 350. In this case, the operation area can be suitably secured. If such a coexistence relationship is constructed, it is preferable that, even when the total length of each of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 is increased to increase the width of the game ball, the ball entry device is enlarged accordingly. Can be suppressed.

  In the game area PE, the ball entering portions 331 and 341 are provided side by side, and the movable balls 350 and 360 as variable “guide portions” are used to guide the game balls to the ball entering portions 331 and 341. It is preferable for realizing diversification of games and improving attention to games. However, when a driving unit (actuator) is provided for each of the ball entering portions 331 and 341, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine becomes complicated.

  In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 350 by setting the drive mode of the drive motor 321 to the first drive mode (rotation in the first specific direction). Then, by adopting the second drive mode (rotation in the second specific direction), the second movable body 360 forms the second guide route GP2 to switch the guide destination of the game ball, that is, variable winning depending on the drive mode If the unit 83 is configured to switch to the non-guidance state / first guidance state / second guidance state, diversification of the game can be realized while suppressing the electrical configuration of the gaming machine from being complicated.

  As described above, when the guide destination is switched depending on the operation mode of the drive motor 321, the state is switched by setting the rotation direction of the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 to be opposite as shown in the present embodiment. It is possible to suppress a decrease in operational stability when performing the operation. Thereby, the fall of the reliability of the gaming machine resulting from malfunction etc. can be suppressed with a simple configuration.

  When the first movable body 350 for the first incoming ball portion 331 and the second movable body 360 for the second incoming ball portion 341 are used in combination, the drive portion is simply shared for the movable bodies 350 and 360. The following inconveniences can occur. That is, when the first movable body 350 is moved, the second movable body 360 moves following the movement, or when the second movable body 360 is moved, the first movable body 350 moves following the movement. As a result, there is a concern that the burden on the driving unit increases and the responsiveness when the state is switched decreases.

  Therefore, in the transmission block 325 shown in the present embodiment, when the first movable body 350 is moved, transmission of power to the second movable body 360 is avoided, and when the second movable body 360 is moved. By avoiding transmission of power to the first movable body 350, an increase in load when the plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 are driven can be suppressed, and a decrease in responsiveness can be suitably suppressed. Further, by devising the operation timings of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 so as not to overlap with each other and limiting the transmission target of power from the drive motor 321, the decrease in responsiveness can be more suitably suppressed. It is possible.

  The variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment can be configured as follows.

<Modification 1>
In the first embodiment, the out-port 86 is disposed between the inlet portion 332 of the first incoming ball portion 331 and the inlet portion 342 of the second incoming ball portion 341. However, the present invention is not limited to this. is not. It is also possible to dispose another ball entry part (for example, a general prize entry port, an operation hole, a through gate, etc.) between the entrance part 332 of the first entry part 331 and the entrance part 342 of the second entry part 341. It is. Hereinafter, specific examples will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 26A, a through gate 84A through which a game ball can pass is disposed above the specific area SE. A lower operation port 92A is provided at a position below the through gate 84A across the movable bodies 350 and 360, and a game ball that has passed through the through gate 84A is directed toward the lower operation port 92A.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b), with respect to the electric accessory 93A attached to the lower working port 92A, the guide piece 93aA slides in the front-rear direction to guide the ball entering the lower working port 92A. It is configured to switch to a non-guided state. By aligning the operation direction of the guide piece 93aA with the operation direction of the movable bodies 350 and 360, the overlapping of the operation area of the electric accessory 93A and the operation area of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is avoided.

<Modification 2>
In the first embodiment, the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the ball entering portions 331 and 341 are turned sideways so that the movable body 350 and 360 passes through the specific area SE in a state where the movable bodies 350 and 360 are disposed at the retracted positions. Although the spheres are prevented from flowing into the inlet portions 332 and 342, in the configuration in which the inlet portions 332 and 342 are always open, it is impossible to deny the possibility of an accidental ball entry in the above state. Therefore, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 27A, the first shutter 370B that opens and closes the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331 and the second shutter 380B that opens and closes the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341. In the state where the movable bodies 350 and 360 are disposed at the retracted position, the entrance to each of the entrance portions 331 and 341 is avoided by the shutters 370B and 380B, so that the above-mentioned incidental Can be avoided.

  The shutters 370B and 380B are movable to a projecting position that projects into the specific area SE through slits 318B and 319B formed in the front surface portion 312B of the housing 310B and a retracted position that avoids the projecting. It is connected to the movable bodies 350 and 360 via. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 27B to 27D, the movement of the variable winning unit 83B will be described. In FIGS. 27B to 27D, for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350 and 360 and the shutters 370B and 380B arranged at the retracted positions are indicated by broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 27B, in a state where both movable bodies 350 and 360 are waiting at the retracted position, both shutters 370B and 380B are waiting at the protruding position.

  In the first winning mode, as shown in FIGS. 27B to 27C, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the first shutter 370B is interlocked (synchronized) with it. Move from the protruding position to the retracted position. Thereby, the entrance part 332 of the 1st entrance part 331 is open | released, and entrance to the entrance part 332 via the 1st guidance path | route GP1 is attained. When the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the first shutter 370B moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction (synchronization) with it (FIG. 27 (c) → FIG. 27). 27 (b)). Thereby, the entrance part 332 of the 1st entrance part 331 is closed, and the entrance to the entrance part 332 becomes impossible.

  In the second winning mode, as shown in FIG. 27 (b) → FIG. 27 (d), the second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, and interlocked (synchronized) with the second shutter 380B. Move from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341 is opened, and entrance to the entrance portion 342 via the second guide route GP2 becomes possible. When the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the second shutter 380B moves from the retracted position to the projecting position in conjunction with (synchronizes with) the second movable body 360 (FIG. 27 (d) → FIG. 27 (b)). Thereby, the entrance part 342 of the 2nd entrance part 341 is closed, and entrance to the entrance part 342 becomes impossible.

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are crossed by inserting the first movable body 350 through the recess 363 formed in the second movable body 360. It was realized. In such a configuration, the blank formed on the rolling surface of the second guide path GP2 is increased by increasing the width of the recess 363. Thereby, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball moving along the second guide route GP2 is likely to be disturbed.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28A, a recess (groove portion 353C) into which the second movable body 360C enters may be formed in a portion intersecting the second movable body 360C on the lower surface 352C of the first movable body 350C. Thereby, the width | variety of the recessed part 363C formed in the 1st movable body 350C can be made small. In realizing such a technical idea, a configuration corresponding to the groove portion 353C may be disposed on the upper surface side of the first movable body 350C. However, in such a configuration, irregularities are generated on the rolling surfaces constituting the first guide route GP1, and the behavior of the game ball heading toward the first ball entry portion 331 is disturbed. In other words, the formation of the groove portion 353C on the lower surface side rather than the upper surface side ensures the smoothness of the rolling surface of the game ball on the first guide route GP1, and ensures the rolling surface of the game ball on the second guide route GP2. There is a technical significance that smoothing can be promoted.

  Incidentally, the notch formation target is not limited to the first movable body 350, and the second movable body 360 may be used. Further, when a notch is formed in the first movable body 350, a configuration corresponding to the groove portion 353C may be disposed in the second movable body 360.

<Modification 4>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are configured to intersect with each other. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this, and at least the first movable body 350 formed by the first movable body 350 is used. It is sufficient if the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 formed by the second movable body 360 intersect each other. For example, as shown in FIG. 28 (b), notches 353D and 363D are formed in both the first movable body 350D and the second movable body 360D, and the first and second movable ball portions 331 and 341 are arranged in parallel. It is good also as a structure where a clearance gap is formed between 1st movable body 350D and 2nd movable body 360D.

<Modification 5>
In the first embodiment, the second movable body 360 is disposed at a position overlapping the first guide path GP1 formed by the first movable body 350, and the second guide path formed by the second movable body 360. Although the 1st movable body 350 was arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with GP2, it is not limited to this. The movable body which forms the other guide route should just be arrange | positioned in the position which overlaps with at least one guide route. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 28C, the first movable body 350E may be arranged at a position overlapping the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360E. In this case, it is not always necessary to cross the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2.

<Modification 6>
In the configuration in which the specific area SE sandwiched between the first and second entrance parts 331 and 341 functions as an introduction area when the game ball flows into the entrance parts 331 and 341, the specific area SE is Cover from the front of the gaming machine with a cover or the like to reduce the visibility of the game ball passing behind the cover (specific area SE) and the visibility of the entrance portions 332 and 342 and the movable bodies 350 and 360 located behind. It is good also as a structure. Most of the game balls that have reached the specific area SE under the situation where the first guide route GP1 is formed flow into the first incoming ball portion 331 and are specified under the situation where the second guide route GP2 is formed. Most of the game balls that have reached the region SE flow into the second incoming ball portion 341. In view of such circumstances, whether the gap (inlet OE) between the first ball entering portion 331 (specifically the upper end) and the second ball entering portion 341 (specifically the upper end) is an entrance to the variable winning device. It is preferable to improve the game motivation by giving the player an impression that the gap (inlet OE) is larger than the size of the actual entrance parts 331 and 341. . Therefore, by reducing the visibility of the portions other than the gap (inlet OE) (inlet portions 332 and 342 of the ball entry portions 331 and 341, etc.) by the cover portion described above, the above-described effect can be exhibited more suitably. it can. As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 6, the variable winning unit 83 is located below the game area PE, and is arranged to be lower than the height of the player's eyes. Therefore, the player looks into the gap (inflow port OE) between the ball entering parts 331 and 341 from above, and even if the cover part is used to cover the entire specific area SE, the cover part causes a gap ( The visual recognition of the inlet OE) is not hindered.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 intersect with each other by inserting the first movable body 350 through the recess 363 formed in the second movable body 360. did. In such a configuration, the presence of the recess 363 becomes a factor that causes a blank on the rolling surface of the second guide path GP2 formed by the second movable body 360. When a game ball moving along the second guide route GP2 crosses the blank and contacts the edge of the recess 363, the behavior of the game ball may be disturbed. This is advantageous in suppressing the monotonous movement of the game by giving a difference between the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entering portion 331 and the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion 341. . However, in consideration of the point that smoothes the movement of the game ball heading to either the first ball entrance portion 331 or the second ball entrance portion 341 and advances the game quickly, the blank may be made as small as possible. preferable. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. In the following, with reference to FIG. 29, the above device will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 29A is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83F, and FIG. 29B is a front view of the variable winning unit 83F.

  The housing 310F of the variable winning unit 83F is formed with a core 390F protruding from the front surface portion 312F to the specific area SE. The core 390F is disposed at an intersection where the first movable body 350F (specifically, the first guide route GP1) and the second movable body 360F (specifically, the second guide route GP2) intersect.

  The first movable body 350F has a notch 353F formed in a portion protruding into the specific region SE, so that a predetermined range including the front end portion is bifurcated. At the same time, the first movable body 350F is formed on the front surface portion 312F. The slit 314F is also divided into two so as to be located on both the left and right sides of the core 390F. Similarly to the first movable body 350F, the second movable body 360F has a forked portion 363F formed in a portion protruding into the specific region SE, so that a predetermined range including the front end portion is branched into two branches. In conjunction with this, the slit 314F formed in the front surface portion 312F is also divided into two so as to be positioned on both the left and right sides of the core 390F.

  The core 390F is formed to have a diamond-shaped cross section, and a first inclined portion 391F having a downward slope on the right side and a second inclined portion 392F having a downward slope on the left side are provided on the upper surface portion. The first inclined portion 391F is located on the same plane as the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F, and the second inclined portion 392F is located on the same plane as the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F.

  Thus, when the core 390F is disposed in the specific area SE, a game ball passing through the specific area SE may hit the core 390F. There is a possibility that the game ball hitting the core 390F changes the moving direction and heads toward the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331 or the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a first shutter 370F that opens and closes the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331 and a second shutter 380F that opens and closes the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341 are provided and movable. In a state where the bodies 350F and 360F are disposed at the retracted positions, the entrance to the respective entrance portions 331 and 341 is avoided by the shutters 370F and 380F, thereby avoiding accidental entrance. Yes.

  The shutters 370F and 380F are movable to a projecting position that projects into the specific area SE through slits 318F and 319F formed in the front surface portion 312F of the housing 310F, and a retracted position that avoids the projecting. Are connected to the movable bodies 350F and 360F.

  Here, the movement of the variable winning unit 83F will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  In a state (initial state) in which the game ball is not guided to any of the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), both movable bodies 350F and 360F are in the retracted position. And both shutters 370F and 380F are waiting at the protruding position. As a result, the game balls that have reached the specific area SE cannot enter the ball entering portions 331 and 341.

  In the first winning mode, as shown in FIGS. 30A to 30B, the first movable body 350F moves from the retracted position to the projecting position, and interlocked (synchronized) with the first shutter 370F. Move from the protruding position to the retracted position. Thereby, the entrance part 332 of the 1st entrance part 331 is open | released, and entrance to the entrance part 332 via the 1st guidance path | route GP1 is attained.

  In a state where the first movable body 350F is disposed at the protruding position, the core 390F is inserted into the notch 353F of the first movable body 350F, and the blank on the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F is the first inclined portion of the core 390F. Complemented by 391F. That is, a series of rolling surfaces is formed by the upper surface 351F of the first movable body 350F and the first inclined portion 391F of the core 390F. On this rolling surface, the blank portion is complemented by the core 390F (first inclined portion 391F). Therefore, the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball moving along the first guide route GP1 can be suppressed, and the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the first incoming ball portion 331.

  In this state, the entire core 390F including the second inclined portion 392F is accommodated in the notch 353F of the first movable body 350F, and the protrusion toward the first guide path GP1 is avoided. Thereby, it is suppressed that the behavior of the game ball flowing down the first guide route GP1 is disturbed by being caught with the edge of the second inclined portion 392F.

  When the first movable body 350F moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the first shutter 370F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction (synchronization) with it. Thereby, the entrance part 332 of the 1st entrance part 331 is closed, and entrance to the entrance part 332 becomes impossible (refer to Drawing 30 (b)-> Drawing 30 (a)).

  In the second winning mode, as shown in FIGS. 30A to 30C, the second movable body 360F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, and interlocked (synchronized) with the second shutter 380F. Move from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341 is opened, and entrance to the entrance portion 342 via the second guide route GP2 becomes possible.

  In a state where the second movable body 360F is disposed at the protruding position, the core 390F is inserted into the notched portion 363F of the second movable body 360F, and the blank of the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F is the second inclined surface of the core 390F. It is complemented by part 392F. That is, a series of rolling surfaces is formed by the upper surface 361F of the second movable body 360F and the second inclined portion 392F of the core 390F. On this rolling surface, the blank portion is complemented by the core 390F (second inclined portion 392F). Therefore, the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball moving along the second guide route GP2 can be suppressed, and the game ball can be smoothly guided toward the first incoming ball portion 331.

  In this state, the entire core 390F including the first inclined portion 391F is accommodated in the notched portion 363F of the second movable body 360F, and the protrusion toward the second guide path GP2 is avoided. Thereby, the behavior of the game ball flowing down the second guide route GP2 is suppressed from being disturbed by being caught with the edge of the second inclined portion 392F.

  When the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position as the round end condition is satisfied, the second shutter 380F moves from the retracted position to the protruding position in conjunction (synchronization) with it. Thereby, the entrance part 342 of the 2nd entrance part 341 is closed, and entrance to the entrance part 342 becomes impossible.

  By forming a notched portion in which one of the first movable body and the second movable body can be inserted through the other, an intersection arrangement of the first movable body and the second movable body can be realized. However, in such a configuration, the width of the recess is increased due to the influence of the thickness of the movable body and the crossing angle of both movable bodies. In consideration of such circumstances, it is not preferable that the restrictions on the thickness of the movable body and the crossing angle become stronger. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by using the core 390F disposed at the intersection of the two movable bodies 350F and 360F, the movable bodies 350F and 360F are used. The restrictions concerning the thickness and the crossing angle can be relaxed suitably. Thereby, a practically preferable configuration is realized.

  In a game machine of a type provided with a variable winning device that changes the probability of entering the entrance part, the monotony of the game can be suppressed by enhancing the sharpness at the time of guidance / non-guidance. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range at the time of guidance (the width of the game ball) is wide. However, when the movable body that simply forms the guide path is enlarged to increase the receiving width, the occupied area of the winning device increases. That is, when the game ball receiving width is increased to increase the number of game balls to be guided, the occupied area of the movable body increases. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, the core 390F (corresponding to the “passage forming portion”) that forms a part of one guide path is used to form a part of the other guide path. Thus, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of the variable winning unit 83F.

  When the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the movable bodies 350F and 360F and the core 390F, a gap such as a step is formed in the guide paths GP1 and GP2 due to the displacement between the movable bodies 350F and 360F and the core 390F. Arise. Such a gap can be a factor that hinders a smooth flow, such as a game ball being caught. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, if the moving direction of each movable body 350F, 360F is configured to match the protruding direction of the core 390F, the occurrence of the inconvenience due to the positional deviation of the movable bodies 350F, 360F is suppressed. it can.

  In addition, when a game ball is sandwiched between the movable bodies 350F and 360F and the core 390F, the core 390F may be deformed such as distortion. In this regard, by devising the operation direction of each movable body 350F, 360F as shown in the present embodiment, the movable bodies 350F, 360F and the core 390F are moved when the movable bodies 350F, 360F move from the retracted position to the protruding position. A game ball can be prevented from being caught between the two. By protecting the core 390F in this way, it is possible to contribute to the smooth flow of game balls in the guide routes GP1 and GP2.

<Third Embodiment>
In the said 2nd Embodiment, it was set as the structure which reduces the blank of a rolling surface using the fixed core 390F. Here, when the core 390F is provided with a function of forming a rolling surface, the deformation of the core 390F is caused by deformation or the like, so that the boundary between the core 390F and the movable bodies 350F and 360F on the rolling surface There can be a step in the part. In view of the fact that the core 390F is arranged in the specific area SE, which is the passing area of the game ball, it is assumed that the chance of the game ball colliding with the core 390F increases. In order to suppress the deformation of the core 390F, it is effective to improve the strength of the core 390F. However, in view of the fact that the core 390F is cantilevered, reinforcement at the root portion is important. Under such circumstances, there is a concern that the separation from the slits 318F and 319F located on both sides of the core 390F is increased, and as a result, it is difficult to reduce the blank generated on the rolling surface.

  One of the features of the present embodiment is that measures are taken in view of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the countermeasure will be described with reference to FIG. 31 with a focus on differences from the second embodiment. FIG. 31A is a perspective view showing the variable winning unit 83G, and FIG. 31B is a schematic view showing the relationship between the movable bodies 350G and 360G and the core 390G.

  The core 390G is assembled to the housing 310G so as to be slidable in the same direction (front-rear direction) as the sliding movement direction of the first movable body 350G and the second movable body 360G. The position is switched between a protruding position protruding from the 312G to the specific area SE and a retreat position where the protrusion to the specific area SE is avoided.

  The housing 310G is provided with a spring 396G as an urging means for urging the core 390G backward, and the core 390G is in a standby state at the retracted position by the urging force of the spring 396G.

  An arm portion 355G is formed at the rear end portion of the first movable body 350G, and the arm portion 355G is in contact with the receiving portion 395G formed on the back surface of the core 390G from the rear. Similarly, an arm portion 365G is also formed at the rear end portion of the second movable body 360G, and the arm portion 365G is in contact with the receiving portion 395G of the core 390G from the rear.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (1) → FIG. 31 (2), when the first movable body 350G slides from the retracted position to the protruding position, the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G moves the receiving portion 395G forward. The core 390G moves forward against the biasing force of the spring 396G. That is, the core 390G moves from the retracted position to the protruding position together with the first movable body 350G. Thereby, the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 350G and the core 390G (see FIG. 31A2). When the round end condition is satisfied and the first movable body 350G moves from the protruding position to the retracted position, the core 390G moves to the retracted position by the biasing force of the spring 396G. At this time, the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G functions as a stopper that prevents the core 390G from returning in advance, and the movements of the first movable body 350G and the core 390G are synchronized.

  When the core 390G is interlocked with the first movable body 350G, the core 390G is moved away from the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G, and the second movable body 360G and the core 390G are not interlocked.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (1) → FIG. 31 (3), when the second movable body 360G slides from the retracted position to the protruding position, the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G moves the receiving portion 395G forward. The core 390G moves forward against the biasing force of the spring 396G. That is, the core 390G moves from the retracted position to the protruding position together with the second movable body 360G. Thereby, the second guide path GP2 is formed by the second movable body 360G and the core 390G (see FIG. 31 (a3)). When the round end condition is satisfied and the second movable body 360G moves from the protruding position to the retracted position, the core 390G moves to the retracted position by the biasing force of the spring 396G. At this time, the arm portion 365G of the second movable body 360G functions as a stopper that prevents the core 390G from returning in advance, and the movements of the second movable body 360G and the core 390G are synchronized.

  When the core 390G is interlocked with the second movable body 360G, the core 390G is moved away from the arm portion 355G of the first movable body 350G, and the first movable body 350G and the core 390G are not interlocked.

  As described above, when the core 390G is movable, the core 390G waits in the retracted position in the initial state, and the protrusion to the specific area SE is avoided. Thereby, the collision opportunity of the game ball to the core 390G can be reduced, and the core 390G can be protected.

  In the state where the core 390G is disposed at the protruding position, the core 390G is sandwiched between one of the first movable body 350G and the second movable body 360G. For this reason, even when a game ball collides with the core 390G and a stress that deforms the core 390G is generated, the stress can be released to the movable bodies 350G and 360G. Moreover, since excessive deformation is regulated by the movable bodies 350G and 360G, concerns such as plasticity can be eliminated. For the above reasons, it is possible to suitably mitigate the effect of strength reduction caused by the core 390G being movable.

  In addition, as shown in the second embodiment, when the fixed core 390F is disposed in the specific area SE, the flow direction of the game ball that has reached the specific area SE changes when it hits the core 390F. , There is a possibility of heading to the entrance part 331,341. Therefore, in a situation where the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed by the movable bodies 350F and 360F, the incidents to the entrance portions 331 and 341 are accidentally caused by the shutters 370F and 380F provided alongside the entrance portions 331 and 341. The entry was suppressed.

  In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the core 390F is waiting at the retracted position in a situation where guidance to the ball entering portions 331 and 341 is not performed, and the protrusion to the specific area SE is avoided. Yes. For this reason, the rebound of the game ball as described above does not occur. For the above reasons, accidental entry to the entry parts 331 and 341 can be suppressed while the configuration corresponding to the shutters 370F and 380F is not provided.

  In addition, when the guide routes GP1 and GP2 are not formed, the protrusion of the core 390G to the game area PE is suppressed, thereby reducing the chance that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the core 390G. . In this way, by protecting the core 390G, when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the core 390 and the movable bodies 350G and 360G, the relative positions of both of them vary and guidance of the game ball is performed smoothly. It can be suppressed from being broken.

  When the core 390G is a retractable type, the core 390G moves to the protruding position following the movement of the movable bodies 350G and 360G to the protruding position, so that the timing of forming the guide paths GP1 and GP2 Deviation and the like can be suppressed.

  As described above, various effects such as protection of the core 390G can be expected if the core 390G is a retractable type. However, the need for a separate drive unit for driving the core 390G is an obstacle to simplifying and downsizing the configuration of the variable winning unit 83G. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the moving directions of the movable bodies 350G and 360G and the core 390G are unified, and the arm portions 355G and 365G (corresponding to “acting portions”) provided in the movable bodies 350G and 360G. ), The core 390G is pushed to the protruding position, so that it is not necessary to newly add a drive unit. Thereby, excessive complication of the configuration related to the variable winning unit 83G can be suppressed, and the variable winning unit 83G can be reduced in size.

<Modification 1>
In the third embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the guidance destination of the game ball is the first winning portion 331, and in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the guidance destination of the gaming ball is Although configured to be the second pitching portion 341, a third winning mode in which the guidance destination is switched in a predetermined order (for example, alternately) may be provided in the first pitching portion 331 and the second pitching portion 341. In such a configuration, it is not always necessary to return the core 390F to the retracted position every time the guidance destination is switched. For example, the core 390F is transferred between the first movable body 350F and the second movable body 360F when the object arranged at the projecting position of the first movable body 350F and the second movable body 360F is switched. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which 390F is maintained at the protruding position (a configuration in which return to the retracted position is avoided).

<Fourth embodiment>
In the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are kept in the retracted position under the situation where the game ball is not guided to the ball entering portions 331 and 341. It was set as the structure made to do. In the variable winning unit 83H shown in the present embodiment, the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are made to stand by at the protruding positions in a situation where the game balls are not guided to the ball entering portions 331 and 341. In order to realize such a configuration, a part of the configuration is changed from the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 32, the variable winning unit 83H shown in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83 shown in the first embodiment. 32A is a front view of the variable winning unit 83H, FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83H, and FIG. 32C is a longitudinal sectional view of the variable winning unit 83H.

  In the initial state where the game ball is not guided to any of the entrances 331 and 341 (non-guided state), as shown in FIG. 32, both the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are arranged at the protruding positions. . In the present embodiment, the rotation angle of the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 in the initial state is 0 °.

  When the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) under the initial state, the first movable body 350H moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. The first movable body 350H protrudes from the retracted position by rotating the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) in a state where the first movable body 350H is disposed at the retracted position. Return to position. As described above, when the first movable body 350H moves between the retracted position and the protruding position, the second movable body 360H is maintained at the protruding position.

  When the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) under the initial state, the second movable body 360H moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. The output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) under the situation where the second movable body 360H is disposed at the retracted position, so that the second movable body 360H is moved from the retracted position. Return to the protruding position. As described above, when the second movable body 360H moves between the retracted position and the protruding position, the first movable body 350H is maintained at the protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), in a state where both movable bodies 350H and 360H are arranged at the projecting positions, both the movable bodies 350H and 350H are formed by the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H and the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H. A series of stages ST over 360H is formed, and a game ball can be temporarily stopped on the stage ST.

  The portion constituting the stage ST on the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H is inclined downward toward the intersection, and also the portion constituting the stage ST on the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H. Inclined down towards the intersection. That is, the stage ST is configured such that the central portion in the juxtaposed direction of the ball entering portions 331 and 341 is the lowest. For this reason, the game ball that has reached the stage ST moves toward the central portion.

  The right and left portions of the stage ST are allowed to move the game ball across the central portion. That is, a game ball that has dropped to the first movable body 350H side moves to the second movable body 360H side, or a game ball that has dropped to the second movable body 360H side moves to the first movable body 350H side. Movement is allowed.

  Here, the right side portion and the left side portion of the stage ST have the same inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane, and the total length is also the same. Therefore, the game ball that has reached one of the right part and the left part is prevented from flowing out of the stage ST from the other side beyond the central part.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, the housing 310H is formed with a communication passage 317 for guiding the game ball placed on the stage ST to the lower side of the stage ST. Specifically, an inflow port 317aH of the communication passage 317H is formed in a portion (the central portion) of the front surface portion 312H of the housing 310H that is directly above the intersection of the two movable bodies 350H and 360H. An outlet 317bH of the communication passage 317H is formed at a portion immediately below the intersection of 360H.

  As shown in FIG. 32C, the upper surface 351H of the first movable body 350H and the upper surface 361H of the second movable body 360H are slightly inclined downward toward the front surface portion 312H of the housing 310H. With this inclination, the game ball placed on the stage ST is guided to the inflow port 317aH of the communication passage 317H. It should be noted that the rearward tilt angle is extremely small compared to the left / right tilt angle, and it is suppressed that the rearward tilt hinders the movement of the game ball along the guide paths GP1 and GP2. Yes.

  Here, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 33, the flow of guidance of the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341 will be described. In FIG. 33, for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350H and 360H arranged at the retracted positions are displayed using broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, in a state where both the first movable body 350H and the second movable body 360H are arranged at the protruding position (non-guided state or initial state), the first movable body 350H made of the first movable body 350H. The one guide route GP1 is cut by the second movable body 360H, and the second guide route GP2 including the second movable body 360H is cut by the first movable body 350H. As a result, the game ball cannot be guided in any of the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341. More specifically, the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331 and the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341 are covered by both movable bodies 350H and 360H from the center side of the specific area SE, and pass through the specific area SE. The entrance to the entrance parts 331 and 341 is avoided. In this state, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE will leave the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST → the communication path 317H.

  In the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, when the round start condition is satisfied, the second movable body 360H moves from the protruding position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 33 (a) → FIG. 33 (b). Thereby, the breakage of the first guide route GP1 by the second movable body 360H is released, and the first ball entry portion 331 is released. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the first incoming ball portion 331 and flows into the first incoming ball portion 331. For example, game balls that have stayed on the stage ST in the state shown in FIG. 33A are also guided to the first incoming ball portion 331.

  When the round end condition is satisfied, the second movable body 360H returns from the retracted position to the protruding position as shown in FIG. 33 (b) → FIG. 33 (a). As a result, the first guide route GP1 is cut again by the second movable body 360H, and the first ball entering portion 331 is closed. Thereafter, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE leaves the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST → the communication path 317H.

  As described in detail above, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the first movable body 350H is maintained at the protruding position, and the second movable body 360H moves to the protruding position / retracted position as the round progresses. By repeating the above, the first variable winning device is switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state. In consideration of such circumstances, it can be said that the first variable winning device in the present embodiment is configured by the first ball receiving portion 331, the first movable body 350H, and the second movable body 360H.

  In the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, when the round start condition is satisfied, the first movable body 350H moves from the protruding position to the retracted position as shown in FIG. 33 (a) → FIG. 33 (c). Thereby, the breakage of the second guide route GP2 by the first movable body 350H is released, and the second ball entering portion 341 is released. As a result, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the second incoming ball portion 341 and flows into the second incoming ball portion 341. For example, game balls that have stayed on the stage ST in the state shown in FIG. 33A are also guided to the second incoming ball unit 341.

  When the round end condition is satisfied, the first movable body 350H returns from the retracted position to the protruding position as shown in FIG. 33 (c) → FIG. 33 (a). As a result, the second guide route GP2 is cut again by the first movable body 350H, and the second ball entering portion 341 is closed. Thereafter, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE leaves the variable winning unit 83H through the stage ST → the communication path 317H.

  As described in detail above, in the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the second movable body 360H is maintained at the protruding position, and the first movable body 350H moves to the protruding position / retracted position as the round progresses. By repeating the above, the first variable winning device is switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state. In consideration of such circumstances, it can be said that the second variable winning device in the present embodiment is configured by the second pitching portion 341, the first movable body 350H, and the second movable body 360H.

  According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, the game ball that has arrived during the interval period does not immediately leave the variable winning unit 83H, but temporarily stops on the stage ST. For this reason, the game balls remaining on the stage ST when the guidance is resumed can be included in the guidance objects to the entrance parts 331 and 341, and the spilling of the game balls can be reduced. In this way, by adopting a configuration that increases the chance of entering a ball, it is possible to suppress irregular hits such that the launch of the game ball is avoided in accordance with the interval period, and to facilitate the progress of the game.

  In the present embodiment, by the combination of the two movable bodies 350H and 360H arranged at the protruding positions, both movable bodies 350H and 360H constituting the guiding means function as a shutter that covers the ball entering portions 331 and 341. ing. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of accidental entry to the entry parts 331 and 341 under a situation where the special game state (opening / closing execution mode) is not performed. And each movable body 350H, 360H serves as a guide means and a blocking means, thereby facilitating simplification of the drive mechanism and the like, and can contribute to improvement in durability and operational stability of the variable winning unit 83H.

  In addition, when the first movable body 350H is disposed at the retracted position, the first movable body 350H is closed (covered) with at least a part of the inlet 317aH of the communication passage 317H. A blocking unit for blocking the inflow of game balls may be provided. Similarly, when the second movable body 360H is disposed at the retracted position, the game to the inflow port 317a is closed by covering (covering) at least part of the inflow port 317aH of the communication passage 317H. A blocking portion for blocking the inflow of the sphere may be provided. About these blocking parts, it is good to comprise by the standing part which stands up from the front end part of movable bodies 350H and 360H, for example.

<Fifth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the game ball guidance destination is defined to be either the first incoming ball portion 331 or the second incoming ball portion 341 according to the type of jackpot. In this order, the guidance destinations of the game balls are switched, and the operation modes of the movable bodies 350 and 360 are changed from the first embodiment in order to realize such a movement. In the following, with reference to FIG. 34, a characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 34A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the variable winning unit 83, FIG. 34B is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning portion and the number of winning balls, and FIG. 34C is a schematic diagram showing an overview of switching of guidance destinations. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 34 (a), in the present embodiment, a drive unit 321a for the first movable body 350 and a drive unit 321b for the second movable body 360 are provided, and these are provided by the main controller 162. The movements of the drive units 321a and 321b can be individually controlled. Thereby, compared with 1st Embodiment, the restrictions which concern on the positional relationship of the movable bodies 350 and 360 are eased.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 34 (b), the player is given a privilege given to the player based on the entrance to the first entrance portion 331 and the entrance to the second entrance portion 341. The benefits to be given are the same (15). In other words, there is no difference in privilege between superior and inferiority depending on the game ball guidance destination in the opening / closing execution mode.

  As jackpot results, 16R probability variation jackpot results, 8R probability variation jackpot results, and 8R normal jackpot results are set. As shown in FIG. 34 (c), regardless of the jackpot result, the ball-entry portion that is the guidance destination of the game ball is switched in a predetermined order. Specifically, the guidance destination is alternately switched between the first and second ball entrances 331 and 341.

  Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 35 and 36, the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83 in the present embodiment will be described.

(State change process of variable winning unit 83)
As shown in FIG. 35, in the state switching process, first, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball is being guided to one of the first ball entering unit 331 and the second ball entering unit 341. judge. Specifically, this determination is performed based on the drive state of the drive motor 321 in the variable winning unit 83. If the guidance to the ball entering parts 331 and 341 is not in progress, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the round number counter OC is “0”. If the determination in step S502 is affirmative, the main prize winning opening / closing process is terminated.

  If a negative determination is made in step S502, the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S503, this state switching process is terminated. When the value of the round number counter OC is not “0” and the value of the timer counter TC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S504, and the guidance start process is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 36A, in the guidance start process, first, in step S601, it is determined whether or not the current round is the first round (first round). If an affirmative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S602, and the first movable body 350 is protruded from the retracted position to form a flow path (first guide route GP1) to the first ball entry portion 331. Process to move to. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the drive unit 321a. As a result, a first guide route GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 is formed in the specific area SE.

  If a negative determination is made in step S601, the process proceeds to step S603. In step S603, it is determined whether the starting round is an even-numbered round. If an affirmative determination is made in step S603, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, a process of moving the first movable body 350 to the retracted position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the drive unit 321a.

  If a negative determination is made in step S603, that is, if the starting round is an odd round, the process proceeds to step S605. In step S605, a process of moving the second movable body 360 to the retracted position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retraction position is output to the drive unit 321b.

  Returning to the description of FIG. 35 again, after executing the guidance start process in step S504, the process proceeds to step S505. In step S505, “15000” (corresponding to 30 sec) is set in the timer counter TC, and in step S506, “8” is set in the winning counter PC.

  After executing the process of step S506, a guidance start command is set in step S507 to indicate that the guidance to the ball entering parts 331 and 341 has been started (round has started), and this state switching process is performed. finish.

  Returning to the description of step S501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S501, that is, if it is determined that guidance to the first incoming ball portion 331 or the second incoming ball portion 341 is in progress, the process proceeds to step S508, where the timer It is determined whether or not the value of the counter TC is “0”. If the value of the timer counter TC is not “0”, the process proceeds to step S509, and whether or not the game ball has won the one set as the guidance destination among the first and second pitching parts 331 and 341. Is determined based on the detection signals from the detection sensors 334 and 344. If no winning has occurred, this state switching process is terminated.

  If a winning has occurred, a winning command setting process is executed in step S510. The winning command is output to the notification / production control device 140, and the production in the opening / closing execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is changed by the winning command.

  After the command setting process is executed in step S510, the process proceeds to step S511. In step S511, the value of the winning counter PC is decremented by 1, and in the subsequent step S512, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter PC is “0”. If the value of the winning counter PC is not “0”, the present state switching process is terminated as it is.

  When it is determined in step S512 that the value of the winning counter PC is “0”, or when an affirmative determination is made in step S508 (that is, when the value of the timer counter TC is determined to be “0”). This means that the round end condition (guidance end condition) is satisfied. In this case, guidance termination processing is executed in step S513.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (b), in the guidance end process, first, in step S701, it is determined whether or not the current round is the final round. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 16th round is the end of the 16R probability variation jackpot result, and whether or not the 8th round is the end of the 8R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result. Determine.

  If an affirmative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S702. In step S702, a process of moving the second movable body 360 from the protruding position to the retracted position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the drive unit 321b. Thereby, both the 1st movable body 350 and the 2nd movable body 360 return to a retracted position, and the variable winning unit 83 returns to an initial state (non-guide state).

  If a negative determination is made in step S701, the process proceeds to step S703. In step S703, it is determined whether or not the round to be ended this time is an even-numbered round. When an affirmative determination is made in step S703, a process of moving the first movable body 350 from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the drive unit 321a.

  If a negative determination is made in step S703, that is, if the round to be ended this time is an odd round, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, a process of moving the second movable body 360 from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the protruding position is output to the drive unit 321b.

  As shown in FIG. 35, after the guidance end process in step S513 is executed, the process proceeds to step S514, and the round number counter OC update process is executed. Specifically, when the value of the round number counter OC is not “0”, the same round number counter OC is decremented by 1 and when the value of the round number counter OC is “0”, the same round number counter OC. The value of “0” is maintained as “0”.

  Thereafter, in step S515, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round number counter OC is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S515, the process proceeds to step S516. In step S516, "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC.

  After executing the process of step S516, a guidance end command is set in step S517, and this state switching process ends. The set guidance end command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / production control device 140 determines the contents of the production corresponding to the end of the round based on the received guidance end command, and controls various devices so that the contents of the decided production are executed.

  Returning to the description of step S515, if it is determined in step S515 that the value of the round number counter OC is “0”, the process proceeds to step S518. In step S518, an ending start process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round is set for the ending in the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, ending waiting time information stored in advance in the ROM is set in a waiting time counter area provided in various counter areas of the RAM.

  Then, after setting an ending command in step S519, this state switching process is terminated. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / production control device 140 in step S201 in the normal process (FIG. 19). The notification / production control device 140 determines the content of the production corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode end based on the received ending command, and controls various devices so that the content of the decided production is executed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 39, the movement of the variable winning unit 83 in the opening / closing execution mode will be described. FIG. 37 is a timing chart showing the game flow in the opening / closing execution mode, and FIGS. 38 and 39 are schematic diagrams showing the relationship between the state of the variable winning unit 83 and the flow of the game ball.

  At the timing of shifting to the opening / closing execution mode, the two movable bodies 350 and 360 are both disposed at the retracted position, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE passes through the specific area SE toward the out port 86 (see FIG. 38 (a)). At the timing ta1 after the opening effect ends, that is, the start timing of the first round, the first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position as shown in FIG. As a result, the first guidance path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first pitching portion 331 is formed in the specific area SE, and the first variable winning device is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state (see FIG. 38B). ). In this state, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE rolls along the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and flows into the first ball entering portion 331.

  The second movable body 360 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position at the timing ta2 when the number of balls entering the first ball entering portion 331 reaches a predetermined number (upper limit) and the round end condition is satisfied. As a result, the first guide route GP1 is cut by the second movable body 360, and the first ball entering portion 331 is covered from the center side of the specific area SE by the two movable bodies 350 and 360, and the first variable prize winning device is received. The state is switched to the non-accepting state (see FIG. 38C).

  The second guide path GP2 is formed by moving the second movable body 360 to the protruding position. However, the second guide path GP2 is cut by the first movable body 350 at an intermediate position thereof, so that the specific region A game ball that has reached SE is prevented from heading to the second entrance 341. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE in this state temporarily stops on the stage ST formed by the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360.

  That is, the game balls that have reached the specific area SE during the interval between rounds are restricted from flowing down the specific area SE and remain on the stage ST. In the present embodiment, the interval period is 2 sec, and the game ball firing cycle is 0.6 sec. For this reason, about three game balls will accumulate on the stage ST during the interval period.

  Note that the overall length of the stage ST is greater than three times the diameter of the game ball, and the number of game balls that can be stopped (maximum storage number) is greater than the maximum number of game balls that are fired during the interval period. Has also increased.

  At the timing of ta3 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of ta2, that is, the start timing of the second round, the first movable body 350 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the second variable winning device is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state (see FIG. 38D). As a result, the game balls staying on the stage ST are directed to the second incoming ball portion 341, and these game balls flow into the entrance portion 342 of the second incoming ball portion 341.

  Note that the maximum storage amount of game balls in the stage ST is smaller than the predetermined number (for example, four), and the game balls exceeding the predetermined number will spill to the side of the variable winning unit 83. By setting it as such a structure, the ball | bowl exceeding the upper limit number mentioned above generate | occur | produces, and it is suppressing that an excessively many privilege is provided to a player.

  The first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position at the timing ta4 when the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 341 reaches a predetermined number (upper limit) and the round end condition is satisfied. As a result, the second guide route GP2 is cut by the first movable body 350, and the second ball-entering portion 341 is covered by the two movable bodies 350, 360 from the center side of the specific area SE, and the second variable winning device is received. The state is switched to the non-accepting state (see FIG. 39 (e)).

  The first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 350 moving to the protruding position, but the first guide path GP1 is cut off at a midway position by the second movable body 360. A game ball that has reached SE is prevented from heading toward the first ball entrance portion 331. The game ball that has reached the specific area SE in this state temporarily stops on the stage ST. That is, the game balls that have reached the specific area SE during the interval between rounds are restricted from flowing down the specific area SE and remain on the stage ST.

  At the timing of ta5 when the interval period has elapsed from the timing of ta4, that is, the start timing of the third round, the first movable body 350 moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, the first variable winning device is switched from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state (see FIG. 38 (f)). As a result, the game balls staying on the stage ST go to the first entrance portion 331, and these game balls flow into the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331.

  Thereafter, the round game progresses by repeating the operations of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 so that the first and second entrance portions 331 and 341 alternately serve as guide destinations. . Then, at the timing when the final round is finished, both movable bodies 350 and 360 are arranged at the retracted position, and the guidance to the first and second ball entering portions 331 and 341 is finished (see FIG. 38 (g)). .

  In the present embodiment, the eighth round or the sixteenth round is set to be the final round, and the guidance destination of the game ball in these final rounds is the second incoming ball portion 341. That is, in the final round, the first movable body 350 is disposed at the retracted position and the second movable body 360 is disposed at the protruding position. At the end of the final round, the variable winning unit 83 is returned to the initial state by moving the second movable body 360 from the protruding position to the retracted position while the first movable body 350 is disposed at the retracted position.

  According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  The first movable body 350 that guides the game ball to the first ball entrance portion 331 functions as a stopper that restricts the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entrance portion 341, and guides the game ball to the second ball entrance portion 341. The second movable body 360 that functions as a stopper that restricts the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entry portion 331. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the movement of the variable winning unit 83 and contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game in the opening / closing execution mode.

  In a configuration in which an interval period is set between rounds, a game ball launched during the interval period does not enter the entrance part and becomes a spilling ball (that is, investment is wasted). Actions such as refraining from launching a ball may be made. In view of the fact that the entrance to the entrance part is an opportunity for the progress of the game, there is a concern that such a delayed action hinders the smooth progress of the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is avoided that a game ball that has reached the specific area SE during the interval period passes through the specific area SE as it is, and then the first ball entering portion 331 or the second ball entering These game balls are stored until guidance to the ball unit 341 is resumed. In this way, by suppressing the generation of useless balls, it is possible to prompt the player to continue the release of the game balls and to facilitate the progress of the game.

  When a plurality of game balls remain on the stage ST, the plurality of game balls flow into the entrance part as a guidance destination at once as the guidance is resumed. By diversifying the movement (one or a plurality of game balls) of the game sphere heading to the entrance part, it is possible to contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the movement of the game sphere.

  The stage ST is formed so as to straddle the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, and the game ball can be stopped on both the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360. Yes. If both the movable bodies 350 and 360 are configured to form a retaining surface in this way, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that can be retained (stored) on the stage ST while suppressing an increase in the size of the variable winning unit 83. .

  The stage ST is configured to have a downward slope toward the center, and the game balls that have reached the stage ST accumulate in order from the position closer to the center. When the left and right entrance parts 331 and 341 are used together, the next guide destination is the first entrance part 331 and the second entrance place by preferentially collecting the game balls at the position closer to the center. Even if it becomes any of the part 341, it can suppress that the flow of the game ball toward the ball-entry parts 331 and 341 becomes slow. Incidentally, the configuration in which the stage ST is recessed at the center is an idea for increasing the number of game balls that can be stopped while suppressing the increase in the lateral width of the stage ST.

  Note that the game ball being stopped is movable between the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360, and the monotonous movement of the game ball that has reached the stage ST is suppressed.

  When the variable winning unit 83 is switched from the non-guide state to the first guide state, not only the game balls that are stopped on the first movable body 350 but also the game balls that are stopped on the second movable body 360 Is also guided to the first entrance portion 331. Specifically, when the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position, the game ball that has been stopped on the second movable body 360 loses its support and falls, but the first movable body 350 is dropped to the destination. Since the (right half) is located, the dropped game balls are guided to the first incoming ball portion 331 together with the game balls stopped on the first movable body 350. Further, when the variable winning unit 83 is switched from the non-guide state to the second guide state, not only the game ball stopped on the second movable body 360 but also the game stopped on the first movable body 350. The sphere is also guided to the second entrance 341. Specifically, when the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position, the game ball stopped on the first movable body 350 loses its support and falls, but the second movable body 360 is dropped to the destination. Since the (left half) is located, the dropped game balls are guided to the second entrance 341 together with the game balls stopped on the second movable body 360. In this way, by making the object to be guided regardless of which movable body 350, 360 is stopped, it is possible to suppress the spilling of the game ball and to appropriately increase the above-mentioned entry opportunities. Further, increasing the number of game balls to be guided is a diversification of the manner of entering the ball entering parts 331 and 341 (for example, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be guided to the ball entering parts 331 and 341 together). ) Can be suitably realized.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of game balls that remain on the stage ST is substantially smaller than the upper limit number of balls entered in each round. For this reason, even if it has a relief function mentioned above, it can control suitably that the privilege given to a player by a stop function becomes excessive.

  By adopting a configuration in which the stage ST is formed over the two guide routes GP1 and GP2, it is possible to suppress the location that the player should pay attention to over a wide area due to the presence of the stage ST. This is a preferable configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game ball being stopped.

  In the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83 is alternately switched between the first guide state and the second guide state with the non-guide state interposed therebetween. For this reason, the game balls that have not entered one of the entrance parts are guided to the other entrance part after stopping. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83 is provided with two states for preventing the inflow of game balls to both the ball entering portions 331 and 341. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 39 (g), when the movable bodies 350 and 360 are disposed at the retracted position, the game ball passes through the specific area SE, As shown in FIG. 38 (c) and FIG. 39 (e), the movable region 350, 360 is disposed at the protruding position, so that the passage of the specific region SE is impossible. Of these two states, the latter is a state in which the game ball that has reached the specific area SE can flow into the incoming ball portions 331 and 341 later, which is slightly advantageous to the player compared to the former. Thus, by providing a plurality of states that prevent inflow, diversification of games can be suitably realized.

  It should be noted that a speed reduction portion that reduces the flow velocity of the game ball on the upper surfaces of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 shown in the fifth embodiment (a depressing portion: for example, a plurality of irregularities arranged in the guide direction) May be provided. More specifically, at least one of the upper surfaces of the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 has a speed reduction portion (reducing portion) on the upstream side (upper side) of the intersection of the movable bodies 350 and 360. May be provided. In this case, for example, if a difference between advantages and disadvantages is set for a privilege or the like given to the first entrance portion 331 and the second entrance portion 341, the entrance on the disadvantage side of both movable bodies 350 and 360 is entered. By providing the above-mentioned deceleration part on one side that guides the game ball to the club, the game ball guided to the disadvantaged ball-entry part is more likely to change the flow-down destination to the ball-entering part on the advantageous side. It can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention.

  In particular, if the speed reducing part is provided on one of the movable bodies 350 and 360, even when the interval period between rounds is constant, the first guiding state is switched to the second guiding state, and It is possible to cause a difference in the spilling of the game balls (in other words, the entrance rate) when switching from the second guidance state to the first guidance state, and further diversification of games can be realized with a simple configuration.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 that constitutes the guiding means for the first incoming ball portion 331 intersects the second movable body 360 that constitutes the guiding means for the second incoming ball portion 341. It was set as the structure made to do. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the movable bodies 350I and 360I and the configuration related thereto are different from those in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 40, the configuration of the variable prize unit 83I in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the variable prize unit 83 shown in the first embodiment. 40A is a front view of the variable winning unit 83I, FIGS. 40B and 40C are schematic views showing the movement of the variable winning unit 83I, and FIG. 40D is a schematic view showing another variable winning unit 83Y. . In FIG. 40, for convenience of explanation, the movable bodies 350I and 360I arranged at the retracted position are displayed using broken lines.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (a), in the specific area SE between the first and second ball receiving portions 331I and 341I, the first guiding means for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331I is provided. A movable body 350I and a second movable body 360I as guide means for guiding the game ball to the second entrance 341 are disposed. These movable bodies 350I and 360I are slidable in the front-rear direction, and move to a protruding position that protrudes into the specific area SE and a retreat position in which the protrusion to the specific area SE is suppressed according to the game situation.

  Both the first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I have a substantially plate shape, and are arranged so that one plate surface faces upward. The upper surface 351I of the first movable body 350I is inclined downward toward the first incoming ball portion 331, and the first movable body 350I is disposed at the protruding position, so that the game ball is placed in the specific area SE as the first incoming ball. A first guide route GP1 for guiding to the portion 331I is formed (see FIG. 40B). The upper surface 361I of the second movable body 360I is inclined downward toward the second incoming ball portion 341I, and the second movable body 360I is arranged at the protruding position, so that the game ball is placed in the specific area SE as the second incoming ball. A second guide route GP2 for guiding to the part 341I is formed (see FIG. 40B).

  The first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I are arranged one above the other. Specifically, the first and second movable parts 331I and 341I are shifted in height so that the former is slightly above the latter, and the first movable body 350I and the second movable body 360I. Are arranged vertically so that the first movable body 350I is on the upper side and the second movable body 360I is on the lower side.

  The first movable body 350I is disposed at a position overlapping the second guide route GP2 in the front-rear direction, and the operation region of the first movable body 350I and the second guide route GP2 partially overlap each other. In arranging the two movable bodies so as to be vertically aligned, as illustrated in FIG. 40D, the movable bodies 350Y and 360Y are arranged so as to avoid duplication of the guide paths as described above. It is also possible to arrange it away. However, with such a configuration, the vertical dimension L4 of the variable winning unit 83Y tends to be large. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the operation region of the first movable body 350I is configured to overlap the second guide path GP2 by the second movable body 360I, the vertical width of the variable winning unit 83I is reduced. Thus, the miniaturization of the variable winning unit 83I can be promoted.

<Modification 1>
When the first entrance 331J and the second entrance 341J are arranged so that the entrance portions 332J and 342J face each other, the height position of the first entrance 331J and the second entrance By providing a difference in the height position of 341J, it is assumed that the possibility that the game ball bounced back to the lower entrance portion will go to the entrance portion of the upper entrance portion. This becomes a factor of increasing the probability of occurrence of the above-mentioned accidental entry. Here, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41 (a), if the first shutter 370J that opens and closes the first ball entry 331J and the second shutter 380J that opens and closes the second ball entry 341J are used together, The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. Since the shutters 370J and 380J are the same as the shutters 370B and 380B described in the second modification of the first embodiment, description of specific structures and operations is omitted.

<Modification 2>
As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 41 (b), an upright portion 367K that rises upward is provided at the end of the second movable body 360K on the first ball entry portion 331K side, and the second movable body 360K is disposed at the protruding position. In this state, the upright portion 367K is configured to face the entrance portion 332K of the first entrance portion 331K from the specific area SE side, and prevents the inflow of game balls to the entrance portion 332K of the first entrance portion 331K. It is also possible.

<Modification 3>
In the sixth embodiment, the first movable body 350I for the first incoming ball portion 331I is arranged in parallel vertically so that the second movable body 360I for the second incoming ball portion 341I is on the lower side. Although it was set as the structure, it is not limited to this, You may change arbitrarily about the vertical positional relationship. For example, when the height position is shifted so that the first incoming ball portion is lower than the second incoming ball portion, the second movable body is on the upper side and the first movable body is on the upper side. Both movable bodies may be arranged vertically.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the first embodiment or the like, the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are switched between the accepting state and the non-accepting state by sliding the movable bodies 350 and 360 back and forth (variable winning unit 83). Is configured to switch to a non-guidance state / first guidance state / second guidance state). In the present embodiment, the specific configuration for switching these variable prize-winning devices between the accepting state and the non-accepting state is different from the first embodiment and the like. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 42, the variable winning unit 83L in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83L, and FIG. 42B is a front view of the variable winning unit 83L. The description of the same configuration as that of the first embodiment is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 42A, the variable winning unit 83L includes a first guide part 400L for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry part 331 and a second guide for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry part 341. 410L, the first guide route GP1 is formed in the specific region SE by the first guide portion 400L, and the second guide route GP2 is formed in the specific region SE by the second guide portion 410L. The configuration is the same as that of the first embodiment.

  The first guide portion 400L includes an upper left movable plate 401L that constitutes an upstream portion of the first guide route GP1, and a lower right movable plate 402L that constitutes a downstream portion of the first guide route GP1. The upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L have a flat plate shape, and both the movable plates 401L. 402L is arranged on the same plane.

  The upper left movable plate 401L is slidable in the front-rear direction, and its position is switched between a projecting position that projects into the specific area SE and a retreat position in which projecting into the specific area SE is suppressed by the sliding movement. On the other hand, the lower right movable plate 402L is slidable parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a (specifically, in an oblique direction), and its position is close to the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper left movable plate. It switches to a separated position where a gap through which a game ball can pass is generated between 401L and 401L. The lower right movable plate 402L is maintained in a state of protruding to the specific region SE in the entire range from the proximity position to the separation position.

  The second guide portion 410L includes an upper right movable plate 411L that constitutes an upstream portion of the second guide route GP2, and a lower left movable plate 412L that constitutes a downstream portion of the second guide route GP2. The upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L have a flat plate shape, and both the movable plates 411L. 412L is arrange | positioned so that it may be located on the same plane.

  The upper right movable plate 411L is slidable in the front-rear direction, and its position is switched between a projecting position that projects into the specific area SE and a retreat position in which projecting into the specific area SE is suppressed by sliding movement. On the other hand, the lower left movable plate 412L is slidable parallel to the front surface of the game board 80a (specifically, in an oblique direction), and its position is close to the upper right movable plate 411L and the upper right movable plate 411L. And a separation position where a gap through which a game ball can pass is generated. The lower left movable plate 412L is maintained in a state protruding to the specific region SE in the entire range from the close position to the separated position.

  Note that the first variable winning device in the present embodiment is configured by the first ball receiving portion 331, the upper left movable plate 401L, the lower right movable plate 402L, the upper right movable plate 411L, and the like. The second entrance 341 includes an upper right movable plate 411L, a lower left movable plate 412L, an upper left movable plate 401L, and the like.

  As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the lower right movable plate 402L constituting the first guide portion 400L and the upper right movable plate 411L constituting the second guide portion 410L are connected to the drive portion 321c via the link mechanism 325c. ing. The drive unit 321c is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. For the link mechanism 325cL, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the separation position to the proximity position slightly precedes the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L to the projection position → retraction position, and the upper right to the retraction position → projection position. A difference is made in the operation timing so that the movement of the movable plate 411L slightly precedes the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L from the proximity position to the separation position. In other words, in the link mechanism 325cL, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L to the separation position → proximity position is slightly slower than the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L to the protrusion position → retraction position, and to the proximity position → separation position. There is a delay mechanism for delaying the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L so that the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L from the retracted position to the protruding position is delayed.

  The upper left movable plate 401L constituting the first guide portion 400L and the lower left movable plate 412L constituting the second guide portion 410L are connected to the drive portion 321d via a link mechanism 325d. The drive unit 321d is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. As for the link mechanism 325dL, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L from the separation position to the proximity position slightly precedes the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L to the projection position → retraction position, and the upper left movable to the retraction position → projection position. A difference is made in the operation timing so that the movement of the plate 401L slightly precedes the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L from the proximity position to the separation position. In other words, in the link mechanism 325dL, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L to the separation position → proximity position is slightly slower than the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L to the projection position → retraction position, and the proximity position → retraction position to the separation position. There is a delay mechanism that delays the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L so as to be slightly slower than the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the protruding position.

  Here, the state change of the variable winning unit 83L and the flow of the game ball will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. In FIG. 43, for convenience of explanation, the movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the retracted position are displayed using broken lines.

  When the variable winning unit 83L is in an initial state where the variable winning unit 83L is not receiving (both the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are not receiving), the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are protruding positions. The lower right movable plate 402L and the lower left movable plate 412L are disposed at the separated positions. In this state, the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331 is covered from the center side of the specific area SE by the upper right movable plate 411L and the lower right movable plate 402L, and the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341 is covered. The upper left movable plate 401L and the lower left movable plate 412L cover the specific area SE from the center side. In other words, both the first variable winning device and the second variable winning device are in the non-accepting state, and the game balls that have reached the specific area SE enter the first and second ball entering portions 331 and 341. Is impossible.

  In this state, a passage portion 420L through which a game ball can pass is formed between the left movable plates 401L and 412L and the right movable plates 402L and 411L (the central portion of the specific area SE). The game ball that has reached the specific area SE travels to the out port 86 by passing through the passage portion 420L.

  An end portion (right end portion) constituting the wall surface (left wall surface) of the passage portion 420L with the upper left movable plate 401L and an end portion constituting the wall surface (left wall surface) of the passage portion 420L with the lower left movable plate 412L ( A gap (an operation gap of the lower left movable plate 412L) is formed between the right end portion) and the right end portion. The upper right movable plate 411L constitutes the wall surface (right wall surface) of the passage portion 420L and the end portion (left end portion) constituting the wall surface (right wall surface) of the passage portion 420L and the lower right movable plate 402L constitute the wall surface (right wall surface) of the passage portion 420L. A gap (an operation gap of the lower right movable plate 402L) is formed between the end (left end). These gaps are smaller than the diameter dimensions of the game balls, and the game balls are prevented from going to the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the respective ball entry parts 331 and 341 through the gaps.

  When the state changes to the opening / closing execution mode and the game ball is to be guided to the first pitching unit 331, the first variable winning device is switched from the non-receiving state to the receiving state (the variable winning unit 83L is not in the non-receiving state). The guidance state is switched to the first guidance state). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 43A to 43B, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (rises) from the separated position to the adjacent position, and the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate. A series of first guide routes GP1 that are inclined downward toward the first entrance portion 331 are formed by 402L. In accordance with this, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (retreats) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the inlet portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is opened.

  As described above, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L that forms the first guide route GP1 is configured to precede the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L that functions as a shutter. Specifically, the inflow of the game ball to the passing portion 420L is restricted before the timing at which the game ball toward the first ball entering portion 331 is allowed to move. In this way, the game ball heading toward the out port 86 through the passage portion 420L is placed on the lower right movable plate 402L, so that the game ball that should have been spilled originally is as if the lower right movable plate 402L. It can appear as if it has been saved.

  When the round end condition is satisfied, the first variable winning device is switched from the receiving state to the non-receiving state (the variable winning unit 83L is switched from the first guiding state to the non-guiding state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (b) → FIG. 43 (a), the upper right movable plate 411L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the first guide path GP1 is cut off. In accordance with this, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (lowers) from the close position to the separated position, and the guide function by the first guide route GP1 is released.

  As described above, the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L that functions as a shutter is configured to precede the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L that forms the first guide path GP1. Specifically, the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331 is covered by the upper right movable plate 411L in a state where the first guide route GP1 is formed (a state where the inflow to the passage portion 420L is restricted). . Even if the lower right movable plate 402L constituting the first guide route GP1 is not disposed in the proximity position, the game ball can be guided to the entrance portion 332 of the first entrance portion 331. Therefore, by causing the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L to precede, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the entry (excessive entry) after the round end condition is satisfied.

  Further, unlike the case of switching from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L precedes, so that it is possible to differentiate from the movement at the time of switching from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. This is also advantageous in highlighting the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L when switching from the non-accepting state to the accepting state.

  When the state changes to the opening / closing execution mode and the game ball is to be guided to the second pitching unit 341, the second variable winning device is switched from the non-receiving state to the receiving state (the variable winning unit 83L is not in the non-receiving state). The guidance state is switched to the second guidance state). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 43A to 43C, the lower left movable plate 412L slides (rises) from the separated position to the adjacent position, and is moved by the upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L. A series of second guide routes GP2 that are inclined downward toward the second entrance 341 are formed. In accordance with this, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (retreats) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the inlet portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is opened.

  As described above, the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L that forms the second guide route GP2 is configured to precede the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L that functions as a shutter. Specifically, the inflow of the game ball to the passage unit 420L is restricted before the timing at which the game ball toward the second ball entry unit 341 is allowed to move. In this way, by configuring the game ball that goes to the out port 86 through the passage portion 420L on the lower left movable plate 412L, the game ball that should have been spilled originally is relieved by the lower left movable plate 412L. It can look like

  When the round end condition is satisfied, the second variable winning device is switched from the receiving state to the non-receiving state (the variable winning unit 83L is switched from the second guiding state to the non-guiding state). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 43 (c) → FIG. 43 (a), the upper left movable plate 401L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruding position, and the second guide path GP2 is cut off. In accordance with this, the lower left movable plate 412L slides (lowers) from the close position to the separated position, and the guide function by the second guide route GP2 is released.

  As described above, the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L that functions as a shutter is configured to precede the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L that forms the second guide path GP2. Specifically, the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341 is covered by the upper left movable plate 401L in a state where the second guide route GP2 is formed (a state where inflow to the passage portion 420L is restricted). . Even if the lower left movable plate 412L constituting the second guide route GP2 is not disposed in the proximity position, the game ball can be guided to the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance portion 341. Therefore, by causing the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L to precede, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of entering (excessive entering) after the round end condition is satisfied.

  Further, unlike the case of switching from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, the movement of the upper left movable plate 401L precedes, so that it is possible to differentiate from the movement when the non-accepting state is switched to the accepting state. This is also advantageous in highlighting the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L when switching from the non-accepting state to the accepting state.

  In the seventh embodiment described in detail above, the operation region of the lower right movable plate 402L and the operation region of the lower left movable plate 412L partially overlap. As described above, if the operation regions are configured to overlap, the variable winning unit can be used to increase the total length of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 and increase the proportion of the game balls guided to the respective ball entering portions 331 and 341. It can suppress suitably that 83L enlarges.

  In game machines of the type equipped with a variable prize-winning device that changes the probability of entering the pitching section by the guide means, the monotony of the game is suppressed by strengthening the sharpness of the guide state / non-guide state it can. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guidance state is wide. However, when the size of the guide means is simply increased, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (operation stability) are likely to occur. Therefore, for example, as shown in the first guide portion 400L of the present embodiment, a plurality of movable plates 401L and 402L are used in combination, and the movable plates 401L and 402L are arranged at the passage formation position, thereby a series of first guide paths. If GP1 is formed, the size of each movable plate can be avoided. Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of a player's attention degree, the occurrence of the inconvenience resulting from it can be suppressed.

  Whether or not the game ball enters the entrance parts 331 and 341 depends on the lower movable plates 402L and 412L forming the downstream part. That is, even if the game ball moves along the upper movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the passage formation position (projecting position), the lower movable plates 402L and 412L are arranged at the passage formation position (proximity position). If not, the guidance to the ball entering parts 331 and 341 is not performed well. In such a configuration, the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L to the passage formation position (proximity position) is delayed from the arrangement of the upper movable plates 401L and 411L to the passage formation position (protrusion position). Thus, the degree of attention to the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L can be preferably improved.

  The upper movable plates 401L and 411L that form the upstream portions of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 have a certain amount of time for the game balls that have reached the upper movable plates 401L and 411L to pass through the upper movable plates 401L and 411L. A period is required. Therefore, if the upper movable plates 401L and 411L arranged at the passage formation position (projection position) are configured such that the passage formation positions (projection positions) of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L approach later, the upper A branch can be generated as to whether or not the game ball that has passed through the movable plates 401L and 411L can move to the lower movable plates 402L and 412L, and the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball can be preferably improved.

  In the present embodiment, since the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed prior to the opening of the ball entering portions 331 and 341, it is as if spilling was avoided for the game balls that reached the guide paths GP1 and GP2 prior to the opening. Can give the player a good impression. By relieving the spilling ball in this way, it is possible to prevent the game ball launching operation from being interrupted while waiting for the balls 331 and 341 to be released, and to promote the continuation of the game ball launch. be able to. This is preferable for suppressing a delay in the progress of the game. Moreover, the fairness of a game can be improved suitably by suppressing that the difference according to a player's skill arises in the privilege etc. which are obtained.

  Movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L (corresponding to the “passage forming portion”) from the separation position (passage non-formation position) to the proximity position (passage formation position) from the restriction position (protrusion position) to the allowable position (retraction position) ), The movement of the upper movable plates 402L and 412L is delayed from the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L. However, there is a possibility of giving the player the impression that he missed the opportunity to enter the game by spilling the game ball that should have entered. This is assumed to be a hindrance to exhibiting the various effects described above.

  Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the game balls that have fallen to the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restricting portions while the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are being formed are guided to the guide paths GP1 and GP2 side. With this configuration, it is possible to give a chance to enter the game ball. Therefore, the impression that the movement of the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restricting portion is delayed from the movement of the lower movable plates 402L and 412L as the flow path forming portion is a factor that misses the entrance opportunity. It can be made difficult and it can suppress suitably that it becomes a factor which reduces a player's willingness to play.

  Assuming that the movement of the game ball is restricted at a position close to the entrance parts 331 and 341, the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restriction parts are being restricted as soon as they are moved to the retracted position. There is a concern that the game ball will flow into the entrance parts 331 and 341 and it will be difficult to visually check the movement of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the game balls guided to the guide paths GP1 and GP2 by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restricting portions are configured to be away from the incoming ball portions 331 and 341 serving as guide destinations. Thus, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the formation of the guide routes GP1 and GP2 is preceded, the plurality of game balls that have been blocked by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restricting portions are instantly entered as the restriction is released. , 341. Such a movement of the game ball is preferable for enhancing the visual impact. Here, as shown in the embodiment, if the restricting portion interrupts the midway position of the guide routes GP1 and GP2, the guide routes GP1 and GP2 extend to the downstream side of the restricted portion. When such a movement of the game sphere occurs, the movement distance of the game sphere group can be earned, and the chance that the movement of the game sphere is missed can be reduced.

  In the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the passage length of the portion located upstream from the restricting position by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restricting portions is longer than the radial dimension of the game ball, and the upper movable plates 401L and 401L The game balls whose movement to the ball entry portions 331 and 341 is prevented by 411L can stand by in the upstream portion of the guide routes GP1 and GP2. For this reason, after the restriction is released, the game balls located on the guide routes GP1 and GP2 are promptly directed to the ball entering portions 331 and 341, which can contribute to smooth progress of the game.

  In particular, immediately after the release of the regulation, a difference in density is given to the incoming game balls so that the degree of crowding of the game balls toward the entrance parts 331 and 341 is lower than the timing when a certain period of time has passed since the release of the regulation. Can do. This is preferable for preventing the movement of the game ball toward the ball entering portions 331 and 341 from becoming monotonous.

  When the variable winning unit 83L is switched to the guide state, the above-described various technical significances exist for releasing the movement restriction by the upper movable plates 401L and 411L after forming the guide paths GP1 and GP2. However, if the movement of the variable winning unit 83L becomes complicated, there is a concern that the responsiveness when switching between the guide state / non-guide state is prolonged due to the extended operation period. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the variable winning unit 83L is switched to the guide state, the upper movable plates 401L and 411L as the restricting portions are placed in the restricting positions in advance. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  In the configuration in which the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the displacement of the movable plates 402L and 412L, the operation region of the movable plates 402L and 412L becomes a dead space where it is impossible or difficult to arrange other game parts. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, there is an operation region of the movable plate 402L when the first variable winning device is in the receiving state and an operation region of the movable plate 412L when the second variable winning device is in the receiving state. If a partly overlapping configuration is used, it is possible to suitably suppress the dead space from being unnecessarily increased even when a plurality of variable pitching devices are used in combination.

<Eighth Embodiment>
As shown in the seventh embodiment, in the configuration in which the game ball that has reached the specific area SE during non-guidance is directed to the out port 86 through the passage portion 420L, the passing frequency of the game ball in the passage portion 420L is high. It is assumed that In the present embodiment, one feature is that a device for smoothening the flow of game balls in the passage portion 420L is provided. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 44, the variable winning unit 83M in the present embodiment will be described focusing on differences from the variable winning unit 83L shown in the seventh embodiment. 44A is a front view of the variable winning unit 83M, and FIGS. 44B and 44C are schematic views showing the relationship between the state of the variable winning unit 83M and the flow of the game ball. In FIGS. 44B and 44C, for convenience of explanation, the movable plate arranged at the retracted position is indicated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the upper left movable plate 401M constituting the first guide portion 400M and the upper right movable plate 411M constituting the second guide portion 410M have end portions on the downstream side in the main body portion inclined obliquely. Flange portions 405M and 415M bent in the vertical direction are formed. The flange portions 405M and 415M are opposed to each other with a gap larger than twice the diameter of the game ball, and a wall surface of the passage portion 420M is configured by the flange portions 405M and 415M.

  There are game balls that flow into the passage part 420M that pass through the upper right movable plate 411M and those that pass through the upper left movable plate 401M. Can be suppressed. Further, the passage wall surface is constituted by the flange portions 405M and 415M, and the passage wall surface of the passage portion 420M is smoothed. Thereby, the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball when passing through the passage portion 420M is alleviated, and the flow of the game ball is suppressed from being delayed in the variable winning unit 83M.

  In the state where the lower movable plates 402M and 412M are arranged at the separated positions, the end of the movable plates 402M and 412M is prevented from projecting toward the passing portion 420M beyond the flange portions 405M and 415M. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (b), when the first variable winning device is in the accepting state, the first guide route GP1 is formed by the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M. A flange portion 405M (see FIG. 44A) is located on the extension of the operation area of the lower right movable plate 402M, and the upper surface of the lower right movable plate 402M is relative to a virtual plane including the upper surface of the upper left movable plate 401M. Offset to the bottom. For this reason, there is a step in the middle of the first guide route GP1 in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (c), when the second variable winning device is in the accepting state, a second guide route GP2 is formed by the upper right movable plate 411M and the lower left movable plate 412M. A flange portion 415M (see FIG. 44A) is located on the extension of the operation area of the lower left movable plate 412M, and the upper surface of the lower left movable plate 412M is lower than the virtual plane including the upper surface of the upper right movable plate 411M. Is offset. For this reason, there is a step in the middle of the second guide route GP2 in the present embodiment.

  As described above, when the flow of the game ball in the passage portion 420M is smoothed using the flange portions 405M and 415M, the operation area of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M is limited by the flange portions 405M and 415M. . Therefore, such a limitation is overcome by forming a step in the middle of the guide routes GP1 and GP2.

  Here, increasing the lateral width of the passage portion 420M is advantageous in achieving smooth flow of the game ball. However, in such a configuration, the slide stroke of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M becomes a factor. In the present embodiment, by providing the step, the gap generated between the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M and the gap generated between the upper right movable plate 411M and the lower left movable plate 412M are increased to some extent. Is possible. Thereby, it is suppressed that the said slide stroke becomes large too much. More specifically, the operation area of the lower right movable plate 402M is secured using the area immediately below the first ball entry portion 331, and the operation area of the lower left movable plate 412M is an area immediately below the second ball entry portion 341. It is secured by using. As described above, it is preferable to suppress the increase in the slide stroke in order to suppress the lateral extension of the lower movable plates 402M and 412M, and to realize downsizing of the entire variable winning unit 83M.

  In addition, it is advantageous to improve the degree of attention to the variable winning unit or the like to switch between the guide state / non-guide state using a plurality of movable bodies in combination. However, in such a configuration, when the operation of any one of the movable bodies becomes incomplete, the guide function cannot be performed well. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in the reliability of the variable winning unit.

  In the present embodiment, the upper left movable plate 401M and the lower right movable plate 402M are combined to form a first guide route GP1, and a game ball passing through the first guide route GP1 moves through the upper right movable plate 411M. Instead, it flows into the first entrance 331. In such a configuration, when the first guide route GP1 is not formed well even though the upper right movable plate 411M is retracted to the retracted position and the first ball entering portion 331 is opened, the first guide route GP1 is not formed. It becomes difficult to enter the entrance portion 331.

  For example, when the movement of the lower right movable plate 402M is hindered by a game ball being sandwiched between the lower right movable plate 402M and the upper left movable plate 401M, the first guide route GP1 is not formed well, The possibility that the player will miss the benefits that should be originally obtained is increased.

  In this regard, in the present embodiment, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed by providing a step in the guide routes GP1 and GP2. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44 (d), a game ball is placed between the lower right movable plate 402M and the flange portion 405M of the upper left movable plate 401M in the process of moving the lower right movable plate 402M to the close position. When B1 is sandwiched, the game ball B1 is pushed upward or downward to leave the operation area of the lower right movable plate 402M. Here, even if the game ball B1 is bitten and the movement of the lower right movable plate 402M to the adjacent position is prevented, the lower surface of the first guide route GP1 is complemented by the game ball B1. It becomes. Although the game ball is convex upward, the amount of protrusion is reduced by the step, so that it is possible to suppress the game ball B1 from becoming an obstacle that hinders the flow of the subsequent game ball B2. As described above, even if the movement of the lower right movable plate 402M is hindered, the inflow to the first ball entering portion 331 through the first guide route GP1 is prevented as long as the upper right movable plate 411M is retracted. By being allowed, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the operation mode of the variable prize-winning unit 83L shown in the seventh embodiment is changed, and, as in the fifth embodiment, a device for promoting the continuation of the game ball launching operation is made. Is one of the features. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 45 (a), the above-described device will be described focusing on the differences from the fifth embodiment. FIG. 45A is a schematic diagram showing a transmission path of driving force.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (a), in the variable prize unit 83L shown in the present embodiment, the first drive part 321eL for the first guide part 400L and the second guide are used as power parts in the variable prize unit 83L. A second drive unit 321fL for the unit 410L is provided. The first drive unit 321eL is connected to the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L constituting the first guide unit 400L via a link mechanism 325eL, and the second drive unit 321fL configures the second guide unit 410L. The upper right movable plate 411L and the lower left movable plate 412L are connected via a link mechanism 325fL.

  The drive units 321eL and 321fL are stepping motors, and the output shaft rotates in a first specific direction (for example, clockwise direction) and a second specific direction (for example, counterclockwise direction) based on a drive signal from the main control device 162. It works like that. Thereby, the arrangement of the movable plates 401L, 402L, 411L, and 412L to be driven is individually changed.

  Specifically, the upper left movable plate 401L constituting the first guide portion 400L moves from the protruding position to the retracted position when the output shaft of the first driving portion 321eL rotates in the first specific direction from the initial position. . When the upper left movable plate 401L is disposed at the retracted position, the output shaft of the first drive unit 321eL rotates in the second specific direction and returns to the initial position, so that the upper left movable plate 401L protrudes from the retracted position. Return to position. When the upper left movable plate 401L is operated in this way, the lower right movable plate 402L remains in the standby position.

  The lower right movable plate 402L constituting the first guide part 400L moves from the separated position to the close position as the output shaft of the first drive part 321eL rotates in the second specific direction from the initial position. Then, when the lower right movable plate 402L is disposed at the proximity position, the first drive unit 321eL rotates in the first specific direction and returns to the initial position, so that the lower right movable plate 402L is moved from the proximity position. Return to the separation position. When the lower right movable plate 402L is operated in this way, the upper left movable plate 401L remains in the standby position at the protruding position.

  The upper right movable plate 411L constituting the second guide portion 410L moves from the protruding position to the retracted position when the output shaft of the second drive portion 321fL rotates in the second specific direction from the initial position. When the upper left movable plate 401L is disposed at the retracted position, the output shaft of the second drive unit 321fL rotates in the first specific direction and returns to the initial position, so that the upper right movable plate 411L protrudes from the retracted position. Return to position. When the upper right movable plate 411L is operated in this way, the lower left movable plate 412L remains in the standby position.

  The lower left movable plate 412L constituting the second guide portion 410L moves from the separated position to the close position by the output shaft of the second drive portion 321fL rotating in the first specific direction from the initial position. Then, when the lower left movable plate 412L is disposed in the proximity position, the second drive unit 321fL rotates in the second specific direction and returns to the initial position, so that the lower left movable plate 412L is separated from the proximity position. Return to. When the lower left movable plate 412L is operated in this manner, the upper right movable plate 411L remains on standby at the protruding position.

  Regarding the state switching process of the variable winning unit 83L in the present embodiment, the main flow is the same as the state switching process (see FIG. 35) shown in the fifth embodiment, but the guidance start process and the guidance The details of the termination process are different from the state switching process shown in the fifth embodiment. Hereinafter, the guidance start process and the guidance end process will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the guidance start process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the current round is the first round (first round). If an affirmative determination is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S802, and the lower right movable plate 402L is moved from the separated position to the adjacent position so as to form a flow path (first guide path GP1) to the first ball entry portion 331. The process of moving to (up) is performed. Specifically, a driving signal for moving the proximity position is output to the first driving unit 321eL.

  After executing the process of step S802, the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, a process of moving (retracting) the upper right movable plate 411L from the protruding position to the retracted position is performed in order to open the inlet portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the second drive unit 321fL.

  Note that the movement of the upper right movable plate 411L to the retracted position is delayed with respect to the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L to the proximity position, and the first guide is preceded by the opening of the first ball entry portion 331. A route GP1 is formed.

  If a negative determination is made in step S801, the process proceeds to step S804. In step S804, it is determined whether the starting round is an even-numbered round. If a positive determination is made in step S804, the process proceeds to step S805. In step S805, a process of moving (retracting) the upper left movable plate 401L from the protruding position to the retracted position is performed in order to open the second entrance 341. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the first drive unit 321eL.

  Returning to the description of step S804, if a negative determination is made in step S804, that is, if the starting round is an odd-numbered round, the process proceeds to step S806. In step S806, a process of moving (retracting) the upper right movable plate 411L from the protruding position to the retracted position is performed in order to open the inlet portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the retracted position is output to the second drive unit 321fL.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 45C, the guidance end process will be described. In the guidance end process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the round to be ended this time is the final round. Specifically, if the current opening / closing execution mode corresponds to the 16R probability variation jackpot result, it is determined whether or not the 16th round is finished, and the current opening / closing execution mode is the 8R probability variation jackpot result or the 8R normal jackpot result. If it corresponds to the result, it is determined whether or not the eighth round has ended.

  If a positive determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S902. In step S902, a process of moving (advancing) the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the protruding position in order to close the second ball entering portion 341 is performed. Specifically, a drive signal for projecting position movement is output to the first drive unit 321eL. After executing the process of step S902, the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, processing for moving (lowering) the lower left movable plate 412L from the proximity position to the separation position is performed in order to release the guidance of the game ball along the second guidance route GP2. Specifically, a drive signal for moving the separation position is output to the second drive unit 321fL.

  When the upper left movable plate 401L returns to the projecting position and the lower left movable plate 412L returns to the separated position, the variable winning unit 83L returns to the initial state.

  Returning to the description of step S901, if a negative determination is made in step S901, the process proceeds to step S904. In step S904, it is determined whether the current round is an even-numbered round. If a positive determination is made in step S904, the process proceeds to step S905.

  In step S905, processing for moving (advancing) the upper left movable plate 401L from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed in order to close the second incoming ball portion 341. Specifically, a drive signal for projecting position movement is output to the first drive unit 321eL. After executing the process of step S905, the process proceeds to step S906.

  In step S906, the flow path in the specific area SE is switched from the second guide route GP2 that guides the game ball to the second entrance portion 341 to the first guide route GP1 that guides the game ball to the first entrance portion 331. Route switching processing is performed. In the flow path switching process, a drive signal for moving the left lower movable plate 412L from the close position to the separate position is output to the second drive unit 321fL, and the lower right movable plate 402L is moved from the separate position to the close position. A drive signal for moving the proximity position is output to the first drive unit 321eL.

  Returning to the description of step S904, if a negative determination is made in step S904, that is, if the round to be ended this time is an odd-numbered round, the process proceeds to step S907. In step S907, a process of moving (advancing) the upper right movable plate 411L from the retracted position to the protruding position is performed in order to close the first ball entry portion 331. Specifically, a drive signal for projecting position movement is output to the second drive unit 321fL. After executing the process of step S907, the process proceeds to step S908.

  In step S908, the flow path in the specific area SE is changed to switch from the first guide route GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 to the second guide route GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341. Route switching processing is performed. In the flow path switching process, a drive signal for moving the lower right movable plate 402L from the close position to the separate position is output to the first drive unit 321eL, and the lower left movable plate 412L is moved from the separate position to the close position. A drive signal for moving the proximity position is output to the second drive unit 321fL.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48, the relationship with the game flow in the opening / closing execution mode will be described. FIG. 46 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game, and FIGS. 47 and 48 are schematic views showing the relationship between the movement of the variable winning unit 83L and the flow of the game ball. 47 and 48, the movable plates 402L and 412L arranged at the retracted positions are indicated by broken lines for convenience of explanation.

  As shown in FIG. 46, at the timing of tb0 when the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are arranged at the protruding position, and the lower right movable plate 402L and the lower left movable plate 412L are arranged at the separated positions. A vertically long passage portion 420L through which a game ball can pass is formed in the center of the specific area SE. The upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L are inclined downward toward the entrance side of the passage portion 420L. For game balls that have flowed down the game area PE and reached the specific area SE of the variable winning unit 83L, the upper left movable board 401L. And it is guided to the passing part 420L by the upper right movable plate 411L. The game ball guided to the passing part 420L passes through the specific area SE through the passing part 420L and heads toward the out port 86 (see FIG. 47A).

  At the timing tb1 when the opening / closing execution mode is entered and a predetermined opening period has elapsed, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (rises) from the separation position to the proximity position. As a result, a series of first guide paths GP1 toward the first ball entering portion 331 is formed in the specific area SE by the upper left movable plate 401L and the lower right movable plate 402L. By disposing the lower right movable plate 402L in the proximity position, the entrance of the passage portion 420L is covered from above, and the inflow of game balls to the passage portion 420L is avoided.

  Immediately after that, at the timing of tb2, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (retreats) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the first ball entry portion 331 is released. Thereby, the first variable winning device is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. Thereafter, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is guided to the first ball entering section 331 through the first guide route GP1 (see FIG. 47 (a) → FIG. 47 (b)).

  When the first variable winning device is set to the accepting state, the first guide route GP1 is formed slightly ahead of the opening of the first pitching portion 331, and the flow of the game ball to the passage portion 420L is hindered. Will be. For this reason, the inflow of the game ball that has been directed to the passage portion 420L to the passage portion 420L is avoided, and the avoided game ball remains on the first guide route GP1. That is, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE before the upper right movable plate 411L functioning as a shutter moves to the retreat position temporarily remains in the first guide route GP1, and the upper right movable plate 411L moves to the retreat position. Then, it goes to the first entrance part 331. That is, as the distance between the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball is shortened, the opportunity for a plurality of game balls to go to the first ball entering portion 331 together immediately after the first ball entering portion 331 is released. Therefore, at the timing immediately after the first variable winning device is switched to the receiving state, the pitching frequency is higher than the timing at which a certain period has elapsed since the first variable winning device was switched to the receiving state.

  At the timing of tb3 when the number of balls entering the first ball entering portion 331 reaches the upper limit, the upper right movable plate 411L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruding position when the round end condition is satisfied. As a result, the first variable prize-winning device is switched from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, and it is impossible to enter the first entering part 331 (see FIG. 47 (c)).

  In this state, since the first lower right movable plate 402L is still arranged at the close position and the first guide route GP1 is maintained, the first guide route GP1 is cut off by the upper right movable plate 411L. The game ball cannot be moved further downstream than the upper right movable plate 411L. More specifically, a horizontally long stage ST on which the game ball can roll is formed by the upper left movable plate 401L, the lower right movable plate 402L, and the upper right movable plate 411L in the specific region SE, and the game ball that has reached the specific region SE Can be stopped on this stage ST. That is, for the game ball that has reached the specific area SE during the interval between rounds, the passing of the variable winning unit 83L is avoided, and a chance to enter the ball is given again at the start of the next round.

  At the subsequent timing tb4, the first guide route GP1 is switched to the second guide route GP2 while maintaining the state where the stage ST is formed. Specifically, the lower right movable plate 402L slides (lowers) from the proximity position to the separation position, and the lower left movable plate 412L slides (ups) from the separation position to the proximity position. Thereby, the object that forms the lowermost part of the stage ST is switched from the lower right movable plate 402L to the lower left movable plate 412L (see FIG. 47 (c) → FIG. 47 (d)).

  In this replacement, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L and the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L are linked (synchronized). Thereby, the game ball accumulated on the stage ST is transferred from the lower right movable plate 402L to the lower left movable plate 412L, and the game ball is moved between the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L during the flow path switching. To avoid passing between.

  The operation path of the lower left movable plate 412L and the operation path of the lower right movable plate 402L intersect at an intermediate position. Therefore, the interference between the movable plates 401L and 402L is suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the lower left movable plate 412L passes through the intersection immediately after the lower right movable plate 402L passes through the intersection.

  When the lower right movable plate 402L is disposed in the proximity position, the lower right movable plate 402L is configured to straddle the intersection. If the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L is delayed, the upper end of the lower left movable plate 412L stays on the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L, and the lower left movable plate 412L interrupts the operation destination of the lower right movable plate 402L. It has been avoided. That is, the lower right movable plate 402L itself prevents the operation path of the lower right movable plate 402L from being cut off by the lower left movable plate 412L. Since the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L has a planar shape, the upper end portion of the lower left movable plate 412L slides on the lower surface of the lower right movable plate 402L, and the lower right movable plate 402L slides to the separated position. (Descent) is secured.

  At the timing of tb5 after the switching of the flow path is completed, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (retreats) from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the second ball entry portion 341 is released. Thereby, the second variable winning device is switched from the non-acceptance state to the acceptance state. Thereafter, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE will be guided to the second incoming ball portion 341 through the second guide route GP2 (see FIG. 48E).

  When the second variable winning device is set to the accepting state, the second guide route GP2 is formed slightly ahead of the opening of the second pitching portion 341, and the flow of the game ball to the passage portion 420L is hindered. Will be. For this reason, the inflow of the game ball toward the passage portion 420L to the passage portion 420L is avoided, and the avoided game ball remains in the second guide route GP2. That is, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE before the upper left movable plate 401L functioning as a shutter moves to the retracted position temporarily remains in the second guide route GP2, and the upper left movable plate 401L moves to the retracted position. It will head for the 2nd entrance part 341. At this time, since the distance between the preceding game ball and the subsequent game ball is reduced, the opportunity for a plurality of game balls to go to the second ball entry portion 341 together immediately after the second ball entry portion 341 is opened. . Therefore, at the timing immediately after the second variable winning device is switched to the receiving state, the pitching frequency is higher than the timing at which a certain period has passed since the second variable winning device was switched to the receiving state.

  In addition, since the game ball in which the guidance to the first pitching part 331 was terminated in the previous round is configured to be given a chance to enter the second pitching part 341, although the guidance destination is different, Spilling of game balls is preferably suppressed.

  At the timing of tb6 when the number of balls entering the second ball entrance section 341 reaches the upper limit, the upper left movable plate 401L slides (returns) from the retracted position to the protruding position when the round end condition is satisfied. As a result, the second variable prize-winning device is switched from the accepting state to the non-accepting state, and it is impossible to enter the second entering part 341 (see FIG. 48 (f)).

  In this state, since the lower left movable plate 412L is still arranged at the close position, the second guide route GP2 is maintained, but since the second guide route GP2 is cut off by the upper left movable plate 401L, It is impossible to move the game ball downstream from the movable plate 401L. More specifically, the stage ST is formed in the specific area SE by the upper left movable plate 401L, the lower left movable plate 412L, and the upper right movable plate 411L, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE stops on the stage ST. That is, for game balls that have reached the specific area SE during the interval between rounds, the passing of the variable winning unit 83L is avoided, and a chance to enter the ball is given again at the start of the next round.

  At the subsequent timing tb7, the second guide route GP2 is switched to the first guide route GP1 while maintaining the state where the stage ST is formed. Specifically, the lower left movable plate 412L slides (lowers) from the proximity position to the separation position, and the lower right movable plate 402L slides (ups) from the separation position to the proximity position. As a result, the object forming the lowermost part of the stage ST is switched from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L (see FIG. 48 (f) → FIG. 48 (g)).

  In this replacement, the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L and the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L are linked (synchronized). Thereby, the game ball accumulated on the stage ST is transferred from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L, and the game ball is moved between the upper left movable plate 401L and the upper right movable plate 411L during the flow path switching. To avoid passing between.

  The operation path of the lower left movable plate 412L and the operation path of the lower right movable plate 402L intersect at an intermediate position. Therefore, immediately after the lower left movable plate 412L passes through the intersection, the lower right movable plate 402L passes through the intersection, thereby suppressing interference between the movable plates 401L and 402L.

  When the lower left movable plate 412L is disposed in the proximity position, the lower left movable plate 412L is configured to straddle the intersection. If the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L is delayed, the upper end of the lower right movable plate 402L stays on the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L, and the lower right movable plate 402L interrupts the operation destination of the lower left movable plate 412L. Has been avoided. That is, the lower left movable plate 412L itself prevents the operation path of the lower left movable plate 412L from being cut off by the lower right movable plate 402L. Since the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L is planar, the upper end portion of the lower right movable plate 402L slides on the lower surface of the lower left movable plate 412L, and the lower left movable plate 412L slides to the separation position (lowering). ) Is secured.

  At the timing of tb8 after the switching of the flow path is completed, the upper right movable plate 411L moves from the protruding position to the retracted position, and the first ball entry portion 331 is opened. Thereby, the first variable winning device is switched from the non-accepting state to the accepting state. Thereafter, the game ball that has reached the specific area SE flows into the first ball entering portion 331 through the first guide route GP1 (see FIG. 48 (h)).

  When the first variable winning device is set in the receiving state, the first guide route GP1 is formed so as to precede the opening of the first pitching portion 331, and the stage ST is switched in accordance with the switching to the receiving state. The game ball that has been stopped above flows into the first incoming ball portion 331. Thereby, immediately after switching the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus to an acceptance state, a pitching frequency becomes high.

  Thereafter, the game balls are alternately guided to the first and second balls 331 and 341 until the final round.

  According to the ninth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  In a configuration in which an interval period is set between rounds, a game ball launched during the interval period does not enter the entrance part and becomes a spilling ball (that is, investment is wasted). Actions such as refraining from launching a ball may be made. In view of the fact that the entrance to the entrance part is an opportunity for the progress of the game, there is a concern that such a delayed action hinders the smooth progress of the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is avoided that a game ball that has reached the specific area SE during the interval period passes through the specific area SE as it is, and then the first ball entering portion 331 or the second ball entering These game balls are stored until guidance to the ball unit 341 is resumed. In this way, by suppressing the generation of useless balls, it is possible to prompt the player to continue the release of the game balls and to facilitate the progress of the game.

  When a plurality of game balls remain on the stage ST, the plurality of game balls flow into the entrance part as a guidance destination at once as the guidance is resumed. By diversifying the movement (one or a plurality of game balls) of the game sphere heading to the entrance part, it is possible to contribute to improvement in the degree of attention to the movement of the game sphere.

  The stage ST is formed so as to straddle the first guide part 400L and the second guide part 410L, and the game ball can be stopped on both the first guide part 400L and the second guide part 410L. Yes. Thus, if both guide parts 400L and 410L are configured to form a retaining surface, the number of game balls that can be retained (stored) on the stage ST can be increased while suppressing an increase in the size of the variable winning unit 83L. .

  The stage ST is configured to have a downward slope toward the center, and the game balls that have reached the stage ST accumulate in order from the position closer to the center. When the left and right entrance parts 331 and 341 are used together, the next guide destination is the first entrance part 331 and the second entrance place by preferentially collecting the game balls at the position closer to the center. Even if it becomes any of the part 341, it can suppress that the flow of the game ball toward the ball-entry parts 331 and 341 becomes slow. Incidentally, the configuration in which the stage ST is recessed at the center is an idea for increasing the number of game balls that can be stopped while suppressing the increase in the lateral width of the stage ST.

  Note that the game ball being stopped is movable between the first guide unit 400L and the second guide unit 410L, and the monotonous movement of the game ball that has reached the stage ST is suppressed.

  When the variable winning unit 83L is switched from the non-guide state to the first guide state, not only the game balls stopped on the first guide portion 400L but also the game balls stopped on the second guide portion 410L Is also guided to the first entrance portion 331. Specifically, when the upper right movable plate 411L of the second guide portion 410L moves to the retracted position, the game ball stopped on the upper right movable plate 411L loses its support and falls. Since the lower right movable plate 402L of the first guide portion 400L is positioned, the dropped game balls are guided to the first incoming ball portion 331 together with the game balls stopped on the upper left movable plate 401L of the first guide portion 400L. Is done. In addition, when the variable winning unit 83L is switched from the non-guide state to the second guide state, the game is stopped not only on the second guide portion 410L but also on the first guide portion 400L. The sphere is also guided to the second entrance 341. Specifically, when the upper left movable plate 401L moves to the retracted position, the game ball stopped on the upper left movable plate 401L loses its support and falls, but the lower left of the second guide portion 410L Since the movable plate 412L is located, the dropped game balls are guided to the second incoming ball portion 341 together with the game balls stopped on the upper right movable plate 411L of the second guide portion 410L. In this way, by setting the guidance object regardless of which guidance unit 400L, 410L is stopped, it is possible to suppress the spilling of the game ball and to suitably increase the above-described entry opportunities. Further, increasing the number of game balls to be guided is a diversification of the manner of entering the ball entering parts 331 and 341 (for example, a configuration in which a plurality of game balls can be guided to the ball entering parts 331 and 341 together). ) Can be suitably realized.

  In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of game balls that remain on the stage ST is substantially smaller than the upper limit number of balls entered in each round. For this reason, even if it has a relief function mentioned above, it can control suitably that the privilege given to a player by a stop function becomes excessive.

  By adopting a configuration in which the stage ST is formed over the two guide routes GP1 and GP2, it is possible to suppress the location that the player should pay attention to over a wide area due to the presence of the stage ST. This is a preferable configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game ball being stopped.

  In the opening / closing execution mode in the present embodiment, the variable winning unit 83L is alternately switched between the first guide state and the second guide state with the non-guide state interposed therebetween. For this reason, the game balls that have not entered one of the entrance parts are guided to the other entrance part after stopping. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification 1>
In the ninth embodiment, when the formation target of the bottom portion of the stage ST is switched from the lower right movable plate 402L to the lower left movable plate 412L, it is configured to avoid interference between both the movable plates 402L and 412L. It is not limited to. For example, the lower left movable plate 412L is preceded by the movement of the lower left movable plate 412L in a state where the lower right movable plate 402L is disposed in the proximity position, and the upper end portion of the lower left movable plate 412L is in advance on the middle part (lower surface) of the lower right movable plate 402L. It is good also as a structure to contact | abut to (a structure to make it pause before the intersection location). Thereafter, by moving the lower right movable plate 402L away from the intersection position, the movement to the close position of the lower left movable plate 412L is resumed (passing through the intersection), so that the game ball when performing the above replacement Can be suppressed more suitably.

  Similarly, when the formation target of the bottom portion of the stage ST is switched from the lower left movable plate 412L to the lower right movable plate 402L, the configuration is such that interference between both the movable plates 402L and 412L is avoided, but is not limited thereto. . For example, the lower left movable plate 402L is preceded by the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L in a state where the lower left movable plate 412L is disposed in the proximity position, and the upper end portion of the lower right movable plate 402L is in advance on the middle part (lower surface) of the lower left movable plate 412L. It is good also as a structure to contact | abut to (a structure to make it pause before the intersection location). Thereafter, by moving the lower left movable plate 412L from the intersection position to resume the movement of the lower right movable plate 402L to the adjacent position (passing through the intersection), the game ball when performing the above replacement Can be suppressed more suitably.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 is arranged at the projecting position, thereby forming the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331, and the second movable body 360 projecting. The second guide route GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341 was formed by disposing it at the position. In the present embodiment, the specific configuration for forming the guide routes GP1 and GP2 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 49, the variable winning unit 83N in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. 49 (a) is a front view of the variable winning unit 83N, FIG. 49 (b) is a schematic diagram showing urging means for the movable bodies 430N and 440N, and FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (d) show the variable winning unit 83N. It is the schematic which shows the relationship with the flow of a game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (a), the variable winning unit 83L includes a first movable body 430N disposed near the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 in the specific area SE, and the specific area SE. And a second movable body 440N disposed at a position close to the entrance portion 342 of the second entrance 341.

  The first movable body 430N has a flat plate shape, and one plate surface faces the inlet portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 from the center side (the second ball entry portion 341 side) of the specific area SE (hereinafter referred to as the following). , Called a standby position). The vertical width dimension of the first movable body 430N is larger than the vertical width dimension of the inlet portion 332, and the entire inlet portion 332 is covered by the first movable body 430N.

  The first movable body 430N is centered on one of the upper shaft portion 431N provided at the upper end portion of the first movable body 430N and the lower shaft portion 432N provided at the lower end portion of the first movable body 430N. It is pivotally supported so that it can rotate. Springs 435N and 436N are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the first movable body 430N, and the first movable body 430N remains in the standby position by the biasing force of the springs 435N and 436N (FIG. 49B). )reference). In the following description, the positions of the shaft portions 431N and 432N when the first movable body 430N is disposed at the standby position are referred to as “initial positions”.

  The first movable body 430N is connected to the drive motor 321 via a link mechanism 325N. When the output shaft portion of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction), the first movable body 430N resists the urging force of the spring 435N, and the first shaft centering on the lower shaft portion 432N. It rotates in a predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the upper shaft portion 431N is displaced toward the second approaching ball portion 341, and the posture of the first movable body 430N changes. When rotating about the lower shaft portion 432N, the displacement of the lower shaft portion 432N from the initial position is hindered by the biasing force of the spring 436N, and the lower shaft portion 432N remains at the initial position. It becomes.

  A guide groove 433N into which the upper shaft portion 431N of the first movable body 430N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N, and the movement range of the upper shaft portion 431N, that is, the lower shaft portion 432N is formed by the guide groove 433N. The rotation range of the first movable body 430N when the first movable body 430N rotates around the center is defined. In the following description, the position rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 433N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion 331 side is referred to as the first rotation position of the first movable body 430N. .

  When the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction) in a state where the first movable body 430N is disposed at the standby position, the first movable body 430N is biased by the spring 436N. Against this, it rotates in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction) around the upper shaft portion 431N. As a result, the lower shaft portion 432N is displaced toward the side closer to the second ball entering portion 341, and the posture of the first movable body 430N changes. In the case of rotating around the upper shaft portion 431N, the displacement of the upper shaft portion 431N from the initial position is hindered by the biasing force of the spring 435N, and the upper shaft portion 431N remains at the initial position.

  A guide groove 434N through which the lower shaft portion 432N of the first movable body 430N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N, and the movement range of the lower shaft portion 432N, that is, the upper shaft portion is formed by the guide groove 434N. A rotation range of the first movable body 430N when the first movable body 430N rotates around 431N is defined. In the following description, the position rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 434N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion 331 side is referred to as the second rotation position of the first movable body 430N. .

  The second movable body 440N has a flat plate shape, and one plate surface faces the inlet portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 from the center side (the first ball entry portion 331 side) of the specific area SE (hereinafter referred to as the following). , Called a standby position). The vertical width dimension of the second movable body 440N is larger than the vertical width dimension of the inlet portion 342, and the entire inlet portion 342 is covered by the second movable body 440N.

  The second movable body 440N is centered on one of the upper shaft portion 441N provided at the upper end portion of the second movable body 440N and the lower shaft portion 442N provided at the lower end portion of the second movable body 440N. It is pivotally supported so that it can rotate. Springs 445N and 446N are attached to the upper end and the lower end of the second movable body 440N, and the second movable body 440N remains in the standby position by the biasing force of the springs 445N and 446N (FIG. 49B). )reference). In the following description, the positions of the shaft portions 441N and 442N when the second movable body 440N is disposed at the standby position are referred to as “initial positions”.

  The second movable body 440N is connected to the drive motor 321 via a link mechanism 325N. When the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (clockwise direction), the second movable body 440N resists the urging force of the spring 445N in the second predetermined direction around the lower shaft portion 442N. Rotate (clockwise). As a result, the upper shaft portion 441N is displaced toward the first approaching ball portion 331, and the posture of the second movable body 440N changes. When rotating about the lower shaft portion 442N, the displacement of the lower shaft portion 442N from the initial position is hindered by the biasing force of the spring 446N, and the lower shaft portion 442N remains at the initial position. It becomes.

  A guide groove 443N into which the upper shaft portion 441N of the second movable body 440N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N, and the movement range of the upper shaft portion 441N, that is, the lower shaft portion 442N is formed by the guide groove 443N. The rotation range of the second movable body 440N when the second movable body 440N rotates around the center is defined. In the following description, the position rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 443N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the second ball entry portion 341 is referred to as the second rotation position of the second movable body 440N. .

  When the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction) in a state where the second movable body 440N is disposed at the standby position, the second movable body 440N is attached with the spring 446N. It rotates in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) about the upper shaft portion 441N against the force. As a result, the lower shaft portion 442N is displaced toward the side closer to the first ball entry portion 331, and the posture of the second movable body 440N changes. In the case of rotating around the upper shaft portion 441N, the displacement of the upper shaft portion 441N from the initial position is hindered by the biasing force of the spring 445N, and the upper shaft portion 441N remains at the initial position.

  A guide groove 444N through which the lower shaft portion 442N is inserted is formed in the front surface portion 312N of the housing 310N, and the second groove centering on the movement range of the lower shaft portion 442N, that is, the upper shaft portion 441N is formed by the guide groove 444N. A rotation range of the second movable body 440N when the movable body 440N rotates is defined. In the following description, the position rotated to the maximum rotation angle defined by the guide groove 444N, that is, the position inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion 331 side is referred to as the second rotation position of the second movable body 440N. .

  When the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are disposed at the standby position, the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the first specific direction, so that the first entrance portion enters the specific area SE. A first guide route GP1 for guiding the game ball to 331 is formed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 49A to 49C, the first movable body 430N rotates in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) around the lower shaft portion 432N. The second movable body 440N is disposed in the first rotation position and is rotated in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) around the upper shaft portion 441N and disposed in the first rotation position. As a result, both the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are inclined so as to be inclined downward toward the first incoming ball portion 331, and both the movable bodies 430N and 440N enter the first incoming ball portion 331. A series of first guide routes GP1 for guiding the game balls are formed. At this time, the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N are synchronized with each other, so that the extension of the required period required for the flow path formation is suppressed.

  In the state where the first guide route GP1 is thus formed, the restriction of the inflow to the first ball entering portion 331 by the first movable body 430N is released, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is in the first guide route GP1. It will flow into the 1st entrance part 331 via.

  Note that a slight gap is formed between the rotating tip portions of the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N, but this gap is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. For this reason, it is avoided that the game ball passes through the specific space SE without passing through the gap, that is, without flowing into the first ball entering portion 331.

  When the round end condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of balls entering the first ball entering portion 331 reaches the upper limit, the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the second specific direction, and the output shaft is initially set. Return to position. Accordingly, the first movable body 430N returns to the standby position by the biasing force of the spring 435N, and the second movable body 440N returns to the standby position by the biasing force of the spring 446N. As a result, the first movable body 430N restricts the flow into the first ball entering portion 331, and the guidance to the first ball entering portion 331 through the first guide route GP1 is released. Also in this case, since the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N are synchronized, the extension of the required period required for the flow path release is suppressed.

  On the other hand, when the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are arranged at the standby position, when the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the second specific direction, the second region is moved to the specific region SE. A second guide route GP2 that guides the game ball to the ball entrance 341 is formed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49 (a) → FIG. 49 (d), the first movable body 430N rotates in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction) around the upper shaft portion 431N, so that the second The second movable body 440N is arranged at the rotation position, and is arranged at the second rotation position by rotating in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction) around the lower shaft portion 442N. As a result, both the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are inclined so as to incline downward toward the second incoming ball portion 341, and the two movable bodies 430N and 440N enter the second incoming ball portion 341. A series of second guide routes GP2 for guiding the game balls are formed. At this time, the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N are synchronized with each other, so that the extension of the required period required for the flow path formation is suppressed.

  In the state where the second guide route GP2 is thus formed, the restriction of the inflow of the second movable body 440N into the second ball entering portion 341 is released, and the game ball that has reached the specific area SE is in the second guide route GP2. It will flow into the 2nd entrance part 341 via.

  Note that a slight gap is formed between the rotating tip portions of the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N, but this gap is smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. For this reason, it is avoided that the game ball passes through the specific area SE without passing through the gap, that is, without flowing into the second incoming ball portion 341.

  When the round end condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 341 reaches the upper limit, the drive motor 321 (output shaft) rotates in the first specific direction, and the output shaft is initially set. Return to position. Accordingly, the first movable body 430N returns to the standby position by the biasing force of the spring 436N, and the second movable body 440N returns to the standby position by the biasing force of the spring 445N. As a result, the second movable body 440N restricts the flow into the second incoming ball portion 341, and the guidance to the second incoming ball portion 341 through the second guide route GP2 is released. Also in this case, since the operation of the first movable body 430N and the operation of the second movable body 440N are synchronized, the extension of the required period required for the flow path release is suppressed.

  According to the tenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  In game machines of the type equipped with a variable prize-winning device that changes the probability of entering the pitching section by the guide means, the monotony of the game is suppressed by strengthening the sharpness of the guide state / non-guide state it can. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the winning device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guidance state is wide. However, when the guide means is simply enlarged to increase the receiving width, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (operation stability) are likely to occur. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are used in combination, and the movable bodies 430N and 440N are arranged at the passage forming positions, respectively, so that a series of guide paths GP1, If the GP2 is formed, it is possible to avoid an increase in size of the individual movable bodies 430N and 440N while widening the target range (the receiving width of the game ball). Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of a player's attention degree, the occurrence of the inconvenience resulting from it can be suppressed.

  When the first movable body 430N is disposed at the standby position, the inlet portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is covered by the first movable body 430N. Thereby, the entrance into the 1st entrance part 331 can be controlled. In addition, when the second movable body 440N is disposed at the standby position, the inlet portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341 is covered by the second movable body 440N. Thereby, the entrance to the 2nd entrance part 341 can be controlled. In this way, the movable bodies 430N and 440N that form the guide paths GP1 and GP2 function as shutters for the respective ball entry portions 331 and 341, so that the ball enters under the situation where the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed. In avoiding entering the parts 331 and 341, it is possible to prevent the structure from becoming excessively complicated.

  As described above, the configuration in which each movable body 430N, 440N serves as both a shutter and a passage forming portion increases the overall length of the guide paths GP1, GP2 (the receiving width of the game ball), resulting in a complicated configuration. This is advantageous for suppressing the conversion. However, for example, when the first guide route GP1 is formed, if the second movable body is disposed at the passage formation position, the second ball entry portion 341 is released and the ball enters the second ball entry portion 341. Regulations are relaxed. Further, when the second guide route GP2 is formed, if the first movable body 430N is arranged at the passage formation position, the first ball entry portion 331 is opened and the ball enters the first ball entry portion 331. Regulations are relaxed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, when the first guide route GP1 is formed, the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N restrict the entrance to the second entrance portion 341 and the second guide When the path GP2 is formed, the first movable body 430N and the second movable body 440N are configured to restrict entry into the first incoming ball portion 331, that is, the movable bodies 430N and 440N are configured to compensate for a reduction in the regulation function. Therefore, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  If the movable bodies 430N and 440N are rotated toward the sides closer to each other to form the guide paths GP1 and GP2, it is possible to increase the impact when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed. Thereby, not only the entrance to the entrance parts 331 and 341 but also the effect of visual change (movement of the movable bodies 430N and 440N) immediately before the entrance of the entrance can be suitably exhibited.

  In particular, when a movable body is disposed in the game area PE, the presence of the movable body can be a factor that restricts the flow path. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, if the movable bodies 430N and 440N rotate to the side closer to each other to form the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are not formed. Below, the area | region between these movable bodies 430N and 440N can be utilized suitably as a flow path of game balls.

  When the movable bodies 430N and 440N are arranged at the standby position, the passage walls of the flow path are formed by the movable bodies 430N and 440N. Thus, if it is set as the structure which comprises a passage wall surface by movable body 430N, 440N, even when it is a case where a some movable body is attached to game area PE, coexistence with other game components can be implement | achieved suitably.

  When a series of guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by a plurality of movable bodies 430N and 440N, the responsiveness depends on the movable body that moves slower. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, in each of the guide paths GP1 and GP2, the passage length of the portion formed by the first movable body 430N and the passage of the portion formed by the second movable body 440N. If the length is configured to be equally divided, occurrence of the inconvenience due to the difference in size can be suitably suppressed.

  When a series of guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by a plurality of movable bodies, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball is disturbed by the game ball being caught by the joint portion. When the movable bodies 430N and 440N function as a ball receiving portion that receives a game ball, the position accuracy can be lowered due to the influence of distortion or the like. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, the movable body constituting the upstream portion of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is shifted (offset) above the extension of the movable body constituting the downstream portion. The occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  In the case where the movable bodies 430N and 440N are pivotable, a force that rotates the movable bodies 430N and 440N is applied by the collision of the game balls. The movable body forming the downstream portion of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is prevented from rotating further downward by the guide grooves 433N and 443N, so that even if it is pushed by the game ball, the posture of the movable body Change can be avoided. On the other hand, the movable body forming the upstream part of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 is rotated by the collision of the game ball, although the guide grooves 434N and 444N prevent the further upward rotation. The direction that triggers is opposite to the regulation direction. That is, the movable body forming the upstream portion cannot be expected to prevent rotation due to the collision of the game balls. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the movable body that is not easily affected by the collision of the game balls to the downstream side and the movable body that is easily affected to the upstream side, the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the incoming ball portions 331 and 341 are provided. The game flow is suppressed from being greatly disturbed in the vicinity.

<Modification 1>
In the tenth embodiment, the operation region (displacement region) of the first movable body 430N when the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 430N and the second guide path GP2 are formed. Although the configuration is such that the operation region (displacement region) of the first movable body 430N overlaps and the configuration of suppressing the expansion of the dead space is not limited thereto. The operation area (displacement area) of the first movable body 430N when the first guide path GP1 is formed by the first movable body 430N and the operation area (displacement area) of the first movable body 430N when the second guide path GP2 is formed. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the displacement region does not overlap. Similarly, the operation region of the second movable body 440N can be configured to avoid duplication.

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment, the movable body 430N and 440N are driven by using one drive motor 321. However, the driving unit for the first movable body 430N and the driving unit for the second movable body 440N are used. And may be provided individually. In addition, when the first guide path GP1 is formed, a drive unit that drives both movable bodies 430N and 440N, and when the second guide path GP2 is formed, a drive unit that drives both movable bodies 430N and 440N are individually provided. It may be provided.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the tenth embodiment, when a guide route (guide route GP1, GP2) to the ball entrance is formed by a combination of a plurality of movable bodies 430N, 440N, the movement of the movable bodies 430N440N is synchronized. did. In the present embodiment as well, the same is true in that the guide route to the ball entry part is formed by a combination of a plurality of movable bodies, but the length (receiving width) of the guide route changes depending on the situation. It is one of the features. Hereinafter, the variable winning unit 83P in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

  The housing 310P of the variable winning unit 83P is provided with a ball entry portion 331 into which a game ball can enter. The entrance portion 332 of the entrance portion 331 faces sideways, and the first movable body 350P is disposed so as to cover the entrance portion 332 of the entrance portion 331. Specifically, the first movable body 350P has a substantially flat plate shape, and is disposed so that one plate surface faces the inlet portion 332.

  A shaft portion 432P is provided at the lower end portion of the first movable body 350P. The first movable body 350P changes its posture by being rotatable about the shaft portion 432P. And by arrange | positioning in a predetermined | prescribed rotation position, the guidance path | route GP1 which open | releases the entrance part 332 of the entrance part 331 and inclines toward the entrance part 332 of the 1st entrance part 331 is formed.

  A game ball passing area ME is provided on the side of the ball entry portion 331 (the side on which the entrance portion 332 faces). A substantially plate-like second movable body 440P is provided at a position opposite to the first movable body 350P across the passage area ME. The second movable body 440P is arranged so that one plate surface faces the first ball entry portion 331 side. The posture of the second movable body 440P is changed by being rotatable about a shaft portion 441P provided at the upper end portion. And by arrange | positioning in a predetermined rotation position, the 2nd movable body 440P becomes a downward inclination to the 1st entrance part 331 side.

  In the variable winning unit 83P in the present embodiment, a drive unit 321P for the first movable body 350P and a drive unit 448P for the second movable body 440P are individually provided. These drive units 321P and 448P are the same in that drive control is performed by the main controller 162, but their operating conditions are different. Specifically, the drive unit 321P is configured to move the first movable body 430P to a predetermined rotation position on the condition that the round start condition is satisfied during the opening / closing execution mode. 321P is configured to periodically (periodically) switch the position (predetermined rotation position / standby position) of the second movable body 440P.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the state of the variable winning unit 83P is such that only the first movable body 430P is disposed at a predetermined rotational position (see FIG. 50B), the first movable body 430P, A state in which both of the second movable bodies 440P are disposed at a predetermined rotational position (see FIG. 50C), a state in which only the second movable body 440P is disposed at a predetermined rotational position, and the first movable body 430P. And the 2nd movable body 440P is divided roughly into the state (refer to Drawing 50 (a)) arranged at the standby position. And it becomes the structure which a difference produces in the entrance frequency to the entrance part 331 (entrance part 332) by each of these states. In the following, with reference to FIGS. 50B and 50C, a supplementary description will be given of the relationship between each state and the pitching frequency.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (b), when the first movable body 430P is disposed at a predetermined rotation position and the second movable body 440P is disposed at the standby position, the first movable body 430P enters the ball. A guide route GP for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the portion 331 is formed. Here, the passing area ME is roughly divided into a first area GE1 on the first movable body 430P side and a second area GE2 on the second movable body 440P side. In addition, about each area | region GE1, GE2, the horizontal width of a flow path is larger than the diameter dimension of a game ball.

  The guidance object by the first movable body 430P is a game ball that flows down the first region GE1 among the game balls that flow down the two regions GE1 and GE2. Specifically, the first area GE1 is cut by the first movable body 430P disposed at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the first area GE1 is directed to reach the first movable body 430P. change. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first region GE1 are guided to the entrance portion 332 of the entrance portion 331. Since the first movable body 430P is prevented from projecting into the second area GE2, the game ball flowing down the second area GE2 passes between the movable bodies 430P and 440P as it is (through the passage area ME). Pass through) and head to Out 86.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), when both the first movable body 430P and the second movable body 440P are arranged at a predetermined rotational position, for example, the first movable body 430P is The second movable body 440P is disposed at a predetermined rotational position under the situation where the second movable body 440P is disposed at the predetermined rotational position under the situation where the second movable body 440P is disposed at the predetermined rotational position. When the movable body 430P is disposed at a predetermined rotation position, a series of guide paths GP are formed by the first movable body 430P and the second movable body 440P. As a result, the guide route GP is formed so as to straddle the first region GE1 and the second region GE2, and the game balls flowing down either of the two regions GE1 and GE2 are to be guided. That is, the receiving width of the guide route GP is expanded as compared with the case where the first movable body 430P alone forms the guide route GP.

  Specifically, the first area GE1 is cut by the first movable body 430P disposed at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the first area GE1 is directed to reach the first movable body 430P. The second area GE2 is cut by the second movable body 440P disposed at a predetermined rotation position, and the game ball flowing down the second area GE2 is directed by reaching the second movable body 440P. Change. Thereby, each game ball flowing down the first region GE1 and the second region GE2 is guided to the entrance portion 332 of the entrance portion 331, and passes between both movable bodies 430P and 440P (passing through the passage region ME). E) heading to the outlet 86 is avoided.

  In addition, when the second movable body 440P is independently arranged at a predetermined rotation position, a blank is generated between the guide path GP formed by the second movable body 440P and the first entrance portion 331. Therefore, the guiding function is not performed well and the entrance portion 332 is covered with the first movable body 430P, so that the inflow of game balls to the entrance portion 332 is avoided.

  When the operation mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode and the entry into the first entry portion 331 is allowed, the guide route GP is formed by the first movable body 430P alone, There is a case where a guide route GP is formed by the bodies 430P and 440P. When comparing these two states, the latter has a higher probability of entering the ball entry portion 331 (the frequency of entering the ball) than the former, and the game can be advantageously advanced. By realizing diversification of the pitching manner in this way, it is possible to suppress the monotony of the game and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In the eleventh embodiment, the plurality of movable bodies 430P and 440P are used in combination to change the overall length of the guide route GP (the width of the game ball received in the passing area ME), thereby entering the ball entering portion 331. It was set as the structure which changes a ball frequency. In the present embodiment, a branch is provided in the incoming ball portion 331, and the moving destination of the game ball that has flowed into the incoming ball portion 331 is changed by a change in the total length of the guide route (the receiving width in the passing area ME). Is one of the features. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagrams of FIGS. 51A to 51C, the variable winning unit 83Q shown in the present embodiment and the configuration related thereto will be described with a focus on differences from the eleventh embodiment. .

  The ball entry portion 331Q shown in the present embodiment has a ball passage 333Q through which a game ball flowing into the entrance portion 332Q passes. The spherical passage 333Q is roughly divided into an upstream passage portion 336Q extending from the inlet portion 332Q in the same direction as the guide route GP, and a first downstream passage portion 337Q and a second downstream passage portion 338Q that are bifurcated. .

  The first downstream passage portion 337Q and the second downstream passage portion 338Q extend in the vertical direction, and are arranged in parallel so that the inlet opening upward is positioned on the extension of the upstream passage portion 336Q. More specifically, the inlet of the first downstream passage portion 337Q is arranged closer to the upstream passage portion 336Q than the inlet of the second downstream passage portion 338Q. When the moving speed of the game balls passing through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q is equal to or lower than a predetermined speed, the game balls flow into the first downstream passage portion 337Q and the game balls passing through the most downstream portion When the moving speed exceeds the predetermined speed, the game ball jumps over the inlet of the first downstream passage portion 337Q and flows into the second downstream passage portion 338Q. That is, the inflow destination changes depending on the moving speed of the game ball.

  Main controller 162 in the present embodiment is configured to determine whether or not to shift the lottery mode after the opening / closing execution mode to the high probability mode during the opening / closing execution mode. Specifically, the lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to the high probability mode based on the occurrence of the ball entering the second downstream passage portion 338Q within a predetermined effective period during the opening / closing execution mode, The lottery mode after the end of the opening / closing execution mode is set to the low probability mode based on the fact that no ball has entered the second downstream passage portion 338Q within the predetermined effective period. In other words, whether or not the game can be advantageously advanced by shifting to the high probability mode depends on the moving speed of the game ball that has flowed into the entering ball portion.

  Here, the second movable body 440Q is disposed at a position opposite to the first movable body 430Q across the passing area ME of the game ball, and the operation mode of the second movable body 440Q is hit. The configuration is determined according to the type. Specifically, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51 (d), the period of arrangement at a predetermined rotation position differs depending on the hit type. In the present embodiment, 16R jackpot result A and 16R jackpot result B are set as the jackpot type.

  In the 16R jackpot result A, the second movable body 440Q is arranged at a predetermined rotation position only in a specific round (seventh round). More specifically, when the first operation period elapses from the start timing of the specific round, the second movable body 440Q returns to the original position. The first operation period is equal to the length (4.8 sec) obtained by multiplying the game ball firing interval period (0.6 sec) by the upper limit number of balls (8), that is, the shortest execution period of the round. Is set. For this reason, the 2nd movable body 440Q will return to the original position before the end of a specific round.

  On the other hand, in the 16R big hit result B, the second movable body 440Q is maintained at a predetermined rotation position in a plurality of rounds including a specific round (seventh round). More specifically, when the second operation period elapses from the start timing of the specific round, the second movable body 440Q returns to the original position. The second operation period is set longer than the shortest round period (specifically, the second operation period is set to be a period obtained by multiplying the shortest period by the number of remaining rounds (10)). This period is longer than the longest execution period (30 sec) of the round, and the second movable body 440Q is maintained at a predetermined rotation position over a plurality of rounds.

  The longer the period of time placed at the predetermined rotational position, the higher the expectation of entering the second downstream passage portion 338Q as compared to the case where the period is short. Here, the relationship between the destination of the game ball and each of the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q will be supplementarily described.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the first movable body 430Q alone forms the guide route GP, the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 hits the first movable body 430Q and changes its direction. Guided to the entrance portion 332Q of the ball portion 331Q. The game ball is accelerated when moving along the first movable body 430Q and the upstream passage portion 336Q, and the moving speed along the guide route GP increases, but passes through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q. The moving speed at the time of performing is lower than the predetermined speed. For this reason, most of the game balls that have entered the ball entering portion 331Q flow into the first downstream passage portion 337Q.

  Note that the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 passes through both the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q as it is, and deviates from the guidance target toward the ball entering portion 331. The ratio of the game balls flowing down the first area GE1 and the ratio of the game balls flowing down the second area GE2 are equal, and about half of the game balls flowing down the passing area ME enter the entrance portion 331. Guided.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the guide route GP is formed by the combination of both movable bodies 430Q and 440Q, the game ball flowing down the first region GE1 is the first movable body. Not only is the direction changed by hitting 430Q and guided to the entrance portion 332Q of the incoming ball portion 331Q, but the game ball flowing down the second region GE2 hits the second movable body 440Q and changes its direction to change the entrance portion 332Q of the incoming ball portion 331Q. To be guided to. These game balls accelerate when moving along the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q and the upstream passage portion 336Q, but pass through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q according to the landing position in the guide route GP. There is a difference in the moving speed. Specifically, for the game ball that has landed on the first movable body 430Q, the moving speed when passing through the most downstream portion of the upstream passage portion 336Q is lower than the predetermined speed, while the game landed on the second movable body 440Q. As for the ball, the acceleration section is extended, and the moving speed of the game ball passing through the upstream passage portion 336Q exceeds the predetermined speed.

  In other words, when the guide route GP is formed by both the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q, the frequency of entering the entrance portion 331Q is higher than the case where the guide route GP is formed by the first movable body 430Q alone. The game progress not only temporarily increases by approximately doubling, but also shifts to the high probability mode based on the inflow of game balls to the second downstream passage portion 338Q constituting the “advantageous entry ball portion”. Is likely to occur.

  If the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q are used in this way to change the overall length of the guide route, monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 51 (e), while the guide route GP is extended by the second movable body 440Q, the game progress is accelerated and the rate of increase of the holding ball is increased. This benefit may be limited to the specific round or may be continued in a round other than the specific round. In the latter, the game can be advantageously advanced over the former. In this way, by diversifying the game in the opening / closing execution mode, it is possible to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification 1>
It is not always necessary to set the driving condition of the second movable body 440Q by the period. For example, in the 16R jackpot result A, the second movable body 440Q is arranged at a predetermined rotation position with the start of the specific round, and the second movable body 440Q is returned to the original position with the end of the specific round. In the 16R jackpot result B, the second movable body 440Q is arranged at a predetermined rotation position at the start of a specific round, and the second movable body 440Q is returned to the original position at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the total length (receiving width) of the guide path is changed by a combination of a plurality of movable bodies. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is sufficient if the passing area of the game ball to be guided can be changed. For example, in a rotary shutter, the inflow probability is changed by the rotation angle (opening amount) of the shutter. Is also possible.

<Modification 3>
In the twelfth embodiment, each movable body 430Q, 440Q is a rotary type. However, when a plurality of guide paths having different overall lengths are formed using a plurality of movable bodies (the extension of the guide path). However, it is not always necessary that the movable body be a rotary type. For example, the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q may be slid back and forth, or one of the movable bodies 430Q and 440Q may be a rotating type and the other may be a sliding type.

<Modification 4>
In the twelfth embodiment, the lower end of the first movable body 430Q is a pivot base end, and the upper end of the second movable body 440Q is a pivot base end. In addition, the rotation direction of the first movable body 430Q and the rotation direction of the second movable body 440Q when the guide path is formed are reversed. The first movable body 430Q alone guides the game ball to the entrance portion 331Q by both the first guide path GP1 capable of guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 331Q and the first movable body 430Q and the second movable body 440Q. As long as each of the series of second guide paths GP2 can be formed, it is optional as to which part is set as the rotation base end and further in the rotation direction.

<Modification 5>
In the twelfth embodiment, the guide path formed by the first movable body 430Q is included in the guide path formed by the first movable body 430Q and the second movable body 440Q. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Is not to be done. It suffices if it is possible to cause a difference in the frequency of entering the entrance 331Q by changing the area to be guided (the receiving width of the game ball), and a relatively small guide path is relatively Therefore, it is not always necessary to adopt a configuration included in the guide route having a large receiving width.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 is arranged at the projecting position, thereby forming the first guide path GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331, and the second movable body 360 projecting. The second guide route GP <b> 2 that guides the game ball to the second ball entering portion 341 is formed by disposing it at the position. This embodiment is also the same as the first embodiment in that the guide paths GP1 and GP2 for guiding the game ball to each of the two incoming ball portions 331 and 341 arranged in parallel are formed. The specific configuration for forming the guide routes GP1 and GP2 is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 52, the variable winning unit 83R in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. FIG. 52A is a front view of the variable winning unit 83R, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the variable winning unit 83R.

  A movable body 450R serving as “guide means” is disposed in the specific area SE sandwiched between the first and second ball entering portions 331 and 341 in the variable winning unit 83R. The movable body 450R has a horizontally long shape extending in the direction in which both the ball entering portions 331 and 341 are juxtaposed, and is assembled to the housing 310 in a state of protruding from the front surface portion 312R of the housing 310R.

  The movable body 450R is pivotally supported at an intermediate position in the juxtaposed direction, and can be rotated around the pivotal support portion 451R. Specifically, when the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction), the movable body 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction), and the drive motor 321 is driven. The output shaft is rotated in the second specific direction (clockwise direction), so that the movable body 450R is rotated in the second predetermined direction (clockwise direction).

  The upper and lower positions of the movable body 450R are arranged near the upper boundary in the specific area SE, and the upper surface 452R projects upward from the specific area SE. On the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R, a first inclined portion 453R that is inclined downward from above the pivot support location 451R toward the first entrance portion 331, and a second entrance portion 341 from above the pivot support location 451R. A second inclined portion 454R that is inclined downward is formed on the side. When the movable body 450R is in a substantially horizontal standby state, the game ball that has dropped onto the movable body 450R is guided to the first ball entry portion 331 side or the second ball entry portion 341 side by the inclined portions 453R and 454R. Is done. In the present embodiment, the case where the movable body 450R is in the standby state is the non-guide state of the variable winning unit 83R.

  The gap size between the first inclined portion 453R and the first incoming ball portion 331 and the gap size between the second inclined portion 454R and the second incoming ball portion 341 are smaller than the diameter size of the game ball. Game balls are not allowed to pass. In other words, when the movable body 450R is in the standby state, the movable body 450R restricts the entry of the game ball into the specific area SE, and avoids entering the respective entrance portions 331 and 341. The gap size is set to be sufficiently smaller than the diameter size of the game ball, and the game balls distributed to the left and right by the inclined portions 453R and 454R are stopped on the movable body 430 by being caught in the gap. It has been avoided.

  The upper surface of each of the ball entering portions 331 and 341 is gently lowered to the side of the variable winning unit 83R, and the game ball has moved from the inclined portions 453R and 454 of the movable body 450R to the upper surface of each of the ball entering portions 331 and 341. Falls on the side of the variable winning unit 83R.

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a) → FIG. 53 (b), the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction in a state where the movable body 450R is in the standby state, whereby the movable body 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction. As a result, the posture of the movable body 450R changes so as to be lowered to the right and switches to the first guiding state. In the first guiding state, both the first inclined portion 453 and the second inclined portion 454R are inclined so as to be lowered to the right, and the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R is played to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331. A first guide route GP1 for guiding the sphere is formed.

  The game ball that has dropped from above the variable winning unit 83R toward the variable winning unit 83R changes its direction by hitting the variable winning unit 83R, and moves along the first guide route GP1. Thereby, the entrance to the 1st entrance part 331 will occur.

  The housing 310 is provided with a stopper that defines the rotation range of the movable body 450R so that no further rotation is possible. For this reason, even if the game ball collides with the portion of the movable body 450R that is closer to the first entrance portion 331 than the pivot support portion 451R, it is avoided that the posture of the movable body 450R changes due to the collision. ing.

  In the first guiding state, the gap between the movable body 450R and the second ball entry portion 341 is larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the gap. However, the main flow path when the game ball heads toward the variable winning unit 83R is downward, and the separation distance W1 between the movable body 450R and the second ball entry section 341 in the direction intersecting the main flow path (horizontal direction) is It is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the variable winning unit 83R to flow into the specific area SE through the gap between the movable body 450R and the second ball-entry portion 341. The entry to the 2 entry portion 341 is suitably suppressed.

  When the round end condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of balls entering the first ball entrance 331 reaches a predetermined number, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction. Accordingly, the movable body 450R rotates in the second predetermined direction and returns from the first guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 53 (b) → FIG. 53 (a)).

  As shown in FIG. 53 (a) → FIG. 53 (c), the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction in a state where the movable body 450R is in the standby state, whereby the movable body 450R rotates in the second predetermined direction. As a result, the posture of the movable body 450R changes so as to be lowered to the left and switches to the second guide state. In the second guiding state, both the first inclined portion 453 and the second inclined portion 454R are inclined so as to be lowered to the left, and the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R plays a game to the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341. A second guide route GP2 for guiding the sphere is formed.

  The game ball dropped from above the variable winning unit 83R toward the variable winning unit 83R changes its direction by hitting the variable winning unit 83R and moves along the second guide route GP2. Thereby, the entrance to the 2nd entrance part 341 will occur.

  The housing 310 is provided with a stopper that defines the rotation range of the movable body 450R so that no further rotation is possible. For this reason, even if the game ball collides with the portion of the movable body 450R that is closer to the second entrance portion 341 than the pivot support portion 451R, it is avoided that the posture of the movable body 450R changes due to the collision. ing.

  In the second guiding state, the gap between the movable body 450R and the first ball entry portion 331 is larger than the diameter dimension of the game ball, and the game ball can pass through the gap. However, the main flow path when the game ball heads to the variable winning unit 83R is downward, and the separation distance W1 between the movable body 450R and the first ball entry section 331 in the direction intersecting the main flow path (horizontal direction) is It is smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is difficult for the game ball that has fallen toward the variable winning unit 83R to flow into the specific area SE through the gap between the movable body 450R and the first ball entering portion 331, and the first ball via the specific area SE Entering into 1 entrance part 331 is controlled appropriately.

  When the round end condition is satisfied, for example, when the number of balls entering the second ball entrance 341 reaches a predetermined number, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction. As a result, the movable body 450R rotates in the first predetermined direction and returns from the second guide state to the standby state (see FIG. 53 (c) → FIG. 53 (a)).

  According to the thirteenth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are achieved.

  It is preferable to use a plurality of variable prize-winning devices in combination for realizing diversification of games and improving the degree of attention to games. For example, the diversification of the game can be promoted by providing a difference in the superiority (privileged privilege) of the pitching club. In such a configuration, when the first variable winning device including the first winning portion and the second variable winning device including the second winning portion are individually provided, the occupied area of each winning device increases. This is not preferable for coexistence with other game parts in the game area PE. In this regard, in the variable winning unit 83R shown in the present embodiment, the movable body that forms the guide route GP1 to the first ball entry portion 331 and the movable body that forms the guide route GP2 to the second ball entry portion 341. Is shared, the expansion of the occupation area of the variable winning unit 83R is suppressed.

  Further, for example, when a guiding movable body is provided for each winning device, each of the pitching parts becomes independent, and only an effect (diversification) can be expected due to the plurality of pitching parts. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the guide destination changes according to the change in the posture of the movable body 450R, so that the player can imagine the guide destination to be the movable body 450R. Expected to pay attention. Thereby, the effect which exceeds the effect (attention degree improvement effect) by having used only two or more entrance parts together can be anticipated.

  The first entrance portion 331 and the second entrance portion 341 are arranged so that the entrance portions 332 and 342 face each other, and the specific area SE sandwiched between the entrance portions 331 and 341 is the entrance portion 331. This is an introduction part when a game ball enters 341. Here, when the gaming state is not in the special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode) (for example, in the normal gaming state), the movable body 450R is maintained in the non-guided state, and in the non-guided state, the movable body The specific area SE is covered from above by 450R. This restricts the inflow of the game ball that has reached the variable winning unit 83R into the specific area SE. Therefore, it is possible to suitably avoid entering into each of the entering parts 331 and 341 when the variable winning unit 83R is in the non-guide state.

  When the movable body 450R is in the standby state, the game ball that has reached the variable winning unit 83R is first entered by the first inclined portion 453R and the second inclined portion 454R formed on the upper surface 452R of the movable body 450R. It will be divided into the part 331 side or the 2nd entrance ball part 341 side, and will flow down. With such a configuration, the variable winning unit 83R can function as a branching unit (distributing unit) that branches the flow-down path of the game ball.

  When the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed by the presence of the inclined portions 453R and 454R, the inclination angle of the rolling surface is more severe on the downstream side than on the upstream side. That is, the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. Thereby, when a plurality of game balls are guided to the respective ball entering portions 331 and 341, the interval between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of balls that exceed the upper limit (so-called over winning).

  The first incoming ball portion 331 and the second incoming ball portion 341 are arranged side by side, and the movable body 450R is located between the incoming ball portions 331 and 341 in the juxtaposed direction of the incoming ball portions 331 and 341. Is arranged. With such an arrangement, the movable body 450R is reduced in size and the change amount (operation area) of the posture of the movable body is reduced.

  The direction of rotation of the movable body 450R when forming the first guide path GP1 is opposite to the direction of rotation of the movable body 450R when forming the second guide path GP2. With such a configuration, the operation area can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotation direction of the movable body is limited to one direction. Further, the rolling surface of the first guide route GP1 and the rolling surface of the second guide route GP2 can be configured by the same plate surface. This is preferable for reducing the thickness of the movable body 450R.

<Modification 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the movable body 450R that forms the guide paths GP1 and GP2 functions as a restricting means that restricts the entrance to the respective entrance parts 331 and 341, but corresponds to the restricting means. You may use together the structure to do. For example, the variable winning unit 83S shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 54A includes a first shutter 370S for the first ball entry portion 331 and a second shutter 380S for the second ball entry portion 341. The shutters 370 </ b> S and 380 </ b> S are movable between a protruding position that protrudes into the specific area SE and a retracted position that is suppressed from protruding into the specific area SE. In a state where the first shutter 370S is disposed at the protruding position, the flow of the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entering portion 331 is restricted by the first shutter 370S, and the first shutter 370S is disposed at the retracted position. In the state, the inflow of the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is allowed. In addition, in a state where the second shutter 380S is arranged at the protruding position, the second shutter 380S regulates the inflow of game balls to the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entering portion 341, and the second shutter 380S is arranged at the retracted position. In this state, the inflow of game balls to the entrance portion 342 of the second incoming ball portion 341 is allowed.

  The shutters 370S and 380S are connected to a drive motor for the movable body 450S via a link mechanism, and are moved to the standby position / projection position by the power of the drive motor. Specifically, when the movable body 450S is in the standby state, both shutters 370S and 380S are positioned at the protruding position, and when the movable body 450S is in the first guide state, the shutter is followed (interlocked). When the first shutter 370S moves to the retracted position (see FIG. 54 (a1) → FIG. 54 (a2)) and the movable body 450S enters the second guide state, the first shutter 370S follows (in conjunction with) the second shutter state. 2 The shutter 380S moves to the retracted position (see FIG. 54 (a1) → FIG. 54 (a3)).

  By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of accidental entry in a situation where entry into the entry parts 331 and 341 should be avoided.

<Modification 2>
In order to suppress the entrance to the second entrance 341 in the first guidance state and the entrance to the first entrance 331 in the second guidance state, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the movable body 450T. Is in the first guiding state, the size of the gap (gap size L5) formed between the movable body 450T and the top of the second ball entry portion 341 is smaller than the diameter size of the game ball. 54C, when the movable body 450T is in the second guiding state, it is formed between the movable body 450T and the top of the first ball entry portion 331. The gap size (gap dimension L6) may be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball.

  For example, opposed portions 456T and 457T that face the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the ball entry portions 331 and 341 are formed at the left and right ends of the movable body 450T in a standby state. In the case where the gap is reduced by the facing portions 456T and 457T, a game ball heading toward the gap can collide with the facing portions 456T and 457T. Therefore, if the facing portions 456T and 457T are formed in a curved surface centered on the pivot support portion 451T (rotation center axis), the posture of the movable body 450T changes due to an impact generated when the game ball collides. This can be suitably suppressed.

<Modification 3>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the movable body 450R is maintained in the standby state using the lock device. However, if the movable body 450R can be maintained in the standby state, the specific configuration thereof is described. Is optional. For example, the posture change from the standby state may be suppressed by the biasing force of the biasing means such as a spring, or the posture change from the standby state may be suppressed by the magnetic force such as the magnet.

<Modification 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the movable body 450R is in the guide state, the guide body is maintained in the guide state by the holding force (torque) generated in the drive motor 321 (stepping motor). A configuration (for example, a locking device such as a stopper) that suppresses a change in the posture of the movable body 450R in a state may be separately provided.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 are formed by the rotary movable body 450T. In the case where the movable body 450T is of a rotating type, it is assumed that the burden applied to the pivotal support portion is increased due to the collision of the game ball with the movable body 450T. Deformation such as distortion at the shaft support location due to such a load can be a factor that hinders improvement in the operational stability of the movable body 450T. In particular, in the configuration in which the posture of the movable body 450T is substantially horizontal in the standby state, the load is increased compared to the case where the movable body 450T is in the first guidance state or the second guidance state. Furthermore, if the period maintained in the standby state is longer than the period maintained in the first guidance state or the second guidance state, the concern becomes greater.

  One of the features of the variable winning unit 83U shown in the present embodiment is that it is devised to prevent such inconvenience. Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56, the variable winning unit 83U in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on differences from the thirteenth embodiment. 55 (a) is a front view of the variable prize unit 83U, FIG. 55 (b) is a longitudinal sectional view of the variable prize unit 83U, and FIG. 55 (c) shows the rotation angle of the drive motor 321U and the state of the movable body 450U. FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship, and FIG. 56 is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the various states of the variable winning unit 83U and the flow of game balls. In FIG. 56, for convenience of explanation, the movable body 450U in the housed state is indicated by a broken line.

  As shown in FIG. 55B, a housing portion 461U capable of housing the movable body 450U is formed in the main body portion 311U of the housing 310U. The housing portion 461U is opened to the specific area SE side through an opening 462U formed in the front surface portion 312U of the housing 310U, and the movable body 450U can appear and disappear through the opening 462U.

  Regarding the transmission block 325U that connects the movable body 450U and the drive motor 321, a slide mechanism that slides the movable body 450U back and forth according to the rotation angle of the drive motor 321 (output shaft) and the rotation of the drive motor 321 (output shaft). A rotating mechanism that rotates the movable body 450U in the first predetermined direction (clockwise direction) and the second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction) according to the moving angle is combined.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), when the output shaft of the drive motor 321 is disposed at the initial rotation position (rotation angle 0 °), the movable body 450U is in the accommodated state. When shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, when the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (clockwise direction) from the initial rotation position, the movable body 450U slides forward. As a result, the movable body 450U enters a standby state in which it protrudes into the specific area SE (see FIG. 56 (a) → FIG. 56 (b)). Even after entering the standby state, the rotation in the first specific direction continues, whereby the movable body 450U rotates in the first predetermined direction (clockwise direction), and the attitude of the movable body 450U changes. As a result, a first guide route GP1 for guiding the game ball to the first ball entrance 331 is formed (see FIG. 56B → FIG. 56C).

  When the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the guidance of the game ball to the first ball entering portion 331 through the first guidance route GP1 is repeatedly executed in a plurality of rounds. The movable body 450U returns to the standby state during the interval period between rounds. Specifically, when the round end condition is satisfied under the first guide state, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the movable body 450U switches from the first guidance state to the standby state (see FIG. 56 (c) → FIG. 56 (b)). After returning to the standby state, the output shaft is stopped and the movable body 450U is maintained in the standby state. During the opening / closing execution mode, the movable body 450U is not placed in the housed state at every interval, but the return to the standby state is maintained, thereby suppressing a decrease in responsiveness.

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends, the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft of the drive motor 321 returns to the initial rotation position. Thereby, the movable body 450U is switched from the first guidance state to the accommodated state through the standby state. In the accommodated state, the movable body 450U is prevented from projecting toward the specific region SE, and the movable body 450U is protected by the housing 310U.

  Next, the case where the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode will be described. When shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the second specific direction (counterclockwise direction) from the initial rotation position. As a result, the movable body 450U slides forward and enters a standby state protruding into the specific area SE (see FIG. 56 (a) → FIG. 56 (b)). The movement up to this point is the same as when the output shaft is rotated in the first specific direction from the initial rotation position. Even after entering the standby state, the rotation in the second specific direction continues, whereby the movable body 450U rotates in the second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction), and the posture of the movable body 450U changes. As a result, a second guide route GP2 for guiding the game ball to the second ball entrance portion 341 is formed (see FIG. 56 (b) → FIG. 56 (d)).

  When the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the guidance of the game ball to the second entrance part 341 through the second guidance route GP2 is repeatedly executed in a plurality of rounds. The movable body 450U returns to the standby state during the interval period between rounds. Specifically, when the round end condition is satisfied under the condition of the second guide state, the output shaft of the drive motor 321 rotates in the first specific direction (counterclockwise direction). As a result, the movable body 450U is switched from the second guidance state to the standby state (see FIG. 56 (d) → FIG. 56 (b)). After returning to the standby state, the output shaft is stopped and the movable body 450U is maintained in the standby state. During the opening / closing execution mode, the movable body 450U is not placed in the housed state at every interval, but the return to the standby state is maintained, thereby suppressing a decrease in responsiveness.

  When the opening / closing execution mode ends, the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft of the drive motor 321 returns to the initial rotation position. Thereby, the movable body 450U switches from the second guidance state to the accommodated state through the standby state. In the accommodated state, the movable body 450U is prevented from projecting toward the specific region SE, and the movable body 450U is protected by the housing 310U.

  In the present embodiment, a game ball launched aiming at the upper operating port 91 in the normal gaming state can flow down toward the variable winning unit 83U. However, in the normal game state, the movable body 450U is maintained in the housed state, and the protrusion toward the specific area SE side is avoided. Thereby, it is suppressed that a game ball collides with the movable body 450U.

  In the configuration for switching to the accommodation state, the standby state, and the guidance state, the responsiveness may be reduced by the addition of the accommodation state. In this regard, in the variable winning unit 83U shown in the present embodiment, when the standby state / guidance state is switched, it is configured not to pass through the accommodation state, thereby suppressing such inconvenience and smooth progress of the game. We are trying to realize it.

  In the variable prize unit 83U shown in the present embodiment, a game ball that has reached the variable prize unit 83U under the condition that the movable body 450U is in the accommodated state is allowed to pass through the specific area SE. . In the specific area SE, similarly to the first modification in the first embodiment, a lower operation port 92U is provided, and a game ball passing through the specific area SE can enter the lower operation port 92. It has a configuration (see FIG. 55 (a)). Thereby, coexistence of the variable winning unit 83U and other game parts is achieved.

  In the configuration in which the movable body 450U functions as a ball receiving portion that receives a game ball, the stress generated when the game ball hits is transmitted to the pivot support location. This hinders the stabilization of the posture of the movable body 450U. Therefore, if the movable body 450U is retracted to the housing portion 461U as shown in the present embodiment, unnecessary contact with the game ball can be suppressed and the pivot support can be protected.

  Further, by retracting the movable body 450U to the housing portion 461U, the front of the movable body 450U can be used as a game ball passing area. Thereby, the restrictions concerning the flow path of the game ball can be relaxed.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the rotation center portion of the rotatable movable body 450R is set at the central portion of the movable body 450R. In such a configuration, the simplification of the configuration relating to the rotation can be realized, but on the side opposite to the guidance destination of the game ball with respect to the rotation center when in the guiding state. When the game ball collides, a stress is generated that encourages the movable body 450R to return to the standby state. This induces variations in the posture of the movable body 450R and can be a factor that hinders the stabilization of the guide function. One of the features of the present embodiment is that a contrivance is made to suppress the occurrence of such inconvenience. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 57, the variable winning unit 83V in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the variable winning unit 83R shown in the thirteenth embodiment.

  The movable body 470V extends in the juxtaposed direction of the first ball entering portion 331 and the second ball entering portion 341, and shaft portions 481V and 482V are provided at both ends in the juxtaposed direction. In the front surface portion 312V of the housing 310V, a vertically long first guide groove 483V through which the first shaft portion 481V on the first ball entering portion 331 side is inserted and a second shaft portion 482V on the second ball entering portion 341 side are inserted. A vertically long second guide groove 484V is formed.

  The housing 310V includes a first biasing member 485V (spring) that connects the housing 310V and the first shaft portion 481V, and a second biasing member 486V that connects the housing 310V and the second shaft portion 482V. Has been. The first shaft portion 481V is pressed against the upper end portion of the first guide groove 483V by the biasing force of the first biasing member 485V, and the second shaft portion 482V of the second guide groove 484V is pressed by the biasing force of the second biasing member 486V. The movable body 470V is held in a standby state (horizontal state) by being pressed against the upper end. That is, the posture of the movable body 450V is kept horizontal by the urging forces of the two urging members 485V and 486V.

  The first guide groove 483V has an arc shape centered on the upper end portion of the second guide groove 484V, and the second guide groove 484V has an arc shape centered on the upper end portion of the first guide groove 483V. . These guide grooves 483V and 484V define the movement ranges of the shaft portions 481V and 482V.

  As shown in FIG. 57B, a horizontally long link member 325V is fixed to the output shaft 322 of the drive motor 321, and the link member 325V extends over the first shaft portion 481V and the second shaft portion 482V. The first action portion 325aV that can be engaged with the tip portion of the first shaft portion 481V is formed at one end thereof, and the other end portion is engaged with the tip portion of the second shaft portion 482V. A possible second action part 325bV is formed. Specifically, the first shaft portion 481 </ b> V and the second shaft portion 482 </ b> V are configured to be objects with the fixed portion of the output shaft 322 interposed therebetween.

  The first action part 325aV and the second action part 325bV have a concave shape opened downward, and when the action parts 325aV and 325b are lowered, the engagement with the shaft parts 481V and 482V is maintained. Thus, a power transmission path from the drive motor 321 is secured, and the power is not transmitted in the case of ascending.

  When the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft 322 rotates in the first predetermined direction (clockwise direction), the first shaft portion 481V is pushed down by the first action portion 325aV, and the first shaft portion 481V moves from the upper end to the lower end of the first guide groove 483V. At this time, the second action part 325bV rises away from the second shaft part 482V. Therefore, the second shaft portion 482V remains in the initial position by the urging force of the second urging member 486V. Thus, when the first shaft portion 481V descends along the first guide groove 483V, the movable body 470V rotates about the second shaft portion 482V, and the posture of the movable body 470V is the first input. It changes so that it may become a downward inclination to the spherical part 331 side (refer Fig.57 (a)-> Fig.57 (c)). As a result, a first guide route GP1 for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 332 of the first ball entry portion 331 is formed.

  When the drive motor 321 operates so that the output shaft 322 rotates in the second predetermined direction (counterclockwise direction), the second shaft portion 482V is pushed down by the second action portion 325bV, and the second shaft The portion 482V moves from the upper end portion to the lower end portion of the second guide groove 484V. At this time, the first action portion 325aV rises away from the first shaft portion 481V. Therefore, the first shaft portion 481V stays at the initial position by the biasing force of the first biasing member 485V. Thus, when the second shaft portion 482V is lowered along the second guide groove 484V, the movable body 470V rotates about the first shaft portion 481V, and the posture of the movable body 470V is the second input. It changes so that it may become a downward inclination to the spherical part 341 side (refer Fig.57 (a)-> Fig.57 (d)). As a result, a second guide route GP2 for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion 342 of the second ball entry portion 341 is formed.

  According to the fifteenth embodiment described in detail above, the movable body 470V is held by the two urging members 485V and 486V. For this reason, even if the movable body 470V has a function as a ball receiving portion for receiving the game ball, the impact generated by the collision of the game ball can be reduced by the biasing members 485V and 486V. Since it is possible to avoid applying a large load to the center of rotation, the stability of the posture of the movable body 470V can be preferably improved.

  In addition, when guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion 331, the movable body 470V rotates around the end on the second ball entry portion 341 side to guide the game ball to the second ball entry portion 341. In this case, the movable body 470V rotates around the end on the first ball entry portion 331 side. For this reason, in the state in which the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed, the portion of the ball receiving portion (the upper surface 472V of the movable body 470V) that is opposite to the guide destination of the game ball is extremely small with respect to the rotation center portion. Thus, it is possible to preferably avoid the stress caused by the collision of the game ball or the like from acting to return the movable body 470V to the standby state.

<Sixteenth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the rotational movable body 450R shown in the thirteenth embodiment is devised to increase the probability of entering the ball (reducing the falling ball) shown in the fifth embodiment. Is one of the features. Hereinafter, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 58, the configuration according to the device will be described focusing on differences from the variable winning unit 83R in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that the housing 310W of the variable winning unit 83R shown in the present embodiment is provided with a cover portion that covers the specific area SE from the front of the gaming machine, but in FIG. 58, the illustration of the cover is omitted for convenience of explanation. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (a), when the movable body 450W is in the standby state, the upper surface 452W (the first inclined portion 453W and the second inclined portion 454W) of the movable body 450W and the ball entering portion 331, A first bypass passage TE1 that bypasses the specific area SE from the first entrance portion 331 side and a second bypass passage TE2 that bypasses the second entrance portion 341 side are formed by the upper surface portion of 341. A pair of front and rear walls that face the housing 310W (specifically, the cover portion and the front surface portion 312W) across the pass area of the game balls in the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 and constitute the wall surfaces of the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 491W is formed.

  Each wall portion 491W is formed with a plurality of protrusions 492W and 493W protruding to the other side. These protrusions 492W and 493W are vertically extending ridges, and are arranged alternately in the passage direction on the front wall portion 491W side and the rear wall portion 491W side. Each of the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 meanders back and forth by these protrusions 492W and 493W, and the game balls passing through the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 move sideways while meandering. Thus, the acceleration of the game ball when passing through the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 is mitigated. In other words, the protrusions 492W and 493W in the present embodiment function as a decelerating means for decelerating the game ball passing through the detour paths TE1 and TE2.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 58B and 58C, the arrangement of the first protrusions 492W and the second protrusions 493W will be described supplementarily.

  As shown in FIG. 58B, when the movable body 450W is in the first guiding state and the first guiding path GP1 to the first ball entering portion 331 is formed, the first protrusion 492W and the second protrusion 493W is located outside the first guide route GP1 (that is, outside the game ball passage region in the first guide route GP1). For this reason, in the first guidance state, the projections 492W and 493W are prevented from coming into contact with the game balls heading toward the first ball entry portion 331 via the first guidance route GP1, and the game balls are projected from the projections 492W. , 493W will be excluded from the object of deceleration.

  In the first guiding state, the second protrusion 493W is positioned below the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W inclined downward on the right side. For this reason, contact with the 2nd projection 493W and the game ball which falls toward the movable body 450W from the variable winning unit 83W is avoided. On the other hand, the first protrusion 492W is located above the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W inclined downward on the right side, and comes into contact with the game ball falling from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W. There is a case. The first protrusion 492W has a vertically extending ridge, and when the game ball passes between the first protrusions 492W, the falling direction of the game ball becomes the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the first protrusion 492W. Stipulated in Here, the first protrusions 492W are arranged in a direction (lateral direction) intersecting the longitudinal direction. For this reason, the game ball whose movement direction is defined does not repeatedly collide with the first protrusion 492W. Therefore, the degree of deceleration is smaller than when the game balls are directed in the direction in which the first protrusions 492W are arranged side by side (when moving along the first bypass passage TE1).

  As shown in FIG. 58C, when the movable body 450W is in the second guiding state and the second guiding path GP2 to the second ball entering portion 341 is formed, the first protrusion 492W and the second protrusion 493W is located outside the second guide route GP2 (that is, outside the game ball passage region in the second guide route GP2). Therefore, in the second guidance state, the protrusions 492W and 493W are prevented from coming into contact with the game balls heading for the second ball entry portion 341 via the second guide route GP2, and the game balls are projected to the protrusions 492W. , 493W will be excluded from the object of deceleration.

  In the second guidance state, the first protrusion 492W is positioned below the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W that is inclined downward on the left side. For this reason, the contact between the game balls that fall from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W and the first protrusions 492W is avoided. On the other hand, the second protrusion 493W is positioned above the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W inclined downward on the right side, and comes into contact with the game ball falling from above the variable winning unit 83W toward the movable body 450W. There is a case. The second protrusion 493W has a vertically extending ridge, and when the game ball passes between the second protrusions 493W, the falling direction of the game ball becomes the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the second protrusion 493W. Stipulated in Here, the second protrusions 493W are arranged in a direction (lateral direction) intersecting the longitudinal direction. For this reason, the game ball whose movement direction is defined does not repeatedly collide with the second protrusion 493W. Therefore, the degree of deceleration is smaller than when the game balls are directed in the direction in which the second protrusions 493W are arranged (when moving along the second detour passage TE2).

  For example, when shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode, the movable body 450W is repeatedly switched from the standby state to the first guidance state to the standby state. Here, in the standby state, the game ball that has reached the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W is decelerated due to a collision with the movable body 450W, and is further accelerated by the protrusions 492W and 493W when passing through the detour paths TE1 and TE2. Move in a restrained state. Thereby, the required period required for the passage of the detour passages TE1 and TE2 becomes longer.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 58 (a) → FIG. 58 (b), when the posture of the movable body 450W changes in a state where the game ball is on the upper surface of the movable body 450W. The game ball whose acceleration is suppressed by the protrusions 492W and 493W is removed from the influence of the protrusions 492W and 493W, and quickly moves toward the first ball entry portion 331. Thereby, it can suppress that the preceding game ball becomes a factor which prevents the movement to the 1st entrance part 331 of a subsequent game ball, and can enter the 1st entrance part 331 smoothly.

  When shifting to the opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode, the movable body 450W is repeatedly switched from the standby state to the second guidance state to the standby state. Here, in the standby state, the game ball that has reached the upper surface 452W of the movable body 450W is decelerated due to a collision with the movable body 450W, and is further accelerated by the protrusions 492W and 493W when passing through the detour paths TE1 and TE2. Move in a restrained state. Thereby, the required period required for the passage of the detour passages TE1 and TE2 becomes longer.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 58 (a) → FIG. 58 (c), when the posture of the movable body 450 </ b> W changes while the game ball is on the upper surface of the movable body 450 </ b> W. The game ball whose acceleration has been suppressed by the protrusions 492W and 493W is removed from the influence of the protrusions 492W and 493W, and quickly moves toward the second incoming ball portion 341. Thereby, it can suppress that the preceding game ball becomes a factor which prevents the movement to the 2nd entrance part 341 of a subsequent game ball, and can enter the 2nd entrance part 341 smoothly.

  According to the sixteenth embodiment described in detail above, a game ball that has reached the movable body 450W during the interval period between rounds can be given an opportunity to enter the first ball entry section 331. As a result, it is possible to suppress irregular hits such as stopping a game ball launching operation for the purpose of suppressing the generation of useless balls during the interval period, and to contribute to smooth game progression.

  In addition, since the game ball placed on the movable body 450W moves toward the ball entry portions 331 and 341 in accordance with the change in the posture of the movable body 450W, the frequency of entry at the start of the round increases. Generating a difference in the frequency of entering during a round game is preferable in order to suppress monotonization of the game.

  The maximum number of game balls placed on the movable body 450W is 5, which is smaller than the upper limit number (8) that is a round end condition. Therefore, there is no inconvenience that the round end condition is satisfied immediately after the start of the round and the round game ends quickly.

  When the movable body 450W is in a standby state, the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 are formed on both the left and right sides with respect to the shaft support portion 451W. As described above, this delays the separation of the game ball from the movable body 450W and lengthens the time it is on the movable body 450W, so that the weight of the game ball changes the posture of the movable body 450W. It is the device which suppresses acting on. For example, when a game ball is placed on the first bypass path TE1, the weight of the game ball can act so that the posture of the movable body 450W is inclined downward to the right. In such a case, the game ball is placed on the second detour passage TE2, so that the weight of the game ball can act to hinder the above action. As described above, it is technically significant that the bypass passages TE1 and TE2 are formed on both sides of the shaft support portion 451W, and the protrusions 492W and 493W as the speed reduction means are disposed in the bypass passages TE1 and TE2.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments. It is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or some of the various configurations shown in the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects to be exerted) of the components to be combined is ensured. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration that is a combination of the embodiments, or a part or all of the configurations may be applied in combination.

  (1) The arrangement place of the variable winning unit 83 in the game area PE is arbitrary. For example, when a flow path of game balls in the game area PE includes a left route that bypasses the variable display unit 85 disposed in the center of the game board 80a from the left side and a right route that bypasses the right side. The variable winning unit 83 may be arranged on one route, and the game balls fired on the other route may be restricted from reaching the variable winning unit 83.

  (2) In the case where another pitching part is provided in the specific area SE (corresponding to “predetermined area”) sandwiched between the two pitching parts 331 and 341 in the variable winning unit 83, The type is arbitrary. For example, a general winning opening 81 or a through gate 84 may be provided.

  (3) In a configuration in which a plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 are provided in the variable winning unit 83, the plurality of movable bodies 350 and 360 do not necessarily need to share a power unit (drive motor 321). A plurality of driving units may be provided corresponding to each of the movable bodies 350 and 360 individually. That is, the first driving unit for the first movable body 350 and the second driving unit for the second movable body 360 may be provided separately. However, in order to promote the downsizing of the variable winning unit 83 and improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the variable winning unit 83, it is technically significant to share the power parts of a plurality of movable bodies.

  (4) Although the detection sensor 334 for the first incoming ball portion 331 and the detection sensor 344 for the second incoming ball portion 341 are individually provided, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ball passage 333 for the first incoming ball portion 331 and the ball passage 343 for the second incoming ball portion 341 merge, and a detection sensor is provided at the junction or a portion downstream of the junction. It is good also as arrange | positioning and sharing a detection sensor.

  (5) Although the variable winning unit 83 is provided with the first and second pitching portions 331 and 341 that serve as game destinations in the opening / closing execution mode, the first and second pitching portions 331 and 341 are provided. One of the pitching parts 341 is a pitching part (big winning opening) that serves as a gaming ball destination in the open / close execution mode, and the other is a pitching part that serves as a gaming ball destination in the high-frequency support mode ( It is also possible to use an operating port with an electric accessory.

  (6) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments and the like, the rotary movable body 450R is configured to face sideways in the standby state, but is not limited thereto. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 59, the movable body 450AA may be configured to be vertically oriented in the standby state.

  For example, as shown in the thirteenth embodiment and the like, in the configuration in which the movable body 450R is constantly protruded toward the specific region SE side, the technical idea shown in the present modification is applied. The chance that the game ball collides with the movable body 450AA in the standby state can be reduced, and the movable body 450AA can be suitably protected. This is preferable for improving the operational stability of the movable body 450AA.

  (7) In each of the above embodiments, the ball entering portions 331 and 341 are arranged so that the entrance portions 332 and 342 face each other, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to arrange the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the incoming ball portions 331 and 341 so as to face a direction different from the parallel arrangement direction of the incoming ball portions 331 and 341. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 60, when the entrance portions 331AB and 341AB are arranged side by side, the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB are directed in a direction (upward) intersecting the juxtaposition direction. May be arranged.

  However, in such a configuration, even when the game ball should not be guided to the ball entry units 331AB and 341AB in the opening / closing execution mode or the like, the game ball falling toward the variable winning unit 83AB enters. There is a concern that the possibility of accidental entry to the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB of the ball portions 331AB and 341AB increases. Accordingly, in such a configuration, for example, it is preferable to provide a configuration in which obstacles such as game nails are provided above the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB to prevent the game balls from falling toward the entrance portions 332AB and 342AB.

  (8) In each of the above embodiments, the incoming ball portions 331 and 341 are arranged side by side, but the positional relationship between the incoming ball portions 331 and 341 is arbitrary. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 61 (a), when the variable winning unit 83AC is disposed on the side of the curved portion of the inner rail 101 so as to rise to the right, The variable winning unit 83AC can be brought closer to the inner rail 101 by shifting the height position so that the ball portion 331AC is above the second left ball entry portion 341AC. This is advantageous, for example, in reducing dead space that may occur between the inner rail 101 and the variable winning unit 83AC.

  (9) In each of the first to ninth and thirteenth to sixteenth embodiments, the total length of the first guide route GP1 is equal to the total length of the second guide route GP2, and the first guide route GP1 is formed. In the state where the game ball has reached any position in the width direction in the specific region SE, the game ball is a guide object to the first ball entering portion 331, and in the state where the second guide route GP2 is formed, the width in the specific region SE A game ball that has reached any position in the direction is a target to be guided to the second incoming ball unit 341, but is not limited thereto. A difference may be provided between game balls to be guided in the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2. For example, a game ball in which the first guide route GP1 has reached any position in the width direction in the specific area SE is set as a guide object to the first entrance portion 331, while the second guide path GP2 is a width in the specific area SE. Differentiating may be performed so that only game balls that have reached a part of the direction (for example, a portion closer to the second ball entrance portion 341) are targeted for guidance to the second ball entrance portion 341.

  (10) In the first, fourth, and fifth embodiments, the recess 363 is formed in the second movable body 360, and the first movable body 350 is inserted into the recess 363. Although the configuration is such that the interference between the operation paths of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is avoided, the specific configuration for avoiding the interference between the operation paths of both the movable bodies 350 and 360 is arbitrary.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 61 (b), by providing a first notch 353AD that opens to the rear end side of the first movable body 350AD and extends to the front end side in the central portion of the first movable body 350AD. A constriction is formed at the central portion, and the second movable body 360AD is constricted at the central portion by providing a second notch 363AD that opens to the front end side of the second movable body 360AD and extends toward the rear end side. Form. Then, the constriction of the second movable body 360AD is inserted into the first notch 353AD, and the constriction of the first movable body 350AD is inserted into the second notch 363AD so that the first movable body 350AD is inserted. And the second movable body 360AD is combined. When the first movable body 350AD moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, the constriction of the first movable body 350AD is displaced to the opening destination of the second notch 363AD of the second movable body 360AD, and the second movable body When the 360AD moves from the retracted position to the protruding position, the above-described constriction of the second movable body 360AD is displaced in the first notch 353AD of the first movable body 350AD. Thereby, it can avoid that the other movement is prevented by one of both movable bodies 350AD and 360AD.

  (11) In each of the above-described embodiments, the variable winning unit 83 is illustrated as having a drive motor 321 as a drive unit for driving the movable bodies 350 and 360. However, the drive unit is not necessarily a motor. It is good also as a structure provided with other drive means, such as a solenoid.

  Here, in order to individually operate the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 using one solenoid, it is preferable to use another actuator to switch the power transmission path of the solenoid. In addition, the solenoid plunger stands by at the initial position in the non-excited state, moves to the first operating position in the first excited state, and the second operating position opposite to the first operating position in the second excited state. The first movable body 350 moves from the retracted position to the protruding position with the movement to the first operation position, and the second movable body 360 moves with the movement to the second operation position. It may be configured to move from the retracted position to the protruding position.

  In addition, as shown in the fifth embodiment, in the opening / closing execution mode, the first ball entering unit 331 and the second ball entering unit 341 are alternately set as guidance destinations for game balls (however, the setting When the number of rounds is assumed to be an even number), the power transmission path may be switched between the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 each time the solenoid is driven.

  (12) In the first to fifth embodiments and the like, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are arranged so as to intersect with each other. However, the first movable body 350 that forms the first guide route GP1. To restrict the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entrance portion 341 and to restrict the movement of the game ball toward the first ball entrance portion 331 by the second movable body 360 forming the second guide route GP2. The above arrangement is not essential. For example, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 62 (a), the first movable body 350AE and the second movable body 360AE may be arranged in a y-shape.

  (13) In the tenth embodiment, the operation area of the movable bodies 430N and 440N when the first guide path GP1 is formed, and the operation area of the movable bodies 430N and 440N when the second guide path GP2 is formed. In the fifteenth embodiment, the operation region of the movable body 470V when forming the first guide route GP1 and the operation region of the movable body 470V when forming the second guide route GP2 are the above. The configuration is duplicated. In view of sharing the operation area when switching to each guidance state, as shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 62 (b), the operation area of the first movable body 350AF for the first ball entry portion 331, and the second It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the operation area of the second movable body 360AF for the entrance 341 is overlapped. Note that it is sufficient if at least the operation areas are overlapped, and the first guide route GP1 and the second guide route GP2 do not necessarily have to be overlapped.

  (14) In the tenth embodiment, when the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed using the plurality of movable bodies 430N and 440N, the movable bodies 430N and the upstream sections of the guide paths GP1 and GP2 are formed. It was set as the structure which synchronizes the motion of 440N and the motion of the movable bodies 430N and 440N which form a downstream part. In the seventh embodiment, when the first guide route GP1 is formed by using the plurality of movable plates 401L and 402L, the upper left movable plate 401L constituting the upstream portion of the first guide route GP1 protrudes. In the situation where the position (corresponding to the “passage forming position”) is placed, the lower right movable plate 402L constituting the downstream portion of the first guide route GP1 is moved to the close position (corresponding to the “passage forming position”). It was set as the structure made to do. When the guide path is formed using a plurality of movable bodies, the operation timing of each movable body is arbitrary. For example, the movable body that forms the downstream portion of the guide path is formed in advance before the movable body that forms the upstream portion. It is also possible to arrange it at a position.

  (15) In the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the total length of the first movable body 450P (the length from the rotation base end portion to the rotation tip end portion) and the total length of the second movable body 460P are the same. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When the movable bodies 450P and 460P are of a rotating type, a force that rotates the movable bodies 450P and 460P is applied by the collision of the game balls. When the first movable body 450P is disposed at the passage formation position, the guide groove prevents further rotation, so that even if the first movable body 450P is pushed by the game ball, a change in posture can be avoided. On the other hand, when the second movable body 460P is arranged at the passage formation position, the guide groove prevents further rotation, but the direction in which rotation is induced by the collision of the game ball is This is the opposite of the direction of rotation restriction. That is, it is not expected that the guide groove for the second movable body 360P is rotated by a game ball collision. Therefore, the second movable body 360P that is susceptible to the impact of game balls can be configured to have a shorter overall length than the first movable body 350P, thereby suppressing such inconvenience.

  (16) In the first embodiment, the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 intersect with each other at the central portion of the movable bodies 350 and 360. However, the intersections are arbitrary. For example, it may be biased toward the first ball entering portion 331 or may be biased toward the second ball entering portion 341.

  It is not always necessary to make the height difference between the upstream end and the downstream end of the movable bodies 350 and 360 coincide with the vertical widths of the entrance portions 332 and 342 of the ball entrance portions 331 and 341, and at least at the protruding position. What is necessary is just to become the structure which can avoid that a game ball flows in into the entrance part of the side which is not a guidance destination in the arrange | positioned state. Furthermore, the lateral widths of the movable bodies 350 and 360 in the direction in which the balls 331 and 341 are juxtaposed are formed so as to be equal to the distance between the inlet portions 332 and 342 of the balls 331 and 341. It is good also as a structure which makes length match.

  When the upstream end of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is extended above the specific region SE, the horizontal width of the movable bodies 350 and 360 is configured to be longer than the separation distance between the inlet portions 332 and 342. May be. However, in order to reduce the size of the variable winning unit 83 and increase the receiving width of the game ball (make the inflow port OE larger), it is technically meaningful to place the movable bodies 350 and 360 in the specific region SE. is there.

  (17) In the first embodiment and the like, the inclination angle of the first guide route GP1 with respect to the horizontal plane and the inclination angle of the second guide route GP2 with respect to the horizontal plane are made to coincide with each other, and each guide route GP1, GP2 passes through. However, the present invention is not limited to this. One guide route may be configured to have a larger inclination angle than the other guide route, and a difference may be provided in the required period. When a difference is provided in the inclination angle in this way, a difference also occurs in the moving speed of the game ball. Therefore, the movable body on the side with the larger inclination angle is provided with the above-described recess 363, and the movable body on the side with the smaller inclination angle is not provided with the recess 363, so that the guide function of the game ball is preferably lowered. Can be suppressed.

  In the fifth embodiment and the like, the first movable body 350 forms the first guide route GP1, and the second movable body 360 forms the second guide route GP2. Although the tilt angle of the first movable body 350 (upper surface 351) with respect to the horizontal plane and the tilt angle of the second movable body 360 (upper surface 361) with respect to the horizontal plane are made to coincide, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the second movable body does not have a function of forming a guide path, the inclination angle of the second movable body can be made larger than the inclination angle of the first movable body. Thereby, the function which controls the movement of the game ball along the 1st guidance path | route GP1 by the 2nd movable body can be strengthened suitably.

  (19) There is a difference between the privilege granted to the player based on the entrance to the first entrance 331 and the privilege granted to the player based on the entrance to the 2nd entrance 341. In such a case, it is assumed that the player plays the game in anticipation that the game will proceed even more advantageously, that is, the player will enter the ball-entry unit on the side where there are many benefits to be given. Therefore, in such a configuration, after the first movable body 350 and the second movable body 360 are arranged at the protruding positions and the game ball is temporarily held in the specific area SE, the movable body that moves to the retreat position is specified. Making it difficult can contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game. That is, when the first movable body 350 is disposed at the projecting position while the second movable body 360 is disposed at the projecting position, an operation pattern in which the second movable body 360 subsequently moves to the retracted position and An operation pattern in which the first movable body 350 moves to the retracted position may be used in combination. Alternatively, or in addition to this, when the second movable body 360 is disposed at the projecting position in a state where the first movable body 350 is disposed at the projecting position, the first movable body is thereafter An operation pattern in which 350 moves to the retracted position and an operation pattern in which the second movable body 360 moves to the retracted position may be used in combination.

  (20) As shown in the above embodiment, in order to provide a difference in the degree of advantage for the first and second balls 331 and 341, it is not always necessary to provide a difference in the number of prize balls. For example, in the case where the number of winning balls is the same, the game state for one of the entrance parts is changed to a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the current game state (for example, a game state corresponding to the low probability mode) ), The difference may be provided in the degree of advantage.

  (21) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. The present invention also relates to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out medals when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from the display window after the reel stops. Can be applied.

  Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The following group A of features is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball fired from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering section provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. Diversification of the game is achieved by making the entrance part variable and switching between a guide state in which the game ball is guided to the entrance part and a non-guide state in which the guide is not performed according to the game situation ( For example, refer to Patent Document 1). "In the gaming machine of the above-described type, there is still room for improvement in the configuration related to the ball entry part in order to improve the degree of attention to the game." It was made in view of the background and issues .

Feature A1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (for example, a first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (for example, a second entrance part 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
Guiding means capable of guiding a game ball to the first and second balls (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, first guide parts 400L to 400M, second guide parts 410L to 410M, movable bodies 450R to 450U, 450W, 470V, 450AA),
When the guide means is in the first state, a first guide route (for example, a first guide route GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion is formed,
When the guide means is in the second state, a second guide route (for example, a second guide route GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entrance portion is formed,
A gaming machine, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route intersect each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

  It is preferable to use a plurality of variable pitching devices having a guiding means and a pitching portion in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the pitching device is bulky and restrictions on the placement of the pitching device become strong. There is a concern that the restriction of the arrangement in this way may hinder the above-described effect of improving the attention level.

  In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide route and the second guide route formed by the guide unit intersect each other, and a part of the guide route is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the occupied area of the pitching device and to appropriately exhibit the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the moving destination of the game ball is reversed while overlapping a part of the guide route, it is possible to prevent the guide destination of the gaming ball from becoming difficult to understand due to the compression of the occupied area.

Feature A2. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (for example, a first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (for example, a second entrance part 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
A first movable body (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide portions 400L to 400M) operable within a predetermined range including a first position (for example, a protruding position);
A second movable body (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, second guide portions 410L to 410M) operable within a predetermined range including a second position (for example, a protruding position),
When the first movable body is arranged at the first position, a first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed,
When the second movable body is arranged at the second position, a second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion is formed,
The gaming machine, wherein the first position and the second position are set so that the first guide path and the second guide path intersect each other when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  It is preferable to use a plurality of variable pitching devices having a movable body and a pitching portion in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the pitching device is bulky and restrictions on the placement of the pitching device become strong. There is a concern that the restriction of the arrangement in this way may hinder the above-described effect of improving the attention level.

  In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide route and the second guide route formed by the guide unit intersect each other, and a part of the guide route is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the occupied area of the pitching device and to appropriately exhibit the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the moving destination of the game ball is reversed while overlapping a part of the guide route, it is possible to prevent the guide destination of the gaming ball from becoming difficult to understand due to the compression of the occupied area.

  The configuration shown in this feature is “a gaming machine having a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, which is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball enters. A first incoming part (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide parts 400L to 400M) and a second incoming part (for example, second incoming part 341); First guide means (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide portions 400L to 400M, which can be switched between a guidance state for guiding the game ball to the ball portion and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed. ) And second guide means (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, and 360AB to be switched to a guidance state in which the game ball is guided to the second entrance portion and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed). 60AD, 2nd guide part 410L-410M), and the said 1st guide means will be in the said guidance state, The 1st inclined surface (for example, 1st) which guides a game ball to the said 1st entrance part to the said game area | region 1 guide route GP1) is formed, and when the second guide means is in the guide state, a second inclined surface (for example, second guide route GP2) that guides the game ball to the second entrance into the game area. The first inclined surface and the second inclined surface are configured to intersect each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

  In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is “a gaming machine having a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, which is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball enters. A first entrance part (for example, the first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (for example, the second entrance part 341), a guidance state for guiding the game ball to the first entrance part, and the guidance are performed. First guide means (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide portions 400L to 400M) that can be switched to a non-guide state, and guide the game ball to the second entrance portion. Second guidance means (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, second guidance portions 410L to 410M) that can be switched between a guidance state and a non-guidance state in which the guidance is not performed, and the guidance state Said A first projection area when one guide means is projected rearward from the front side of the gaming machine, and a second projection area when the second guide means in the guidance state is projected rearward from the front side of the gaming machine. It is also possible to use a gaming machine characterized by being configured to intersect with each other when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

  Furthermore, the configuration shown in this feature is “a game machine having a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and is provided in the game area, and a game ball enters the game area. A first ball entering portion (for example, the first ball throwing portion 331) and a second ball throwing portion (for example, the second ball throwing portion 341) and a first range operable in a predetermined range including a first position (for example, a protruding position). 1st movable body (for example, 1st movable body 350A-350H, 430N, 350AB-350AD, 1st guide part 400L-400M) and the 2nd movable body which can operate | move in the predetermined range containing 2nd position (for example, protrusion position) (For example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, second guide portions 410L to 410M), and the first movable portion is arranged at the first position, so that the first entrance portion The first to guide the game ball to An internal path (for example, a first guide path GP1) is formed, and the second movable body is disposed at the second position, whereby a second guide path (for example, a second guide path) that guides the game ball to the second entrance portion. When the guide route GP2) is formed and the first position and the second position are assumed that the first movable body and the second movable body are disposed at the first position and the second position, A gaming machine characterized in that the first guide route and the second guide route are set so as to intersect each other. "

Feature A3. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (for example, first movable bodies 350A to 350H, 430N, 350AB to 350AD, first guide parts 400L to 400M) and a second entrance part (for example, provided in the game area and into which game balls enter) A second entrance 341),
A first movable body (first movable body 350) operable within a predetermined range including a first position (protruding position);
A second movable body (for example, second movable bodies 360A to 360H, 440N, 360AB to 360AD, second guide portions 410L to 410M) operable within a predetermined range including the second position (projecting position);
When the first condition is satisfied (for example, when a jackpot result corresponding to the first winning mode is obtained), the first movable body is positioned at the first position, and when the second condition is satisfied (for example, the second winning mode). Switching means (MPU of the main control device 162) for switching the arrangement of the first movable body and the second movable body so that the second movable body is positioned at the second position in the case of a corresponding jackpot result) With
When the first movable body is arranged at the first position, a first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed,
When the second movable body is arranged at the second position, a second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry portion is formed,
The gaming machine, wherein the first position and the second position are set so that the first guide path and the second guide path intersect each other when the gaming machine is viewed from the front.

  It is preferable to use a plurality of variable pitching devices having a movable body and a pitching portion in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the pitching device is bulky and restrictions on the placement of the pitching device become strong. There is a concern that the restriction of the arrangement in this way may hinder the above-described effect of improving the attention level.

  In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, the first guide route and the second guide route formed by the guide unit intersect each other, and a part of the guide route is shared. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the occupied area of the pitching device and to appropriately exhibit the effect of increasing the degree of attention to the game. In addition, since the moving destination of the game ball is reversed while overlapping a part of the guide route, it is possible to prevent the guide destination of the gaming ball from becoming difficult to understand due to the compression of the occupied area.

Feature A4. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive the game balls flowing down the game area and perform the guidance so as to change the flow direction of the game balls,
The gaming machine according to Feature A2 or A3, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route intersect each other at an intermediate portion of the first guide route and an intermediate portion of the second guide route.

  If both guide routes are configured to intersect at an intermediate portion of the guide routes, it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the size of the above-described entrance device while increasing the overall length of the guide route (the receiving width of the game ball). .

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is as follows: “The first guide route and the second guide route have a passage length on the upstream side from the intersection and a passage length on the downstream side from the intersection. It is also possible to use a gaming machine according to the feature A2 or the feature A3.

  Incidentally, the technical idea shown in this feature can be applied to the feature A1. In this case, the configuration shown in this feature is “the guide means receives the game ball flowing down the game area and changes the flow direction of the game ball to perform the guide, and the first guide The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route intersect each other at an intermediate portion of the route and an intermediate portion of the second guide route.

  Feature A5. The feature A4 is characterized in that the first movable body and the second movable body are formed such that a total length of the first guide path and a total length of the second guide path are the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine described.

  As shown in the feature A5, if the lengths of the two guide paths are made equal to each other, the effect shown in the feature A4 can be more suitably exhibited.

Feature A6. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive the game balls flowing down the game area and perform the guidance so as to change the flow direction of the game balls,
The first and second balls are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction,
An intersection of the first guide route and the second guide route is located between the first and second ball entering portions in the predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features A5.

  As shown in feature A6, if the intersections of both guide paths are located between the entrance parts in the juxtaposed direction of both entrance parts, the total length of the guide path (the width of the game ball) is While increasing the size, it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the size of the above-described ball entry device.

Feature A7. The first movable body and the second movable body are ball receiving portions that receive the game balls flowing down the game area and perform the guidance so as to change the flow direction of the game balls,
The first and second balls are arranged side by side, and the inlet portions (for example, the inlet portions 332 and 342) of the first and second balls face each other across a predetermined area. Are arranged like this,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A6, wherein an intersection of the first guide route and the second guide route is located in the predetermined area.

  As shown in feature A7, when both the entrance balls are arranged so that the entrance portions face each other, the intersection of the first guide route and the second guide route is set in a predetermined area, thereby providing guidance. While increasing the total length of the path (the receiving width of the game ball), it is possible to suitably suppress an increase in the size of the pitching device resulting therefrom.

Feature A8. The first guide path is inclined so as to go down to the first entrance part,
The second guide route is inclined so as to go down to the second entrance part,
The gaming machine according to A7, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route are formed in the predetermined area.

  As shown in this feature, in the configuration in which the game ball is guided by inclining down the guide route toward each of the entrance parts, the moving speed of the game ball depends on the inclination angle. If the technical idea shown in the feature A2 or the like is applied to such a configuration, the inclination angle can be increased to some extent while increasing the overall length of the guide path (the receiving width of the game ball). Therefore, by forming a guide route in a predetermined area, it is possible to favorably suppress the guidance function and the like from being not performed well due to the promotion of downsizing of the pitching device.

  Feature A9. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, wherein an inclination angle of the first guide path with respect to a horizontal plane and an inclination angle of the second guide path with respect to a horizontal plane are the same or substantially the same.

  As shown in the feature A8, if the configuration is such that both guide paths are formed in a predetermined area, it is possible to suitably achieve downsizing of the ball entry device.

Feature A10. The first and second ball entrance portions have the vertical widths of the entrance portions of the first and second ball entrance portions, and the entrance portions of the first and second ball entrance portions. Configured to be smaller than the separation distance between them,
The gaming machine according to Feature A8 or Feature A9, characterized in that an angle formed by the first guide route and the second guide route is an obtuse angle on the upper side and the lower side.

  In the case where the predetermined area is configured to be horizontally long as shown in the feature A10, it is preferable that the angle formed by both guide routes be an obtuse angle. Thereby, while enlarging the full length of the guide route (the receiving width of the game ball), it is possible to suitably suppress the increase in the size of the above-described entrance device due to the increase.

Feature A11. The first guide route and the second guide route are configured to move the game ball along the front surface of the game board,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A2 to A10, wherein the first movable body and the second movable body are slidable in a thickness direction of the game board.

  In the configuration in which the first guide path formed by the first movable body and the second guide path formed by the second movable body intersect each other as shown in the feature A2 and the like, there is a guide path on one side. This may be a factor that hinders the movement of the movable body on the other side. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in a state where the first movable body is disposed at the first position, at least a part of the first movable body protrudes from the front surface of the game board, whereby the first guide path is formed. In the state where the second movable body is formed and disposed at the second position, at least a part of the second movable body protrudes from the front surface of the game board to form the second guide path. With such a configuration, the presence of the first guide path becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the second movable body, or the presence of the second guide path becomes a factor that hinders the movement of the first movable body. It can suppress suitably. Thereby, the fall of the setting freedom degree of the operation timing of a 1st movable body and a 2nd movable body can be relieve | moderated suitably.

  In addition, when each guide route is formed in a predetermined area as shown in the feature A8, the operation area of the movable body from the predetermined area is applied by applying the configuration shown in this feature (back and forth slide of the movable body). Protrusion can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature A12. One of the first movable body and the second movable body is formed with an insertion portion (for example, a recess 363) through which the other of the first movable body and the second movable body is inserted. The gaming machine according to Feature A11, wherein the first movable body and the second movable body intersect with each other.

  In the configuration in which both movable bodies are slid in the thickness direction of the game board as shown in feature A10, an insertion portion is formed in one movable body as shown in this feature, and the other movable body is formed in this insertion portion. It is good to make both movable bodies cross by inserting. In such a configuration, the insertion portion functions as an operation region of the other movable body. Accordingly, it is possible to preferably avoid the movement of the other movable body from being obstructed by one movable body in realizing the configuration in which the guide routes intersect as described above.

Feature A13. The first movable body and the second movable body have a flat plate shape, and a rolling surface of the game ball in the first guide path is formed by one plate surface of the first movable body, and the second The rolling surface of the game ball in the second guide path is formed by one plate surface of the movable body,
Of the thickness dimensions of the first movable body and the second movable body, at least the thickness dimension of the movable body in which the insertion portion is not formed is formed to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. The gaming machine according to Feature A12, characterized in that

  In the configuration in which the movable body has a flat plate shape and the rolling surface of the game ball in the guide path is formed by the plate surface, a blank is generated on the rolling surface (intersection) by the insertion portion. If this blank becomes excessively large, the game ball spills through the blank, and the guide function can be lowered. Therefore, as shown in this feature, among the thickness dimensions of the first movable body and the second movable body, at least the thickness of the movable body in which the insertion portion is not formed (the movable body on the side inserted through the insertion portion). By forming the height dimension to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball, occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A14. First privilege granting means for granting a player a first privilege based on the entry to the first entrance part;
A second privilege granting means for granting a player a second privilege based on the entrance to the second entrance part,
The first privilege is set to be more advantageous to the player than the second privilege,
The gaming machine according to Feature A12 or Feature A13, wherein the insertion portion is provided in the two movable bodies.

  As shown in feature A14, when there is a difference in the dominance of each entrance part, the game ball is not smoothly guided to the entrance part on the side advantageous to the player. It may be a factor that reduces motivation, or a factor that makes it difficult to differentiate the game, for example, by reducing the superiority of the first pitching part. Then, if it is set as the structure which the said blank arises in the 2nd guidance route which goes to the 2nd entrance part with a small privilege given rather than the 1st guidance route which goes to the 1st entrance part with a big privilege provided, those various The occurrence of inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature A15. A first rolling surface of the first guide path that is inclined downward to the first ball entry portion by the first movable body;
A second rolling surface of the second guide path that is inclined downward to the second entrance portion by the second movable body;
The inclination angle of the second rolling surface is larger than the inclination angle of the first rolling surface;
The gaming machine according to Feature A12 or Feature A13, wherein the insertion portion is provided in the second movable body.

  When the inclination angle is small, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the guide route tends to be small. For this reason, it becomes easy to influence whether it can move so that it may jump over an insertion part by the size of an insertion part. In order to perform the guiding function by the movable body well, it is technically significant to arrange the insertion portion on the movable body having a larger inclination angle as shown in this feature.

  Feature A16. Of the first movable body and the second movable body, a portion that is inserted in the insertion portion in a movable body in which the insertion portion is not formed is a thin-walled portion that is smaller in thickness than other portions in the movable body. The gaming machine according to any one of features A12 to A15, wherein:

  As shown in feature A12, in a configuration in which a blank is generated on the rolling surface, the behavior of the game ball may be disturbed when passing through the blank. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if at least the portion to be inserted is thinned, the insertion portion itself can be reduced, and as a result, the blank can be reduced. Thereby, disorder of the behavior of a game ball can be reduced suitably.

  Feature A17. The gaming machine according to Feature A16, wherein the thin portion is formed by recessing a lower surface of the movable body in which the thin portion is formed of the first movable body and the second movable body. .

  If the lower surface is recessed to form a thin portion as shown in feature A17, the rolling surface of the movable body that is the subject of the thin portion can be smoothed, and the behavior of the game ball is disturbed. Can be suitably avoided.

  Feature A18. When the first movable body is disposed at the first position, the first guide path is formed together with the first movable body when the first guide route and the second guide route are crossed. And a path forming portion (core 390F, 390G) that forms the second guide path together with the second movable body when the second movable body is disposed at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11.

  According to the feature A18, the gap generated at the intersection can be reduced. Thereby, the smooth guidance of the game ball can be realized in realizing the intersection arrangement shown in the feature A1 and the like.

Feature A19. The first movable body and the second movable body have a flat plate shape,
In a state where the first movable body is disposed at the first position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 351F) of the first movable body is inclined downward to the first entrance portion,
In the state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 361F) of the second movable body is inclined downward to the second entrance part,
The path forming unit is
A first inclined portion (for example, a first inclined portion 391F) that constitutes a rolling surface of the game ball in the first guide path together with the upper plate surface of the first movable body;
It has the 2nd inclined part (for example, 2nd inclined part 392F) which constitutes the rolling surface of the game ball in the 2nd guidance course with the upper plate surface in the 2nd movable body, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. A gaming machine according to A18.

  According to the feature A19, the first inclined portion is provided in accordance with the first movable body, and the second inclined portion is provided in accordance with the second movable body, thereby realizing smoothing of each rolling surface (inclined surface). The restrictions concerning the direction of the guide passage and the like can be preferably relaxed.

Feature A20. The first movable body has a first housing portion (for example, a notch 353F) that houses the second inclined portion in a state where the first movable body is disposed at the first position.
The second movable body has a second housing portion (for example, a recess portion 363F) that houses the first inclined portion in a state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position. The gaming machine described in feature A19.

  According to the feature A20, an unnecessary part (inclined part) in the path forming part is accommodated in the accommodating part of the movable body. Thereby, it can suppress suitably that the behavior of a game ball is disturb | confused by the game ball being caught by the part which becomes unnecessary.

  Feature A21. The path forming unit is movable to a protruding position protruding into the game area and a retracted position where the protrusion is suppressed, and when neither the first guide path nor the second guide path is formed The gaming machine according to any one of features A18 to A20, wherein the gaming machine is configured to stand by at the retracted position.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the guide route is not formed, the protrusion of the route forming unit to the game area is suppressed. Thereby, the chance that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the path forming unit can be reduced. In this way, by protecting the route forming unit, when the guide route is formed by the route forming unit and the movable body, the relative positions of the two may vary, and the guidance of the game ball will not be performed smoothly. Can be suppressed.

  Feature A22. When the first movable body moves to the first position, the path forming unit follows the first movable body and moves to the protruding position, and the second movable body moves to the second position. The gaming machine according to Feature A21, wherein the gaming machine is configured to follow the second movable body and move to the protruding position.

  In the case where the path forming portion is retractable as shown in the feature A21, the path forming portion moves to the protruding position following the movement of each movable body to the guide position (first position or second position). By adopting the configuration, it is possible to suppress a deviation in the formation timing of the guide passage.

Feature A23. The moving direction of the first movable body and the second movable body is the same as the moving direction of the path forming portion,
The first movable body is provided with a first action portion (for example, an arm portion 355G) that moves the path forming portion to the protruding position when the first movable body moves to the first position.
The second movable body is provided with a second action portion (for example, an arm portion 365G) that moves the path forming portion to the protruding position when the second movable body moves to the second position. The gaming machine according to feature A21 or feature A22,

  As described above, if the path forming unit is a retractable type, various effects such as protection of the path forming unit can be expected. However, the necessity of a separate drive unit for driving the path forming unit is an obstacle to simplifying and downsizing the configuration relating to the ball entry device. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the moving direction of each movable body and the path forming part is unified, and the path forming part is pushed to the protruding position by the action part provided in each movable body, so that it is newly added. There is no need to add a drive unit. Thereby, the excessive complication of the structure which concerns on a pitching device can be suppressed, and it can contribute to size reduction of a pitching device.

  Feature A24. When the first movable body is shifted from one of the state where the first movable body is disposed at the first position and the state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position, the first movable body is disposed at the protruding position. The game machine according to any one of features A21 to A23, wherein the path forming portion is transferred from one of the first movable body and the second movable body to the other at the protruding position.

  In view of the fact that the path forming unit moves so as to block the flow path of the game ball, there is a possibility that the game ball will be caught when placed at the protruding position. Therefore, when switching from the state in which the guide path is configured with one of the first movable body and the second movable body to the state in which the guide path is configured with the other, the return of the path forming unit to the retracted position is avoided. Such a problem can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration (for example, retaining at the protruding position).

  The configuration shown in this feature is “when the first movable body is shifted from one of the state where the first movable body is disposed at the first position and the state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position to the other. The gaming machine according to any one of features A21 to A23, wherein movement of the path forming unit disposed at the protruding position to the retracted position is avoided. It is.

Feature A25. The first and second balls are arranged side by side and the entrance portions (entrance portions 332 and 342) are opposed to each other,
The features A21 to A21 are characterized in that the first guide route and the second guide route are formed in a region (specific region SE) sandwiched between the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features A24.

  As shown in this feature, if the guide path is formed in a region sandwiched between the entrance parts after the entrance parts are arranged so as to face each other, downsizing of the entrance apparatus can be promoted. In the case where the route forming unit is used as both guide routes in such a configuration, the following inconvenience occurs if the route forming unit remains in the region when the guide route is not formed. In other words, there is a possibility that the game ball passing through the area rebounds to the path forming unit and heads for the ball entering unit. In this regard, if the path forming unit is made to appear and retract as shown in the feature A21 and the like, such movement of the game ball can be suitably avoided, and the game ball is not guided to the entrance part. It can suppress suitably that the entrance to the entrance part occurs.

Feature A26. The first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are arranged such that the entrance portions (inlet portions 332 and 342) face each other.
By arranging the first movable body at the first position, an inclined surface that forms the bottom of the first guide path by the upper surface of the first movable body and is inclined downward to the first entrance portion. Formed,
By arranging the second movable body at the second position, an inclined surface that forms a bottom portion of the second guide path by the upper surface of the second movable body and is inclined downward to the second entrance portion. Formed,
An area between the first entrance and the second entrance, and an area below the first and second movable bodies is an inflow section through which game balls can flow ( For example, the gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A25, wherein the gaming machine is an arrangement region of an out port 86, a lower working port 92, and the like.

  According to the feature A26, when the upper surface of the first movable body and the upper surface of the second movable body constitute the bottom portion of the guide path, the region above the first movable body and the upper side of the second movable body. This area is a passing area when the game ball is guided to the first / second entry portion. On the other hand, with respect to the lower region of both movable bodies, when the game ball is guided, the passage of the game ball is basically avoided.

  Therefore, if the inflow portion is disposed in this region, the first / second incoming ball portion and the inflow portion can be preferably coexisted. In addition, whether or not to enter the inflow portion depends on the movement of the movable body, which can contribute to diversification of games.

  Note that the “inflow portion” shown in this feature may be a “third entrance portion”.

Feature A27. The predetermined range in which the first movable body moves includes a standby position in which protrusion of the game ball between the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion is suppressed.
The predetermined range in which the second movable body moves includes a standby position where protrusion to the passage region is suppressed,
Game state transition means for transitioning the gaming state from the first gaming state to a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
Means for moving at least one of the first movable body and the second movable body to the first position and the second position when the gaming state becomes the second gaming state;
The gaming machine according to Feature A26, further comprising means for waiting the first movable body and the second movable body at the standby position in the first gaming state.

  By using the entrance part and the inflow part together, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the movement of the game ball around the entrance device. However, in such a configuration, if the entrance into the inflow portion cannot be substantially expected, the significance of using the entrance portion and the inflow portion together will be reduced. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first gaming state, both the first movable body and the second movable body remain in the standby position, and the movement restriction of the game ball by the first movable body and the second movable body is restricted. Canceled. As described above, at least in the first gaming state, it is possible to preferably avoid the existence significance of the inflow portion by allowing the inflow of the game ball passing between the two incoming ball portions to the inflow portion.

  Feature A28. Any of features A1 to A27, further comprising means for placing the second movable body at the second position in a state where the first movable body is disposed at the first position. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the feature A28, after the first guide route is formed and the game ball is guided to the first entry portion, the first guide route is cut off by arranging the second movable body at the second position. . Thereby, the entrance into the 1st entrance part becomes impossible. By arrange | positioning a 2nd movable body to a 2nd position, a 2nd guide path | route is formed collectively. That is, the second movable body has both a function of determining whether or not to enter the first entrance part and a function of forming a guide route to the second entrance part. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player by realizing an unprecedented guidance mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the progress of game progression due to the diversification of movement. .

Feature A29. Means for disposing the second movable body at the second position under a situation where the first movable body is disposed at the first position;
And a means for arranging the first movable body at the first position in a state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A29, after the first guide route is formed and the game ball is guided to the first entry portion, the second guide route is cut off by arranging the second movable body at the second position. . Thereby, the entrance into the 1st entrance part becomes impossible. By arrange | positioning a 2nd movable body to a 2nd position, a 2nd guide path | route is formed collectively. That is, the second movable body has both a function of determining whether or not to enter the first entrance part and a function of forming a guide route to the second entrance part. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player by realizing an unprecedented guidance mode, and it is possible to suitably suppress the progress of game progression due to the diversification of movement. .

Feature A30. A drive unit (drive motor 321) for driving the first movable body and the second movable body;
A drive control unit (MPU of the main control unit 162) that performs drive control of the drive unit,
The drive control unit moves the first movable body to the first position by setting the drive unit to the first drive state, and the drive unit sets the second movable body to the first drive state. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A29, wherein the gaming machine is configured to move to the second position.

  If the movable body to be driven is switched in accordance with the drive state of the drive unit, it is not necessary to provide a drive unit for each movable body, which can contribute favorably to downsizing of the ball entry device.

Feature A31. The drive unit is a motor,
In the feature A30, the drive control unit is configured to rotate the drive unit forward in the first drive state and reversely rotate the drive unit in the second drive state. The gaming machine described.

  In realizing the technical idea shown in the feature A30, a motor may be employed as the drive unit as shown in this feature, and the rotation direction of the motor may be switched between the forward and reverse directions.

Feature A32. The predetermined range in which the first movable body and the second movable body move includes a standby position where protrusion of the game board to the front side is suppressed,
The first movable body and the second movable body constitute a part of the front surface of the game board by being arranged at the standby position,
When the first movable body is moved between the standby position and the first position, transmission of power to the second movable body is avoided, and the second movable body is moved to the standby position and the first position. The gaming machine according to Feature A30 or Feature A31, wherein when moving between two positions, transmission of power to the first movable body is avoided.

  When a part of the front surface of the game board is configured (complemented) by the first movable body (for example, the end surface) and the second movable body (for example, the end surface) arranged at the standby position, the front passes through the movable bodies. It is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught and to suppress the disturbance of the behavior of the game ball. In the case where the drive unit is shared in such a configuration, when one movable body is moved, if the other movable body moves along with it, for example, it moves backward from the standby position. There is a concern that will not be demonstrated well. Therefore, as described in this feature, when one movable body is moved, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration that avoids transmission of power to the other movable body.

<Feature B group>
The following feature B group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems such as “the gaming machine of the above-mentioned type still has room for improvement in the diversification of games by the variable pitching means”. Is.

Feature B1. A gaming machine comprising a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with a ball entry means (for example, a variable prize unit 83) in which a game ball can enter the game area. There,
The entrance means is
A first ball-injection portion (for example, a first portion) arranged in parallel in a predetermined direction (for example, the left-right direction) and arranged so that the inlet portions (for example, the inlet portions 332 and 342) face each other across a predetermined region (specific region SE). An incoming ball portion 331) and a second incoming ball portion (for example, the second incoming ball portion 341);
A first guidance state in which the game ball that has reached the predetermined area is guided to the first entrance portion, a second guidance state in which the game ball is guided to the second entrance portion, the first entrance portion and the second entrance state. A gaming machine characterized by having guide means (for example, movable bodies 350, 360) that can be switched to a non-guided state that does not guide a game ball in any of the ball portions.

  It is easier to give the player the impression that the entry is easier when the size of the entrance is smaller than when the entrance is small. Although the diversification of games can be realized by using a plurality of entrance parts together, if an attempt is made to arrange a large entrance part as each entrance part for the above reasons, the entrance part will occupy the game area. Inconveniences such as a large area occur. Therefore, in this feature, a predetermined area sandwiched between the first entrance part and the second entrance part is used as an introduction area for introducing a game ball into each entrance part (that is, the introduction area is shared) By adopting a configuration in which the game balls that have reached the predetermined area are guided to the respective entrance parts by the guide means, the first entrance part and the second entrance are reduced while miniaturizing the first entrance part and the second entrance part. It is possible to make the gaps between the spheres (inflow points into the predetermined area (inlet OE)) appear as if they are entrances to these spheres. As a result, it is possible to make the small entrance part actually look larger than the actual situation. Enlarging the appearance of the entrance by using the two entrances together in this way gives the player the impression that entrance is easy, which is advantageous in improving the game motivation.

  Feature B2. A first privilege (for example, 15 prize balls) is given to the player on the basis of the game ball entering the first ball club, and the game ball has entered the second ball club The gaming machine according to Feature B1, further comprising privilege granting means (payout device 224) that grants a second privilege (for example, 10 prize balls) to the player based on the above.

  As shown in this feature, it is preferable to use a plurality of entrances with different benefits to be given in order to realize diversification of games. However, there is a concern that by disposing a plurality of types of entering parts in the gaming area, the arrangement area of other gaming parts is compressed, and as a result, restrictions on the arrangement of the entering parts become stronger. In this respect, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by applying the technical idea shown in the feature B1.

  Feature B3. The first and second balls are separated from each other when the distance between the first ball portion and the second ball portion is a front view of the gaming machine. The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be larger than the opening width of the entrance portion (entrance portions 332 and 342).

  As shown in the feature B1, in order to make the gap between the entrance parts (inflow point to the predetermined area (inlet OE)) appear to be the entrance part, the gap is an opening of the entrance part of each entrance part. It may be configured to be larger than the width. As a result, it is possible to increase the size of the apparent entrance while promoting the downsizing of the actual entrance part, and it is possible to suitably exhibit the effect shown in the feature B1.

  As for the “separation distance” between the first and second balls, the length of the boundary portion upstream in the inflow direction in which the game balls flow into the predetermined area, for example, the game balls from above In the structure which flows in, the magnitude | size of the clearance gap between the upper part of a 1st incoming ball part and the upper part of a 2nd incoming ball part is shown.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3, wherein the guide means is disposed at the predetermined region or at a position overlapping with the predetermined region.

  By suppressing the exposure of the guide means outside the predetermined area, it is possible to suitably exhibit the visual effect of impressing that the gap between the both balls is an entrance as shown in the feature B1.

  Feature B5. The guide means is held so as to be slidable in the thickness direction of the game board. In the first guide state, the guide means protrudes into the predetermined area and inclines downward toward the first pitching portion. A route (first guide route GP1) is formed, and in the second guide state, a second guide route (second guide route GP2) that protrudes into the predetermined area and inclines downward toward the second ball entry portion is formed. In the non-guided state, the gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B4, wherein the gaming machine is arranged at a retreat position where the protrusion to the predetermined area is avoided.

  If the guide path is formed by sliding the guide means in the thickness direction of the game board as shown in this feature, it is possible to suitably suppress the operation area of the guide means from expanding outside the predetermined area. Thereby, as shown in the feature B1, the visual effect of impressing that the gap between the two ball entering portions is the entrance portion can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature B6. The game machine according to Feature B5, wherein the first guide route and the second guide route extend over the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion.

  It is assumed that the game ball that has reached the predetermined area in the first guidance state and the second guidance state does not pass through the predetermined area as it is to impede the impression that the gap between the balls is the entrance. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if each guide route is formed so as to straddle both incoming ball portions and the passing of the game ball reaching the gap is avoided, occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. .

Feature B7. The first entrance part and the second entrance part are arranged side by side in the lateral direction,
The first guide path is inclined downward from the second entrance part to the first entrance part, and the second guide path is from the first entrance part to the second entrance part. It is configured to have a downward slope,
The height difference between the upstream end portion and the downstream end portion in the first guide path is formed to be the same as or substantially the same as the vertical width of the inlet portion of the first ball entry portion,
The height difference between the upstream end portion and the downstream end portion in the second guide path is formed to be the same as or substantially the same as the vertical width of the entrance portion of the second ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to Feature B6, which is characterized.

  In the configuration in which the game ball is guided to the entrance portion by the inclination of the guide path, if the inclination is loose, the period required for guidance becomes long, and if the inclination is increased, the vertical width increases. Therefore, by aligning the difference in height with the vertical width of the incoming ball part while adjusting the horizontal width to the distance between the two incoming ball parts, the guide route is maximized so that it fits in a predetermined area sandwiched by both incoming ball parts. Can be achieved.

Feature B8. The first entrance part and the second entrance part are arranged side by side in the lateral direction,
In the first guiding state, the first guiding path is formed between a portion forming an inlet (inlet OE) to the predetermined region in the predetermined region and an inlet portion of the second ball entering portion. In the second guide state, any one of the features B5 to B7 is characterized in that the second guide path is formed between the inflow port and the entrance portion of the first ball entry portion. The gaming machine described.

  In the case where the two entrance parts are arranged side by side and the entrance parts are opposed to each other, there is a high possibility that an entrance to the entrance part that is not the guidance destination will occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, each guide route is formed so as to block an inflow port (inflow portion) in a predetermined area and an entrance portion of the entrance portion that is not the guide destination, so that the entrance route that is not the guide destination It is possible to favorably avoid entering the club.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “when the first guide path is formed, the movement of the game ball to the entrance portion of the second ball entry portion is regulated by the first guide path, Any of the features B1 to B7, wherein when two guide routes are formed, the second guide route restricts the movement of the game ball to the entrance portion of the first entrance portion It is also possible to use “a gaming machine described in one”.

  Feature B9. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B8, wherein the ball entry means includes a cover portion that covers the predetermined area from the front of the gaming machine.

  In the case where the gap (the inflow portion into the predetermined area) between the two ball entering portions is shown as if it is an entrance portion as shown in the feature B1, the above inflow locations such as the predetermined area and the entrance portions of the respective ball entering portions It is not preferable that the part other than is conspicuous. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the cover portion covers these components, the visibility can be lowered, and the effect shown in the feature B1 can be more suitably exhibited.

  Feature B10. In any one of the features B1 to B9, the region where the first guide route is formed and the region where the second guide route is formed overlap in the predetermined region. The gaming machine described.

  In the configuration in which the first guide route and the second guide route are formed in the predetermined area, the gap (the inflow point to the predetermined area) between the two ball entering portions is allowed by allowing overlap of a part of the two guide paths. The game balls that have passed can be earned for guidance, and both guidance routes can coexist suitably in a limited range.

Feature B11. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (second entrance part 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
Guide means (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, and 450R) that can be switched between a first guidance state for guiding a game ball to the first entrance portion and a second guide state for guiding the game ball to the second entrance portion. With
The first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are arranged such that entrance portions (entrance portions 332 and 342) face each other across a predetermined area (specific area SE), and a game that has reached the predetermined area The sphere is configured to enter the first and second entrance parts via the predetermined area,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the predetermined area is an operation area in which the guiding means operates when the guiding means is switched between the first guiding state and the second guiding state.

  It is preferable to use a plurality of variable pitching units (ball pitching devices) in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the pitching device is bulky and restrictions on the placement of the pitching device become strong. This is not preferable for coexistence with other game parts in the game area.

  Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, game balls flowing down the game area flow into the first and second entrance parts through the predetermined area. In this predetermined area, it is difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts. Therefore, by using a predetermined area sandwiched between the two entrance parts as an operation area of the guide means, a dead space where other game parts cannot be placed around the entrance apparatus to secure the operation area. Can be suppressed. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of a pitching apparatus can be improved suitably.

  The configuration shown in this feature is “a gaming machine having a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, which is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball enters. A first entrance portion (first entrance portion 331) and a second entrance portion (second entrance portion 341), and a first entrance portion (first entrance) that is provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters. A first guidance state that forms a first guidance route (first guidance route GP1) for guiding a game ball to the first incoming ball portion with the incoming ball portion 331) and the second incoming ball portion (second incoming ball portion 341). And a guide means (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched to a second guide state that forms a second guide path (second guide path GP2) that guides the game ball to the second entrance section, An area sandwiched between the first and second balls is switched between the first guiding state and the second guiding state. It is also possible that the gaming machine. ", Characterized in that a work region of the guide means when in place.

  Feature B12. The guide means has a first guide path that slopes downward from a position close to the second ball entrance portion to a position close to the first ball entrance portion in the predetermined area by entering the first guide state. And forming a second guide path that inclines downward from a position close to the first ball entering portion to a position close to the second ball entering portion in the predetermined region by entering the second guiding state. The gaming machine according to Feature B11, wherein the gaming machine is configured.

  In each guidance state, a guidance route is formed across the predetermined area. Since the guide route extends from the incoming ball portion serving as the guide destination to the vicinity of the incoming ball portion that is not the guide destination, most of the game balls that have reached the predetermined area are guided to the incoming ball portion. In this way, it is assumed that the operation area of the guide means increases if the game ball is to be increased in width. Therefore, a practically preferable configuration can be realized if the technical idea shown in the feature B11 is applied to such a configuration, and the region between the balls (predetermined region) is the operation region of the guide means.

  Feature B13. The guide means has a plurality of movable bodies provided so as to be rotatable, and the movable bodies are arranged at predetermined passage formation positions, whereby the first guide path and the second guide path are formed. The gaming machine according to Feature B12, wherein:

  When the first guide path and the second guide path are formed by using the rotary movable body, the size of the movable body increases, so that the operation area is likely to be bulky, and the limited area of the predetermined area is set. It becomes difficult to fit the operating area. Therefore, if the guide means is constituted by a plurality of movable bodies, and each guide path is formed by a combination of these movable bodies, the use area of the guide means outside the predetermined area is suppressed. Can be suppressed. Therefore, space saving of the pitching device can be favorably promoted.

  Feature B14. The guide means has a first rotation center portion and a second rotation center portion, and rotates around the first rotation center portion to form the first guide path. The gaming machine according to Feature B12 or Feature B13, wherein the second guide path is formed by rotating about a moving center portion.

  When the first guide path and the second guide path are formed by using the rotary movable body, the size of the movable body increases, so that the operation area is likely to be bulky, and the limited area of the predetermined area is set. It becomes difficult to fit the operating area. Then, if it is set as the structure which makes the rotation center part in the case of forming a 1st guide path | route different from the rotation center part in the case of forming a 2nd guide path | route, the useless expansion of the operation | movement area | region of a guide means will be suppressed, The expansion of the operation area of the guide means outside the predetermined area can be suppressed. Therefore, space saving of the pitching device can be favorably promoted.

  Feature B15. The guide means includes a first movable body (first movable body 350) and a second movable body (second movable body 360) that are slidably movable in the thickness direction of the game board. When the movable body is arranged at the projecting position protruding into the predetermined area, the first guiding state is established, and when the second movable body is arranged at the projecting position projecting into the predetermined area, the second guiding state is established. The gaming machine according to Feature B12, wherein the gaming machine is configured as follows.

  According to the feature B15, the first movable body and the second movable body are slidable in the thickness direction of the game board, and a guide path is formed by projecting the movable bodies to a predetermined area. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the expansion of the operation area of the movable body to a portion outside the predetermined area in the game area. Therefore, space saving of the pitching device can be favorably promoted.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristic A group to the characteristic B1-characteristic B15.

<Feature C group>
The following group C is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it has been made in view of the background, problems and the like that “the gaming machine of the above-mentioned type has room for improvement in realizing the diversification of games”.

Feature C1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (second entrance part 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
A first guide state that is provided displaceably in the game area and guides the game ball to the first ball-entry portion; a second guide state that guides the game ball to the second ball-entry portion; Guide portions that can be switched to a non-guided state in which the game ball is not guided to either the entrance portion or the second entrance portion (eg, guide portions 400L and 410L, guide portions 400M and 410M, movable bodies 430N and 440N, movable Body 470V),
A first displacement region in which the guide unit is displaced in the game area when the guide unit is switched from the non-guide state to the first guide state, and the guide unit is changed from the non-guide state to the second guide state. A gaming machine characterized in that a part of the second displacement area in which the guide portion is displaced in the game area when switching is partially overlapped.

  It is preferable to use a plurality of variable pitching units (ball pitching devices) in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the pitching device is bulky and restrictions on the placement of the pitching device become strong. This is not preferable for coexistence with other game parts in the game area.

  Here, in the configuration in which the guide portion is displaced to be in the first guide state / second guide state, the displacement region of the guide portion in each guide state is a dead that makes it impossible or difficult to arrange other game parts. Become a space. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first displacement region in the first guiding state and the second displacement region in the second guiding state are partially overlapped, the variable entry ball Even when a plurality of apparatuses are used in combination, it is possible to suitably suppress the dead space from being unnecessarily increased.

Feature C2. The first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are arranged such that entrance portions (inlet portions 332 and 342) face each other,
The guide portion is disposed in a predetermined region (specific region SE) between the first ball entrance portion and the second ball entrance portion, and the predetermined portion is in the first guide state and the second guide state. The game ball is guided to the first and second pitching parts through the area,
The gaming machine according to C1, wherein an overlapping portion of the first displacement area and the second displacement area is located in the predetermined area.

  In the configuration in which the game balls entering the first and second entrance parts both pass through the predetermined area, the predetermined area becomes a dead space in which it is difficult to place other game parts. Therefore, by using this area as a displacement area of the guide portion, it is possible to promote downsizing of the ball entry device. In particular, if an overlapping portion of each displacement area is arranged in a predetermined area, the first displacement area when the predetermined area is in the first guide state, the second displacement area when the second area is in the second guide state, and the both balls Thus, the expansion of the occupied area due to the combined use of a plurality of ball-entrance portions can be more suitably suppressed.

Feature C3. The guide part forms a first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering part by entering the first guide state, and the game ball flowing down the game area Receiving and changing the flow direction so as to face the first entrance part,
The game according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, wherein an overlapping portion of the first displacement area and the second displacement area is located in an area where the first guide route is formed in the game area Machine.

  It is difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts on the guide route of the game ball. In view of this, a configuration in which the overlapping portion is located in this region, that is, a configuration in which both the first displacement region and the second displacement region utilize the formation region of the first guide path, ensures a preferable displacement region. Can do. By constructing such a coexistence relationship, even if the overall length of the first guide route is increased to increase the receiving width of the game ball, it is preferable to suppress the increase in the pitching device due to that. it can.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is that “the guide unit is configured to designate a first guide route (first guide route GP1) for guiding a game ball to the first ball entering unit when the first guide state is set in the predetermined region. The game according to Feature C1 or Feature C2, wherein at least a part of a region where the first guide route is formed overlaps with the second region in the game region It is also possible to use “machine”.

Feature C4. The guide unit forms a first guide route (first guide route GP1) for guiding a game ball to the first ball entering unit by entering the first guide state, and enters the second guide state. A second guide route (second guide route GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entrance part is formed, and the flow direction is changed by receiving the game ball flowing down the game area. And
In the gaming area, when at least a part of the area where the first guide path is formed forms the second guide path, the guide means is the second displacement area,
In the game area, at least a part of an area where the second guide path is formed is the first displacement area where the guide means is displaced when the first guide path is formed. A gaming machine according to Feature C1.

  It is difficult or impossible to dispose other game parts on the guide route of the game ball. Therefore, by adopting a configuration in which the overlapping portion is located in this region, that is, a configuration in which both the first displacement region and the second displacement region use the formation region of the first guide route and the formation region of the second guide route, A displacement area can be suitably secured. If such a coexistence relationship is constructed, even if the overall length of the first guide route and the second guide route is increased to increase the width of the game ball, the ball entry device becomes enlarged due to this. This can be suitably suppressed.

Feature C5. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (second entrance part 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
A first guide position (for example, the first guide section 400L) that is displaceable to a first guide position that guides the game ball to the first entrance section in the game area and a first non-guide position that does not perform the guide;
A second guide position (for example, a second guide portion 410L) that is displaceable to a second guide position that guides the game ball to the second entrance portion and a second non-guide position that does not perform the guide in the game area; ,
The first guide part and the second guide part have a first operation region through which the first guide part passes when the first guide part is displaced from the first non-guide position to the first guide position; When the second guide portion is displaced from the second non-guide position to the second guide position, the second guide region is configured to partially overlap with the second operation region through which the second guide portion passes. To play.

  It is preferable to use a plurality of variable pitching devices in order to realize diversification of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game. However, in such a configuration, there is a concern that the area occupied by the pitching device is bulky and restrictions on the placement of the pitching device become strong. This is not preferable for coexistence with other gaming parts in the gaming area.

  Here, in the configuration in which the guide portion is displaced between the guide position and the non-guide position, the operation area of the guide portion becomes a dead space where it is impossible or difficult to arrange other game parts. It is not preferable that such a dead space increases in the game area. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the guide portions are arranged so as to partially overlap the first motion region of the first guide portion and the second motion region of the second guide portion, it is variable. Even when a plurality of ball-type intrusion devices are used in combination, it is possible to suitably suppress the dead space from being unnecessarily increased.

Feature C6. The first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are arranged such that entrance portions (inlet portions 332 and 342) face each other,
In the feature C5, the first guide part and the second guide part are disposed in a predetermined area (specific area SE) between the first entrance part and the second entrance part. The gaming machine described.

  In the configuration in which the two ball entering portions are arranged so that the entrance portions face each other, the first operation region and the second operation region are provided by disposing each guide portion between the ball entering portions. The amount of duplication can be increased. Thereby, the effect shown to the characteristic C5 can be exhibited more suitably.

  Feature C7. The gaming machine according to Feature C6, wherein an overlapping portion of the first movement area and the second movement area is located between the first and second balls.

  As shown in the feature C6, in the configuration in which the entrance portions of both the entrance portions are opposed to each other, a game ball enters each entrance portion through the entrance portions. As described above, it is difficult or impossible to place other game parts in the region through which the game ball passes. Therefore, as the configuration in which the overlapping portion is located in this region, that is, the first motion region and the second motion region are overlapped between the first ball entering portion and the second ball throwing portion, each region between them is each By making it the structure which serves as the operation area | region of a guide part, and the introduction area | region of a game ball, the enlargement of a pitching apparatus can be suppressed suitably.

Feature C8. The first guide part is disposed at the first guide position to form a first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry part, and flows down the game area. Receiving a game ball to change the flow direction of the game ball so as to be on the first entrance part side,
The second guide part is disposed at the second guide position to form a second guide path (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry part, and flows down the game area. Receiving a game ball to change the flow direction of the game ball so as to be on the second entrance part side,
The first operation area is configured to partially overlap the area where the second guide passage is formed in the predetermined area.
The gaming machine according to Feature C6 or Feature C7, wherein the second operation region is configured to partially overlap with a region where the first guide passage is formed in the predetermined region.

  In the area where the guide passage is formed, it is difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts. Therefore, if this region is used as the operation region of the other guide portion, even if the overall length of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is increased to increase the receiving width of the game ball, It can suppress suitably that a ball entrance apparatus enlarges due to it.

  Feature C9. When switching to one of the first guide state in which the first guide portion is disposed at the first guide position and the second guide state in which the second guide portion is disposed at the second guide position, the other is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C8, wherein the gaming machine is configured such that the switching to is impossible.

  By avoiding the simultaneous occurrence of the respective guide states as shown in this feature, it is possible to preferably realize the overlap of the displacement areas.

Feature C10. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (second entrance part 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
A first guide position (for example, the first guide section 400L) that is displaceable to a first guide position that guides the game ball to the first entrance section in the game area and a first non-guide position that does not perform the guide;
A second guide position (for example, a second guide portion 410L) that is displaceable to a second guide position that guides the game ball to the second entrance portion and a second non-guide position that does not perform the guide in the game area; ,
The first guide part is disposed at the first guide position to form a first guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry part, and flows down the game area. Receiving a game ball to change the flow direction of the game ball so as to be on the first entrance part side,
The second guide part is disposed at the second guide position to form a second guide path (second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second ball entry part, and flows down the game area. Receiving a game ball to change the flow direction of the game ball so as to be on the second entrance part side,
When the first guide portion is displaced from the first non-guide position to the first guide position, the first operation region through which the first guide portion passes is partially the region where the second guide passage is formed. Are overlapping configurations,
When the second guide portion is displaced from the second non-guide position to the second guide position, the second operation region through which the second guide portion passes is partially the region where the first guide passage is formed. The gaming machine according to any one of features C5 to C7, which has an overlapping configuration.

  In the area where the guide passage is formed, it is difficult or impossible to arrange other game parts. Therefore, if this region is used as the operation region of the other guide portion, even if the overall length of the first guide passage and the second guide passage is increased to increase the receiving width of the game ball, It can suppress suitably that a ball entrance apparatus enlarges due to it.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristics A group-B group to the characteristics C1-characteristic C10.

<Feature D group>
The following feature group D is “a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it has been made in view of the background and problems such as “the gaming machine of the type described above has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”.

Feature D1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
An entry part (for example, entry part 331) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
A guide means (for example, guide portions 400L and 410L, movable bodies 430N and 440N) that can be switched between a guide state for guiding the game ball flowing down the game area to the entrance portion and a non-guide state that does not guide the game ball,
The guide means includes a first movable part (for example, an upper left movable plate 401L, an upper right movable plate 411L, a first movable body 430N) and a second movable part (for example, a lower right movable plate) that are respectively movable between a standby position and a passage forming position. 402L, lower left movable plate 412L, second movable body 440N),
In the guide state, the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged at the passage formation positions, respectively, so that a series of guide passages (guide routes GP1, GP2) for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion. Is formed so as to straddle the first movable part and the second movable part.

  For gaming machines of the type that have a variable pitching device that changes the probability of pitching into the pitching section by the guide means, the game is monotonized by strengthening the sharpness of the guided state / non-guided state. Can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the pitching device, it is preferable that the target range when the guidance state is entered is wide. However, when the size of the guide means is simply increased, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (operation stability) are likely to occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first movable portion and the second movable portion are used in combination and a series of guide passages are formed by arranging these movable portions at the passage formation position, For the movable part, an increase in size can be avoided. Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of a player's attention degree, the occurrence of the inconvenience resulting from it can be suppressed.

Feature D2. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
An entrance part (for example, entrance part 331, 341) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
Guiding means (for example, a guiding unit 400L) that can be switched between a guiding state for guiding a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path (for example, the specific region SE, the passage portion 420L) in the gaming area to the entering ball portion and a non-guiding state for not guiding. 410L, movable body 430N, 440N),
The guide means is arranged so as to sandwich the predetermined flow path, and is movable to a standby position and a passage formation position (for example, an upper left movable plate 401L, an upper right movable plate 411L, and a first movable body 430N). And a second movable part (for example, the lower right movable plate 402L, the lower left movable plate 412L, the second movable body 440N),
In a state where the first movable part and the second movable part are arranged at the passage forming position, the game ball that flows down the predetermined flow path is received and the flow direction of the game ball is directed to the ball entry part. Is to change
In the guiding state, by arranging the first movable part and the second movable part at the passage forming position, a series of guiding the game ball to the entrance part across the predetermined flow path. A gaming machine, wherein a guide passage (guide routes GP1, GP2) is formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

  For gaming machines of the type that have a variable pitching device that changes the probability of pitching into the pitching section by the guide means, the game is monotonized by strengthening the sharpness of the guided state / non-guided state. Can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the pitching device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guidance state is wide. However, when the guide means is simply enlarged to increase the receiving width, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (operation stability) are likely to occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first movable portion and the second movable portion are used together and a series of guide passages are formed by arranging these movable portions at the passage formation position, the target range It is possible to avoid an increase in the size of each movable part while increasing (the width of the game ball). Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of a player's attention degree, the occurrence of the inconvenience resulting from it can be suppressed.

  Feature D3. The movement of the first movable part from the standby position to the passage formation position is synchronized with the movement of the second movable part from the standby position to the passage formation position. A gaming machine according to Feature D2.

  If it is set as the structure which synchronizes the motion of each movable part as shown to this characteristic, it can contribute to the improvement of the responsiveness at the time of forming a series of guide paths by a several movable part.

Feature D4. The first movable portion is disposed at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion in the guide passage, and the second movable portion is disposed at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion in the guide passage. It is configured to
When the guide passage is formed, the first movable portion is disposed at the passage formation position after the second movable portion is disposed at the passage formation position. The gaming machine described.

  Whether or not the game ball enters the entrance portion depends on the first movable portion that forms the downstream portion. In other words, even if the game ball moves along the second movable part arranged at the passage formation position, if the first movable part is not arranged at the passage formation position, the guidance to the ball entry part is performed well. Absent. In such a configuration, the degree of attention to the movement of the first movable part is favorable by adopting a structure in which the movement of the first movable part to the passage formation position is delayed from the arrangement of the second movable part to the passage formation position. Can be improved.

  In addition, when the 2nd movable part forms the upstream part of a guide channel, a certain amount of time lag arises before the game ball which reached the said 2nd movable part reaches | attains the 1st movable part. Therefore, by delaying the movement of the first movable part to the passage formation position, it is possible to generate a branch as to whether or not the game ball that has passed through the second movable part moves to the first movable part.

Feature D5. The guide passage is an inclined passage that goes down to the entrance portion (for example, the entrance portions 332 and 342) of the entrance portion,
The first movable portion is disposed at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion in the guide passage, and the second movable portion is disposed at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion in the guide passage. It is configured to
The game according to any one of features D1 to D4, wherein an end on the downstream side of the second movable portion is shifted upward from an extension of the first movable portion toward the upstream side. Machine.

  As shown in the feature D1 and the like, when a series of passages is formed by a combination of a plurality of movable parts, a step is generated in the passages due to a shift in the relative positions of the movable parts. It is assumed that the game ball being caught by this step is a factor that hinders the smooth flow of the game ball. As shown in this feature, if the downstream end portion of the second movable portion forming the upstream portion is shifted upward from the extension of the first movable portion, the game is moved from the second movable portion to the first movable portion. The catch when the sphere moves can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature D6. The gaming machine according to Feature D5, wherein a gap is formed between an upstream end portion of the first movable portion and a downstream end portion of the second movable portion.

  In order to expand the guide passage (the receiving width of the game ball), the first movable portion and the second movable portion may be enlarged. However, when such measures are taken, various inconveniences such as slow movement of the movable part occur. Therefore, as shown in feature D5, if a step is provided at the boundary between the two movable bodies, and a gap is formed at the boundary, the guide path (the width of the game ball) is expanded while each movable body is expanded. An increase in size can be suitably avoided.

  In order to secure the function as a guide passage, the gap is preferably smaller than the diameter of the game ball so that the game ball cannot pass therethrough.

  Feature D7. In the guide passage, the passage length of the portion formed by the first movable portion and the passage length of the portion formed by the second movable portion are configured to be equally divided. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D6.

  When a series of guide passages are formed by a plurality of movable parts, the responsiveness depends on the movable part that moves slower. Here, as shown in this feature, according to the configuration in which the passage lengths are made uniform for the respective movable parts, it is possible to suitably suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience due to the difference in size.

Feature D8. The guide passage is an inclined passage that goes down to an entrance portion (for example, the entrance portions 332 and 342) of the entrance portion,
The first movable portion is disposed at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion in the guide passage, and the second movable portion is disposed at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion in the guide passage. It is configured to
The first movable part is arranged at the passage forming position and the standby position by rotating with the downstream end of the downstream part as a base end, and the second movable part is arranged at the upstream side. According to any one of the features D1 to D7, wherein the portion is arranged at the passage formation position and the standby position by rotating with the upstream end of the portion as a base end. Game machines.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the impact when the guide passage is formed can be strengthened by forming the guide passage by rotating the movable parts toward each other. Thereby, not only the entrance to the entrance part but also the effect by the visual change (movement of the movable part) immediately before the entrance of the entrance can be suitably exhibited.

  In particular, when a movable part is provided in the game area, the presence of the movable part can be a factor that restricts the flow path. Here, if it is set as the structure which a movable body rotates to the side which mutually approaches, and forms a guide path, the area | region between these movable parts will be used as the flow path of game balls in the condition which has not formed the guide path. It can be suitably used.

Feature D9. The guide means is configured to guide a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path in the game area (for example, the passage part 420L in the specific area SE) to the entrance part,
The first movable portion and the second movable portion constitute a passage wall surface of the predetermined flow path in a state where the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged at the standby position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

  When the movable part is disposed at the standby position, a passage wall surface of a predetermined flow path is formed by the movable part. Thus, if it is set as the structure which comprises a channel | path wall surface by a movable part, even when it is a case where a some movable part is attached to a game area | region, coexistence with other game components can be implement | achieved suitably.

  Feature D10. The first movable portion and the second movable portion constitute a passage wall surface of a ball passage through which the game balls pass in opposition to each other when the first movable portion and the second movable portion are arranged at the standby position. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, wherein:

  When the movable part is disposed at the standby position, the movable wall faces each other to form a passage wall surface of the spherical passage. Thus, if it is set as the structure which comprises a channel | path wall surface by a movable part, even when it is a case where a some movable part is attached to a game area | region, coexistence with other game components can be implement | achieved suitably.

Feature D11. The guide passage is an inclined passage that goes down to the entrance portion (for example, the entrance portions 332 and 342) of the entrance portion,
The first movable portion is disposed at the passage forming position to form a downstream portion in the guide passage, and the second movable portion is disposed at the passage forming position to form an upstream portion in the guide passage. It is configured to
The first movable part functions as a restricting part that restricts the entry into the entry part in a state where the first movable part is disposed at the standby position. Gaming machine.

  As shown in this feature, if one of the two movable portions that forms the downstream portion of the guide passage is used as a restricting portion (shutter), the entrance portion in a situation where the guide passage is not formed It is possible to prevent the structure from becoming excessively complicated in avoiding entering the ball.

Feature D12. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entry part (for example, entry part 331) and a second entry part (for example, entry part 341) provided in the game area and into which a game ball enters;
Guiding means (for example, movable bodies 430N and 440N) that can be switched between a guiding state for guiding a game ball flowing down a predetermined flow path (for example, the specific region SE) in the gaming area to the entrance portion and a non-guiding state for not guiding. With
The guiding means includes
A first restriction position that covers the entrance portion (entrance portion 332) of the first entrance portion and restricts entry into the first entrance portion, and a first inclination that is inclined downward toward the first entrance portion. A first movable part (for example, a first movable body 430N) that is movable to a position and a second inclined position that is inclined downward toward the second entrance part;
A second restricting position that covers the entrance portion (entrance portion 342) of the second entrance portion and restricts entry into the second entrance portion, and a third inclination that is inclined downward toward the first entrance portion. A second movable part (for example, a second movable body 440N) that is movable to a position and a fourth inclined position that is inclined downward toward the second entrance part,
The first movable part is arranged at the first inclined position and the second movable part is arranged at the third inclined position, so that the first moving part crosses the predetermined flow path to the first ball entry part. A series of first guide passages (first guide paths GP1) for guiding the game balls are formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion,
The second movable part is arranged at the second inclined position and the second movable part is arranged at the fourth inclined position, so that the second moving part crosses the predetermined flow path to the second ball entering part. A gaming machine, wherein a series of second guide paths (second guide paths GP2) for guiding game balls are formed so as to straddle the first movable portion and the second movable portion.

  For gaming machines of the type that have a variable pitching device that changes the probability of pitching into the pitching section by the guide means, the game is monotonized by strengthening the sharpness of the guided state / non-guided state. Can be suppressed. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the pitching device, it is preferable that the target range (the receiving width of the game ball) in the guidance state is wide. However, when the guide means is simply enlarged to increase the receiving width, various inconveniences such as a decrease in responsiveness and a decrease in durability (operation stability) are likely to occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the first movable portion and the second movable portion are used together and a series of guide passages are formed by arranging these movable portions at the passage formation position, the target range It is possible to avoid an increase in the size of each movable part while increasing (the width of the game ball). Thereby, while aiming at the improvement of a player's attention degree, the occurrence of the inconvenience resulting from it can be suppressed.

  In particular, the first guide passage and the second guide passage are formed by using a first movable portion that functions as a shutter for the first entrance portion and a second movable portion that functions as a shutter for the second entrance portion. If it is set as the structure to do, complication of the structure resulting from it can be suppressed suitably, enlarging the magnitude | size of a guidance channel | path (ball receiving part).

Feature D13. In the state where the first guide passage is formed, the first movable portion and the second movable portion are restricted from entering the second entrance portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature D12, wherein in the state in which the second guide passage is formed, the first movable portion and the second movable portion restrict entry to the first entry portion. .

  As shown in the feature D12, the configuration in which each movable portion serves as both the shutter and the passage forming portion increases the size of the guide passage (ball receiving portion) and suppresses the complexity of the configuration resulting therefrom. Above is advantageous. However, for example, when the first guide passage is formed, if the second movable portion is disposed at the third inclined position, the second entrance portion is opened, and entry into the second entrance portion is restricted. It becomes loose. Further, when the second guide passage is formed, if the first movable portion is disposed at the second inclined position, the first entrance portion is opened, and the entrance restriction to the first entrance portion becomes loose. Become. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the first guide passage is formed, the first movable portion and the second movable portion restrict the entrance to the second entrance portion, and when the second guide passage is formed, the first movable portion. And the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration in which the second movable portion restricts the entrance to the first entrance portion and a configuration in which the movable portions make up for a decrease in the regulation function.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristics A group-C group to the characteristics D1-characteristic D12.

<Feature E group>
The following group E is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it has been made in view of the background, problems and the like that “the gaming machine of the above-mentioned type has room for improvement in realizing the diversification of games”.

Feature E1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (for example, a first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (for example, a second entrance part 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
A first guide position (for example, first movable bodies 350F and 350G) that can move to a first guide position that guides the game ball to the first entrance section and a first non-guide position that does not perform the guide;
A second guide position (for example, second movable bodies 360F, 360G) that can move to a second guide position that guides the game ball to the second entrance section and a second non-guide position that does not perform the guide;
When the first guide portion is arranged at the first guide position, a first guide passage (for example, a first guide route GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entering portion is formed together with the first guide portion. When the second guide portion is disposed at the second guide position, the second guide passage guides the game ball to the second entrance portion together with the second guide portion (for example, the second guide route GP2). A gaming machine comprising a passage forming portion (for example, cores 390F and 390G) that forms a slab.

  In a game machine of a type provided with a variable pitching device that changes the pitching probability to the pitching part, monotonous gaming can be suppressed by enhancing the sharpness at the time of guidance / non-guidance. Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the pitching device, it is preferable that the target range at the time of guidance (the receiving width of the game ball) is wide. However, if the guide portion is simply enlarged to increase the receiving width, the occupied area of the ball entry device is increased. That is, when the guide passage is lengthened to increase the number of game balls to be guided, the occupied area of the guide portion increases. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that a part of the other guide passage is formed by using a passage forming part that forms a part of one of the guide passages, the above-described inconvenience can be suitably suppressed. it can. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of a pitching apparatus.

Feature E2. The passage forming portion protrudes from the front surface of the game board to the front of the game area in a state where at least the first guide passage and the second guide passage are formed.
The first guide portion is configured to be arranged at the first guide position and the first non-guide position by moving in the thickness direction of the game board,
The game according to Feature E1, wherein the second guide portion is arranged at the second guide position and the second non-guide position by moving in the thickness direction of the game board. Machine.

  When each guide passage is formed by each guide portion and the passage formation portion, a difference occurs between the guide portion and the passage formation portion, thereby causing a step in the guide passage. Such a step can be a factor that hinders a smooth flow, such as a game ball being caught. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the moving direction of each guide portion is configured to match the protruding direction of the passage forming portion, the above-described inconvenience due to the displacement of the guide portion can be suppressed.

  Further, when a game ball is sandwiched between the guide portion and the passage formation portion, deformation such as distortion may occur in the passage formation portion. In this regard, by devising the operation direction of each guide unit as shown in this feature, when the guide unit moves from the non-guide position to the guide position, a game ball is sandwiched between the guide unit and the passage forming unit. Can be avoided. By thus protecting the passage forming portion, it is possible to contribute to the smooth flow of the game ball in the guide passage.

  Feature E3. A first insertion portion (for example, notches 353F and 353G) through which the passage formation portion is inserted is formed in the first guide portion, and the passage formation portion is inserted into the second guide portion. The gaming machine according to Feature E1 or Feature E2, wherein a second insertion portion (for example, recesses 363F and 363G) is formed.

  As shown in this feature, by providing insertion portions for passage forming portions in the respective guide portions and having the passage formation portions inserted through these insertion portions, it is possible to contribute to space saving of the entire guide passage.

  Feature E4. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3, wherein the first guide portion and the second guide portion intersect at a place where the passage forming portion is disposed.

  As shown in this feature, if the guide portions intersect at the location where the flow path forming portion is arranged, the total length of each guide passage (the width of the game ball) while saving the space of the entire guide passage Can be increased.

Feature E5. The first guide part and the second guide part have a flat plate shape,
In a state where the first guide portion is disposed at the first guide position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 351F) of the first guide portion is inclined downward to the first entrance portion,
In the state where the second guide portion is disposed at the second guide position, the upper plate surface (for example, the upper surface 361F) of the second guide portion is inclined downward to the second entrance portion,
The passage forming part is
A first inclined portion (for example, a first inclined portion 391F) that constitutes a rolling surface of a game ball in the first guide passage together with an upper plate surface in the first guide portion;
It has the 2nd inclination part (for example, 2nd inclination part 392F) which constitutes the rolling surface of the game ball in the 2nd guide passage with the upper plate surface in the 2nd guide part, It is characterized by the above-mentioned. The gaming machine according to any one of E1 to E4.

  According to the feature E5, the first inclined portion is provided in accordance with the first guide portion, and the second inclined portion is provided in accordance with the second guide portion, so that the restriction on the direction of the guide passage and the like can be preferably alleviated.

Feature E6. The first guide portion has a first housing portion (for example, a notch 353F) that houses the second inclined portion in a state where the first guide portion is disposed at the first guide position.
The second guide portion has a second storage portion (for example, a recess portion 363F) that stores the first inclined portion in a state where the second guide portion is disposed at the second guide position. The gaming machine according to Feature E5, wherein

  According to the feature E6, the unnecessary portion (inclined portion) in the passage forming portion is accommodated in the accommodating portion of the guide portion. Thereby, it can suppress suitably that the behavior of a game ball is disturb | confused by the game ball being caught by the part which becomes unnecessary.

  In the combination with the feature E3, the “insertion portion” shown in the feature E3 may be the same as the “accommodating portion” shown in this feature.

  Feature E7. The passage forming portion is movable to a protruding position that protrudes into the game area and a retracted position in which the protrusion is suppressed, and when neither the first guide passage nor the second guide passage is formed. The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E6, wherein the gaming machine is configured to stand by at the retracted position.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the guide passage is not formed, the protrusion of the passage formation portion to the game area is suppressed. Thereby, the chance that the game ball flowing down the game area collides with the passage forming portion can be reduced. In this way, by protecting the passage forming portion, when the guide passage is formed by the passage forming portion and the guide portion, the relative positions of both of them vary, and the guidance of the game ball is not performed smoothly. Can be suppressed.

  Feature E8. When the first guide portion moves to the first guide position, the passage forming portion follows the first guide portion and moves to the protruding position, and the second guide portion moves to the second guide position. The gaming machine according to feature E7, wherein the gaming machine is configured to follow the second guide portion and move to the protruding position when moving to.

  When the path forming portion is retractable as shown in the feature E7, the configuration is such that the path forming portion moves to the protruding position following the movement of each guide portion to the guide position. Deviations in formation timing can be suppressed.

Feature E9. The moving direction of the first guide part and the second guide part is the same as the moving direction of the passage forming part,
The first guide part is provided with a first action part (for example, an arm part 355G) that moves the passage forming part to the protruding position when the first guide part moves to the first guide position. ,
The second guide part is provided with a second action part (for example, an arm part 365G) that moves the passage forming part to the protruding position when the second guide part moves to the second guide position. The gaming machine according to Feature E7 or E8.

  Various effects such as protection of the passage forming portion can be expected if the passage forming portion is of a retractable type as shown in the feature E7 and the like. However, the need for a separate drive unit for driving the passage forming unit is an obstacle to simplifying and downsizing the configuration of the ball entry device. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the movement direction of each guide part and the passage forming part is unified, and the passage forming part is pushed to the protruding position by the action part provided in each guide part. There is no need to add a drive unit. Thereby, the excessive complication of the structure which concerns on a pitching device can be suppressed, and it can contribute to size reduction of a pitching device.

  Feature E10. When the first guide portion is moved from one of the state where the first guide portion is disposed at the first guide position and the state where the second guide portion is disposed at the second guide position to the other, it is disposed at the protruding position. The game machine according to any one of features E7 to E9, wherein the passage forming portion is transferred from one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion to the other at the protruding position. .

  In view of the fact that the passage forming portion moves so as to block the flow path of the game ball, there is a possibility that the game ball is caught when it is arranged at the protruding position. Therefore, when switching from the state in which the guide passage is configured with one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion to the state in which the guide passage is configured with the other, the return of the passage formation portion to the retracted position is avoided. Such a problem can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration (for example, retaining at the protruding position).

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “when the first guide portion is placed at the first guide position and the second guide portion is placed at the second guide position from one to the other. The gaming machine according to any one of features E7 to E9, wherein the movement of the passage forming portion arranged at the protruding position to the retracted position is avoided. Is also possible.

Feature E11. The first and second balls are arranged side by side and the entrance portions (entrance portions 332 and 342) are opposed to each other,
The features E7 to E7, wherein the first guide passage and the second guide passage are formed in a region (specific region SE) sandwiched between the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features E10.

  As shown in the present feature, if the guide passages are formed in the regions sandwiched by the entrance portions after the entrance portions are arranged so as to face each other, downsizing of the entrance device can be promoted. In such a configuration, when the passage forming portion is shared by both guide passages, the following inconvenience occurs if the passage forming portion remains in the region when the guide passage is not formed. In other words, there is a possibility that the game ball passing through the area will rebound to the passage forming part and head for the entrance part. In this regard, if the passage forming portion is made to be retractable as shown in the feature E7, etc., such a movement of the game ball can be suitably avoided, and the game ball is not guided to the entrance portion. It can suppress suitably that the entrance to the entrance part occurs.

  Feature E12. The passage forming portion is formed with an engaging portion that engages with at least one of the first guide portion and the second guide portion on the front side of the game board. The gaming machine according to any one of E11.

  In a configuration in which a gaming component projects to the front side of the gaming board, it is difficult to improve the strength of the gaming component because it is cantilevered. Then, if it is set as the structure which mutually supplements an intensity | strength by engaging a channel | path formation part and a guide part, such a lack of intensity | strength can be eliminated suitably.

  For example, when the passage forming portion is smaller than the guide portion, the guide forming portion supports (reinforces) the passage forming portion, and when the passage forming portion is a fixed type and has a sufficient margin in strength, It is preferable that the guide portion is supported (reinforced) by the passage forming portion.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristics A group-D group to the characteristics E1-characteristic E12.

<Feature F group>
The following feature F group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems such as “the gaming machine of the above-mentioned type still has room for improvement in the diversification of games by the variable pitching means”. Is.

Feature F1. A gaming machine that includes a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and is provided with a ball entry means (for example, a variable prize unit 83R) that allows a game ball to enter the game area. There,
The entrance means is
A first incoming part (first incoming part 331) and a second incoming part (second incoming part 341) into which game balls enter;
A first movable body (for example, a first movable body) that can move to a first guide position (protruding position) capable of guiding a game ball to the first entrance portion and a first non-guide position (retracted position) where guidance is not performed. 350, 350H, first guide 400L),
A second movable body (for example, a second movable body) movable to a second guide position (protruding position) capable of guiding the game ball to the second entrance portion and a second non-guide position (retracted position) where the guidance is not performed. 360, 360H, second guide portion 410L),
A first state in which the first movable body is disposed at the first guide position and the second movable body is disposed at the second non-guide position; and the first movable body is disposed at the first non-guide position. And the second state in which the second movable body is disposed at the second guide position, the first movable body is disposed at the first guide position, and the second movable body is disposed at the second guide position. Switching means (MPU of the main controller 162) for switching to the third state,
In the third state, the first movable body and the second movable body form a stage portion (stage ST) on which a game ball can be stopped.

  For example, in a configuration in which guidance / non-guidance by the movable body is repeatedly switched, the player can suppress useless investment by devising a launch operation so that the game ball does not reach the movable body during non-guidance. When such technical intervention is allowed, a difference according to the skill of the player is generated in the benefits obtained. This can be an obstacle to improving the fairness of the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the stage portion in which the game ball can be stopped is formed by the movable bodies by being in the third state in which both movable bodies are arranged at the guide positions. For this reason, the game ball that has reached the movable body in the third state is not immediately discharged, but a certain degree of delay occurs before the discharge. Thereby, when the game ball whose discharge has been delayed is switched again to the first state or the second state, an opportunity to enter the first entrance part or the second entrance part can be provided. In this way, if it is configured such that an opportunity to enter the entrance part is given, useless investment can be suppressed even if the operation of launching a game ball is not anticipated in anticipation of non-guidance. Thereby, the problem concerning the fairness can be preferably solved. The first movable body that functions as a guide portion for the first incoming ball portion and the second movable body that functions as a guide portion for the second incoming ball portion are used together to form a stage portion, so that the configuration is complicated. The above effects can be exhibited while suppressing the formation.

  Note that the “stage part” can also be referred to as a “stop part” if attention is paid to the fact that the “stage part” shown in this feature is configured to be able to stop the game ball.

  Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is “a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game entry means (for example, a variable prize unit 83R) that allows game balls to enter the game area. ), And the entrance means includes a first entrance portion (first entrance portion 331) and a second entrance portion (second entrance portion 341) into which game balls enter. ), And a first movable body (for example, a first movable body) movable to a first guide position (protruding position) capable of guiding a game ball to the first entrance portion and a first non-guide position (retracted position) where the guidance is not performed. 1 movable body 350, 350H, 1st guide part 400L), 2nd guide position (protrusion position) which can guide a game ball to said 2nd entrance part, and 2nd non-guide position (retraction position) which does not perform said guidance ) Movable to the second movable body (for example, the second movable body 360, 360H, the second guide portion 410). A first state in which the first movable body is disposed at the first guide position and the second movable body is disposed at the second non-guide position, and the first movable body is the first A second state in which the first movable body is disposed in the first guiding position, and the second movable body is disposed in the first guiding position; Switching means (MPU of the main controller 162) for switching to the third state arranged at the second guide position is provided, and in the third state, the game ball is rotated by the first movable body and the second movable body. A gaming machine characterized in that a movable stage portion (stage ST) is formed. "

  Feature F2. The gaming machine according to F1, wherein the stage portion is formed so as to straddle the first movable body and the second movable body.

  If the stage portion is formed so as to straddle both movable bodies as shown in the feature F2, it is possible to increase the number of game balls that can be stopped on the stage portion while suppressing an increase in the size of the ball entry means. .

Feature F3. The switching means has means for switching from the third state to either the first state or the second state,
The first movable body can guide the game ball that has flowed out of the stage portion by switching to the first state to the first entrance portion, and the second movable body is moved to the second state. The gaming machine according to Feature F1 or Feature F2, wherein the game ball that has flowed out of the stage portion by switching the position can be guided to the second incoming ball portion.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball stopped on the stage unit in the third state is guided to the first entrance unit or the second entrance unit by switching to the first state or the second state. . Thereby, it is possible to suitably give a chance to enter the first and second entrance parts to the game balls being stopped, and to effectively exhibit the effect shown in the feature F1.

Feature F4. The switching means includes means for switching to the third state by moving the second movable body from the first state to the second guide position, and switching the first movable body from the second state to the third state. Means for switching to the third state by moving to the first guide position,
The gaming machine according to F3, wherein the stage unit is configured to be maintained until switching to either the first state or the second state.

  According to the combination of the feature F3 and the feature F4, the first state / second state → the third state → the first state / second state can be obtained. At this time, the stage portion formed by switching to the third state is maintained until the next switching to the first state / second state. For this reason, for example, a stage portion is formed when the guidance of a game ball to the first and second entrance portions is finished, and if it is originally entered into the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. A game ball that should not have been given a ball opportunity can be temporarily held at the stop, and then can be switched to the first state / second state. According to this configuration, it is possible to give a chance to enter the ball by actively using the stage portion, and the effects shown in the feature F1 can be more suitably exhibited.

  Note that the configuration in which the two movable bodies are not moved to the guide position at the same time but the other movable body is arranged at the guide position in a state where the one movable body is arranged at the guide position is This is advantageous in suppressing the occurrence of clogging of balls during formation.

Feature F5. When the first movable body is switched from the third state to the first state, the first movable body receives the game ball that has stopped in the portion formed by the second movable body in the stage portion. It is possible to guide to the sphere,
When the second movable body is switched from the third state to the second state, the second ball enters the game ball that is stopped at the portion of the stage portion that is configured by the first movable body. The gaming machine according to Feature F3 or Feature F4, wherein the game machine can be guided to a part.

  When the stage portion is formed by combining the first movable body and the second movable body, the game ball that is parked on the first movable body at the stage portion is given an opportunity to enter the second incoming portion. By giving the game ball stopped on the second movable body at the stage portion an opportunity to enter the first entrance portion, the spilling of the game ball is more preferably suppressed. In this way, smoothing of the progress of the game can be favorably promoted by imparting fluidity to the guidance destination of the game ball being stopped.

  Feature F6. The stage unit includes a guide path of game balls (first guide path GP1) to the first entrance part by the first movable body and a guide path of game balls to the second entrance part by the second movable body. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F5, which is formed over (second guide route GP2).

  If the stage portion is formed over two guide paths, the presence of the stage portion can prevent the player from paying attention to a wide area. This is a preferable configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game ball being stopped.

  Feature F7. The stage unit is capable of moving the game ball from the first movable body side to the second movable body side and moving the game ball from the second movable body side to the first movable body side. The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F6.

  According to the feature F7, it is possible to suppress the movement of the game ball reaching the stage unit from becoming monotonous.

  Feature F8. When switching from the third state to the first state, the game ball that has been stopped on the second movable body moves to the first movable body, and when switching from the third state to the second state, The gaming machine according to any one of features F3 to F7, wherein the game ball that has stopped on the first movable body is configured to move onto the second movable body.

  According to the feature F8, when the stop by the stage unit is released, the game ball placed on the movable body that does not perform the guidance this time can move to the movable body that performs the current guidance. You can earn more and increase the chances that multiple game balls are guided to the entrance club all at once.

  Feature F9. The switching means includes means for alternately switching between the first state and the second state with the third state interposed therebetween, according to any one of features F3 to F8. Game machines.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, a game ball that has not entered one of the entrance parts is guided to the other entrance part after stopping. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the movement of the game ball from becoming monotonous and to contribute to an improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature F10. The first entrance part and the second entrance part are arranged side by side so as to be side by side,
The stage portion is formed at a position between the first and second entrance portions in the juxtaposed direction of the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. A first inclined portion that descends from the sphere portion side to the second incoming ball portion side and a second inclined portion that descends from the second incoming ball portion side to the second incoming ball portion side, the first inclined portion and The boundary part of the second inclined part is configured to be the bottom part of the stage part,
The game according to any one of features F1 to F9, wherein the first inclined portion is configured by the first movable body, and the second inclined portion is configured by the second movable body. Machine.

  If it is set as the structure shown to this characteristic, the game ball which reached | attained the stage part will move to a bottom part, and will be stopped in the state contact | abutted to the 1st inclination part and the 2nd inclination part. Thereby, the movement start of the game ball at the time of canceling | releasing a stop can be made smooth.

Feature F11. A game ball that is disposed in front of or behind the stage unit and is stopped on the stage unit flows out of the stage unit without entering any of the first and second ball entering units. An outflow passage (connection passage 317)
The upper surface (upper surface 351) of the first movable body and the upper surface (upper surface 361) of the second movable body are formed with guide portions for guiding game balls to the inlet portion side of the outflow passage. The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F10.

  Excessive game balls stopped at the stage portion can be a factor that hinders the smooth flow of game balls around the entrance means. In addition, if an excessive number of game balls are to be stopped, the game balls are guided all at once to each of the pitching portions, so that excessive pitches (so-called over winnings) are generated. Then, if it is set as the structure which flows out a game ball from a stop part suitably by the outflow path shown to this characteristic, generation | occurrence | production of the said problem can be suppressed suitably.

Feature F12. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
An entrance part (for example, entrance part 331) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
A first position having a rolling surface (for example, an upper surface 351) on which the game ball can roll, and forming a guide passage (for example, a first guide route GP1) for guiding the game ball to the entrance portion by the rolling surface. And a movable body (for example, movable body 350) movable to a second position that forms a detour path (for example, detour path TE1) that detours the ball-entry portion by the rolling surface,
When the movable body is disposed at the first position, the period required for the game ball to pass through the guide passage is such that the game ball is detoured when the movable body is disposed at the second position. A gaming machine configured to be longer than a period required to pass through a passage.

  According to the feature F12, when the guide passage is formed, the ball quickly moves to the ball entry portion, and when the detour passage is formed, the movement is slow. For this reason, when the movable body moves from the second position to the first position, it is possible to increase the chance that the game ball that has been moving in the detour path heads to enter the ball.

  Feature F13. When the movable body is disposed at the second position, the movement of the game ball is delayed by coming into contact with the game ball moving along the rolling surface, while the movable body is moved to the first position. The gaming machine according to feature F12, further comprising a contact portion that prevents contact with a game ball that moves along the rolling surface.

  According to the feature F13, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the bypass path is lower than the moving speed of the game ball passing through the guide path. Accordingly, the game ball can be quickly moved to the entrance portion at the time of guidance, while the movement of the game ball can be delayed at the time of detour. Thereby, the effect shown to the characteristic F12 can be exhibited suitably.

Feature F14. By changing the posture of the movable body, it comprises posture changing means for changing the inclination angle of the rolling surface with respect to a horizontal plane,
When the movable body is arranged at the first position, it is configured such that the inclination of the rolling surface with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than when the movable body is arranged at the second position. The gaming machine according to Feature F12 or Feature F13, wherein

  According to the feature F14, the inclination of the rolling surface is increased by moving from the second position to the first position. Thereby, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the rolling surface is increased. Thereby, the period required for the passage of the guide passage is shortened. On the other hand, the inclination of the rolling surface is reduced by moving from the first position to the second position. Thereby, the moving speed of the game ball passing through the rolling surface is reduced, and the period required for passing through the detour path is increased. Thus, if it is set as the structure which changes the attitude | position of a movable body and changes the moving speed of a game ball, the effect shown to the characteristic F12 can be exhibited suitably.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristics A group-E group to the characteristics F1-characteristic F14.

<Feature G group>
The following group G is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it has been made in view of the background, problems and the like that “the gaming machine of the above-mentioned type has room for improvement in realizing the diversification of games”.

Feature G1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first entrance part (first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (second entrance part 341) provided in the game area and into which game balls enter;
A first guide path (first guide path GP1) that is movable within a predetermined range including a first position (protruding position) and guides a game ball to the first ball-entry portion by being arranged at the first position. ) Forming a first movable body (for example, the first movable body 350, 350H, the first guide portion 400L),
A second guide path (second guide path GP2) that is movable within a predetermined range including the second position (projecting position) and guides the game ball to the second ball-entry portion by being arranged at the second position. ) Forming a second movable body (for example, the second movable bodies 360 and 360H, the second guide portion 410L),
In a state where the first movable body is disposed at the first position, the first movable body is prevented from moving the game ball to the second ball entering portion through the second guide path,
In the state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position, the second movable body is prevented from moving the game ball to the first entrance part through the first guide path. To play.

  According to the characteristic G1, when the game ball is to be guided to the first pitching part, the first movable body is arranged at the first position to guide the game ball to the first pitching part. One guide route is formed. At this time, the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering portion is prevented by the first movable body that forms the first guide route. In addition, when it becomes a situation where the game ball should be guided to the second entrance part, the second guide path for guiding the game ball to the second entrance part is provided by arranging the second movable body at the second position. It is formed. At this time, the movement of the game ball toward the first entrance portion is prevented by the second movable body that forms the second guide path. Thereby, it becomes possible to avoid the entrance to the entrance part which is not set as the guidance destination of the game ball, and the accidental entrance can be suitably suppressed.

  The configuration shown in this feature is “a gaming machine having a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, which is provided in the gaming area and into which a gaming ball enters. It is movable within a predetermined range including a first position (a first position 331) and a second position (a second position 341) and a predetermined position (projecting position). A movable body (for example, a first movable body 350, 350H, a guide section 400L) that forms a guide path (first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entrance section by being disposed; In the state where the movable body is arranged at the predetermined position, the game machine is characterized in that the movable body prevents the game ball from moving to the second entrance portion.

Feature G2. The first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are relative to each other with an entrance portion (for example, entrance portions 332 and 342) of the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion separated by a predetermined region (specific region SE). It is arranged to face,
In a state where the first movable body is arranged at the first position, the first movable body is located between the inflow point (inlet OE) where the game ball flows into the predetermined region and the second ball entry portion. Position to,
In a state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position, the second movable body is configured to be positioned between the inflow portion and the inlet portion of the first ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, which is characterized.

  In the case where the entrance parts of the entrance part are opposed to each other, there is a high possibility that entrance into the entrance part that is not the guidance destination will occur. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the game ball is guided to each entrance by the movable body, the movable body blocks the inflow portion to the predetermined area and the entrance portion of the entrance portion that is not the guide destination. By placing the ball, it is possible to suitably avoid a ball entering a ball-entry unit that is not the guidance destination.

Feature G3. In a state where the first movable body is disposed at the first position, the game ball cannot pass between the first movable body and the entrance portion of the second ball-entry portion in the predetermined region. Configured,
In a state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position, the game ball cannot pass between the second movable body and the entrance portion of the first ball entry portion in the predetermined region. The gaming machine according to Feature G2, wherein the gaming machine is configured.

  As shown in this feature, when the movable body is arranged at the guide position (the first position or the second position), a gap generated between the entrance portion and the non-guide destination is made impossible for the game ball to pass. If it comprises, the entrance to the entrance part which is not a guidance destination can be suppressed suitably by the structure which provided the some entrance part together.

Feature G4. Means for arranging the second movable body at the second position under a situation where the first movable body is disposed at the first position;
Any of the characteristics G1 to G3, comprising: means for arranging the first movable body at the first position in a state where the second movable body is disposed at the second position. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  When the second movable body is disposed at the second position under the situation where the first guide path is formed by the first movable body, the game ball moves along the first guide path by the second movable body. Be disturbed. On the other hand, when the first movable body is disposed at the first position in a state where the second guide path is formed by the second movable body, the game balls along the second guide path are moved by the first movable body. Movement is hindered. Thus, since each movable body has a function of forming a flow path and a function of cutting the flow path, the movement at the time of switching the ball entry can be made novel.

Feature G5. Means for detaching the second movable body from the second position after the second movable body is disposed at the second position when the first movable body is disposed at the first position;
Means for detaching the first movable body from the first position after the first movable body is disposed at the first position when the second movable body is disposed at the second position. The gaming machine according to Feature G4, wherein:

  In the case where the first guide path is formed by the first movable body, whether the second movable body is placed / not placed at the second position is switched to allow or not to enter the first entrance portion. Can do. When the second guide path is formed by the second movable body, the first movable body is arranged / not arranged at the first position, thereby determining whether or not the second entrance can be entered. Can be switched. Thus, if it is set as the structure which maintains the once formed flow path, the movement of a game ball can be made novel. In this case, it is possible to reproduce the same movement by separately providing a shutter, but there is a concern that the size of the pitching device will be increased by separately providing a shutter. In this respect, as the other movable body functions as a shutter as shown in this feature, it is possible to improve the degree of attention with respect to the movement of the game ball, and to suitably suppress the increase in size of the pitching device resulting therefrom.

  Feature G6. When the first movable body is disposed at the first position and the second movable body is disposed at the second position, the game ball moves to the first entrance portion through the first guide path. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G5, wherein the game ball cannot be moved to the second entrance portion through the second guide route.

  According to the feature G6, the first movable body is disposed at the first position and the second movable body is disposed at the second position, thereby making it impossible to enter the game balls into both the ball-entry portions. For example, by retracting both the first movable body and the second movable body, it is possible to prevent the balls from entering each of the entrance parts, but the two movable bodies can be used as shutters for the other entrance part. This can increase the certainty of avoiding a ball. Further, since it is not necessary to newly form a flow path when the guidance of the game ball is resumed, it is possible to suitably control whether or not the ball can be entered.

Feature G7. The first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are relative to each other with an entrance portion (for example, entrance portions 332 and 342) of the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion separated by a predetermined region (specific region SE). It is arranged to face,
The entrance portion of the first entrance part is the predetermined region by the first movable body disposed at the first position and the second movable body disposed at the second position. It is configured to be covered from the side,
The entrance portion of the second entrance portion is in the predetermined area by the first movable body disposed at the first position and the second movable body disposed at the second position. The gaming machine according to Feature G6, wherein the gaming machine is covered from the side.

  If the entrance part of each entrance part is covered with both movable bodies in this feature, the effect shown in the feature G6 can be preferably exhibited. In particular, the movable body disposed at the guide position (first position or second position) is configured not to cover the entrance portion with one movable body but to cover the entrance portion by using two movable bodies together. Even if it is the structure which forms a guidance path | route by this, it can suppress suitably that the restrictions regarding the routing of a guidance path | route become strong by the said shielding function.

Feature G8. Arrangement of the second movable body at the second position under the situation where the first movable body is disposed at the first position allows the second movement of the game ball along the first guide path. Means for regulating by a movable body;
By moving the first movable body at the first position under the situation where the second movable body is disposed at the second position, the movement of the game ball along the second guide path is changed to the first position. The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G7, characterized in that the gaming machine is provided with a means that is regulated by a movable body.

  As shown in this feature, if a movable body that functions as a guide means to one entrance is configured to function as a shutter (stopper) that restricts the movement of a game ball to the other entrance, a plurality of variable types In configuring the ball entry means with the ball entry device, it is possible to suitably suppress the complication of the configuration relating to the ball entry means.

  Feature G9. When the first movable body is arranged at the first position and the second movable body is arranged at the second position, a game ball from the first movable body side to the second movable body side And the game ball can be moved from the second movable body side to the first movable body side.

  According to the feature G9, for example, when the movement of the game ball is hindered by the second movable body during the guidance through the first guidance route, the game ball stops immediately on the spot. Instead, there is room for movement toward another newly formed route. Such behavior of the game ball can suppress monotonous movement of the game ball. This is preferable in order to improve attention to the movement of the game ball.

Feature G10. The direction in which the game ball is guided by the first movable body and the operation direction of the second movable body intersect,
The gaming machine according to Feature G8 or Feature G9, wherein a guide direction of the game ball by the second movable body and an operation direction of the first movable body intersect.

  As shown in the feature G8 and the like, when each movable body has both a guide function and a shutter function (stopper function), a position shift or the like occurs in the movable body due to a load from the game ball. There is a concern that will not be demonstrated well. Such inconvenience is assumed to be prominent when the operation direction and the guide direction coincide. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by causing the operation direction and the guide direction to cross each other, even when each movable body is configured to have both the guide function and the shutter function, the above-described inconvenience is preferably generated. Can be suppressed.

Feature G11. In a situation where the first movable body is disposed at the first position and the second movable body is disposed at the second position, one of the first movable body and the second movable body is moved to the first position. Means for retracting from the position or the second position;
The side on which the game ball is guided by the first movable body and the side on which the game ball is guided by the second movable body are reversed,
The first movable body and the second movable body can contact the game ball being guided from the side opposite to the side on which the game ball is guided by the first movable body, and the second The game according to any one of features G8 to G10, wherein the game ball can be brought into contact with the game ball being guided from a side opposite to the side on which the game ball is guided by the movable body. Machine.

  According to the feature G11, when the two movable bodies are both arranged at the guide position (first position or second position) and the flow of the game ball is restricted, the game ball hits the two movable bodies. It will be in contact. Under the situation where the guidance of the game ball by the other movable body is regulated by one movable body, the one movable body retreats from the guide position, so that the game ball being regulated is directly moved to the other movable body. It will begin to flow down along. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably realize improvement in responsiveness and smooth flow of the game ball when guidance is started.

Feature G12. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
A first ball entrance portion (first ball entrance portion) provided in the game area and arranged such that entrance portions (for example, entrance portions 332 and 342) of game balls face each other across a predetermined region (specific region SE) 331) and the second entrance part (second entrance part 341),
It is movable within a predetermined range including a predetermined position (protruding position), and is arranged at the predetermined position to form a guide route (first guide route GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first ball entry portion. A movable body (for example, first movable body 350, 350H, guide portion 400L),
A gaming machine, wherein in a state where the movable body is arranged at the predetermined position, the movable body prevents the game ball from moving to the second entrance portion.

  According to the feature G12, when a situation in which the game ball should be guided to the first entrance part, a guide path for guiding the game ball to the first entrance part is formed by arranging the movable body at a predetermined position. Is done. At this time, the movement of the game ball toward the second entrance portion is prevented by the movable body that forms the guide path. Thereby, it becomes possible to avoid the entrance to the entrance part which is not set as the guidance destination of the game ball, and the accidental entrance to the second entrance part can be suitably suppressed.

  The technical ideas shown in the features A to F may be applied to the features G1 to G12.

<Feature H group>
The following characteristic group H is “Some game machines such as pachinko machines have a game board in which a game area is formed. A game ball launched based on a player's launch operation is placed in the game area. By winning a prize at an operating port, etc., the player is given benefits such as whether or not to shift to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than in the normal gaming state, and paying out game balls. (For example, refer to Patent Document 1.) In the special game state, for example, the variable ball entry means is switched between an acceptance state and a non-acceptance state over a plurality of times. The game ball that has reached the variable ball entry means is allowed to enter, and the game ball that has reached the variable ball entry means when the variable ball entry means is in an unaccepted state. It ’s going to be a hindrance. ” "In a gaming machine of the type described above, when the variable ball entry means is in a non-accepting state, the player is wasted by devising a launch operation so that the game ball does not reach the variable ball entry means. If such technical intervention is allowed, there will be a difference depending on the skill of the player in the benefits obtained, etc. This is to improve the fairness of the game. This has been made in view of the background, problems, and the like.

Feature H1. A variable pitching means (variable winning unit 83) that includes a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (gaming area PE) is formed, and that can be switched between a receiving state and a non-receiving state for accepting a gaming ball in the gaming area. A gaming machine provided,
The variable pitching means is
An entry part (for example, the first entry part 331) in which a game ball can enter,
A guide that can move to a formation position (for example, a protruding position) that forms a guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) that guides a game ball to the ball entry portion and a non-formation position (for example, a retracted position) that does not form the guide path. A path forming unit (for example, the first movable body 350, 350H, the first guide unit 400L),
A restricting position (for example, the second movable body 360, 360H, the second position) that can move to a restricting position (for example, a protruding position) that restricts the movement of the game ball along the guide path and an allowable position (for example, a retracted position) that does not perform the restriction 2 guide part 410L),
When the guide path forming portion is disposed at the formation position and the restricting portion is disposed at the permissible position and the variable pitching means is switched to the non-accepting state, the guide path formation portion is moved to the formation position. A game machine characterized in that the movement precedes the movement of the restricting portion to the allowable position.

  According to the feature H1, since the guide route is formed prior to the opening of the entrance, the player can be given an impression that spilling has been avoided for the game ball that has reached the guide route prior to opening. . In this way, by relieving the spilling ball, it is possible to prevent the game ball launching operation from being interrupted while waiting for the entrance of the ball to enter, and to promote the continuation of the game ball launching. . This is preferable for suppressing a delay in the progress of the game. Moreover, the fairness of a game can be improved suitably by suppressing that the difference according to a player's skill arises in the privilege etc. which are obtained.

  Feature H2. The restricting portion is formed with a guide inclined surface (for example, the upper surface 351 of the first movable body 350 and the upper surface 361 of the second movable body 360) for guiding the game ball that has reached the restricting portion to the formation position. The gaming machine according to Feature H1, which is characterized.

  As shown in the characteristic H1, in the configuration in which the movement of the guide passage forming portion from the non-formation position to the formation position precedes the movement of the restriction portion from the restriction position to the allowable position, the movement of the restriction portion is the flow path formation portion. If there is a delay in the movement of the game, there is a possibility of giving the player an impression as if he missed the opportunity to enter the game by spilling the game ball that should have entered. This is assumed to be an obstacle to exerting various effects shown in the feature H1. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if a configuration is adopted in which a game ball that has fallen to the restricting portion during the formation of the guide route is guided to the formation position (guide route forming portion side), the game ball enters the game ball. A ball opportunity can be given. Therefore, it is difficult to give an impression as if the movement of the restricting part is behind the movement of the flow path forming part is a factor that misses the opportunity to enter the ball, and it is suitably suppressed that it becomes a factor that reduces the player's willingness to play it can.

  Feature H3. The game according to Feature H2, wherein the restricting portion is configured such that a moving direction of the game ball moving to the formation position along the guide inclined surface is a direction away from the ball entering portion. Machine.

  When it is assumed that the movement of the game ball is restricted at a position close to the entrance part, the game ball that was being restricted flows into the entrance part as soon as the restriction part moves to the allowable position. There is concern that it will be difficult to visually check the movement of the game ball. Therefore, as shown in this feature, if the game ball guided to the formation position by the inclined surface is configured to be away from the entrance portion, the occurrence of the inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature H4. In the feature H2 or the feature H3, the guide path forming unit is formed such that an inclination angle of the guide path with respect to a horizontal plane is equal to or greater than an inclination angle of the guide inclined plane with respect to the horizontal plane. The gaming machine described.

  As shown in the feature H2 or the like, when the game ball that has dropped to the restricting portion side is guided to the guide route side, if the guided game ball jumps over the guide route, the effect shown in the feature H2 or the like is obtained. It is assumed that it will not work well. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by making the inclination angle of the guide path with respect to the horizontal plane equal to or greater than the inclination angle of the guide inclined surface with respect to the horizontal plane, such behavior of the game ball can be suppressed.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4, wherein the regulation unit is configured to interrupt a midway position of the guide route when the regulation unit is disposed at the regulation position.

  As shown in the feature H1, in the configuration in which the formation of the guide route is preceded, a plurality of game balls that have been dammed by the restriction unit can flow into the ball entry part at once as the restriction is released. Such a movement of the game ball is preferable for enhancing the visual impact. Here, as shown in this feature, if the restricting portion is disposed in the middle of the guide route and the guide route extends downstream from the restricting portion, the movement of the game ball as described above When this occurs, the moving distance of the game ball group can be earned, and the chance that the movement of the game ball is missed can be reduced.

  Feature H6. In the guide path forming portion, the passage length of a portion located on the upstream side of the restriction position by the restriction portion in the guide path is longer than the radial dimension of the game ball, and the restriction path disposed at the restriction position is According to any one of the features H1 to H5, the game ball whose movement to the ball entering portion side is blocked by the portion can wait on the guide route forming portion. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H6, after the restriction is released by the restriction unit, the game ball located on the guide route is promptly headed to the ball entry unit, which can contribute to smooth progress of the game.

  In particular, in realizing the technical idea shown in the features H2 to H4, the combination with the configuration shown in this feature can give a difference in density to the degree of crowding of the game balls toward the entrance portion. . This is preferable for suppressing the movement of the game ball toward the ball-entry portion from becoming monotonous.

Feature H7. The restricting portion is maintained in the restricting position when the variable pitching means is in the non-accepting state,
The guide path forming unit is configured to move to the formation position in a situation where the restricting unit is disposed at the restricting position when the variable pitching means is switched to the receiving state. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6.

  As shown in the feature H1 and the like, when the variable pitching means is switched to the receiving state, various effects can be expected by releasing the movement restriction by the restriction portion after forming the guide route. However, if the movement of the variable pitching means becomes complicated, there is a concern that the responsiveness when switching between the accepting state / non-accepting state is lowered due to the extended operation period. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the variable pitching means is switched to the receiving state, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by placing the restricting portion in the restricting position in advance. .

  Feature H8. The gaming machine according to Feature H7, wherein the restricting portion is configured to prevent entry into the ball entering portion by the restricting portion when the restricting portion is disposed at the restricting position.

  As shown in the feature H7, when the restricting portion is arranged at the restricting position in the non-acceptance state, the restricting portion prevents the entrance to the entering portion, thereby separately providing a shutter. It is possible to avoid unintentional (accidental) entry without using the like. That is, since the restricting unit has both the function of restricting the movement of the game ball along the guide route and the function of preventing the entering of the entering ball, the complication of the configuration can be suppressed.

Feature H9. The guide path forming portion is configured to be arranged at the formation position and the non-formation position by sliding movement in the thickness direction of the game board,
When switching the variable entry means from the acceptance state to the non-acceptance state, the restricting portion is moved from the allowable position to the restricting position in a state where the guide path forming portion is disposed at the formation position. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H8, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be restored.

  The game ball moving along the guide route gains momentum toward the entrance. For this reason, there is a concern that the game ball may directly enter the entrance portion even if it is attempted to prevent entry by retreating (sliding) the guide path formation portion to the non-formation position. Therefore, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be suppressed by making the movement of the restricting portion precede at the end of the reception as opposed to when the reception is started.

Feature H10. The entrance part is a first entrance part,
A second incoming part (second incoming part 341) provided separately from the first incoming part,
The restricting portion has a function of forming a guide path for guiding a game ball located on the restricting portion to the second entering portion in a state where the restricting portion is disposed at the restricting position;
The guide path forming part is arranged at the non-guide position and the restricting part is arranged at the restricting position, so that a game ball that reaches the restricting part enters the second entering part. The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H9, wherein:

  If the game ball that has reached the restricting portion is guided to the second incoming ball portion by the restricting portion, it is possible to diversify the movement of the game ball and improve the degree of attention to the game. And the restriction | limiting part can also suppress the complication of the structure in the whole apparatus suitably by having also the function which forms the guide route to the 2nd entrance part.

  Feature H11. In the state where the guide path forming unit is arranged at the formation position, the guide path forming unit is configured to regulate the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entering unit along the regulating unit. The gaming machine according to Feature H10, wherein:

  According to the feature H11, when the guide route forming unit is arranged at the formation position, the guide route by the restricting unit is cut off by the guide route forming unit, and the movement of the game ball to the second entrance portion is restricted. Become. In this way, the guidance path forming unit has the function of guiding the game ball to the first ball entry unit and the function of restricting the movement of the game ball toward the second ball entry unit, thereby allowing the game ball to enter the ball. As a result, the complication of the apparatus resulting therefrom can be suitably suppressed.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristics A group-G group to the characteristics H1-characteristic H11.

<Feature I group>
The following feature group I states that “a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board on which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems such as “the gaming machine of the above-mentioned type still has room for improvement in the diversification of games by the variable pitching means”. Is.

Feature I1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83N, 83R, 83U, 83V, 83W) that allows a game ball to enter the game area. Is a gaming machine provided with
The entrance means is
A first incoming part (first incoming part 331) and a second incoming part (second incoming part 341);
Movable bodies (movable bodies 430N, 440N, 450R, 450U, 470V, and 450W) formed with rolling surfaces (for example, upper surfaces 452R, 452U, 472V, and 452W) that are pivotally supported and on which game balls can roll. When,
A drive unit (for example, a drive motor 321) for driving the movable body,
A posture changing means (MPU of the main control device 162) for changing the posture of the movable body by drive control of the drive unit;
The posture changing means is
By rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the first incoming ball portion, the game ball is guided to the first incoming ball portion. First guide route forming means for forming a first guide route (first guide route GP1);
By rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the second incoming ball portion, the game ball is guided to the second incoming ball portion. A gaming machine comprising second guide route forming means for forming a second guide route (second guide route GP2).

  For example, in the case where the guide means dedicated to the first entrance part and the guide means dedicated to the second entrance part are individually provided, by trying to increase the receiving width of the game ball in the guide means, The occupied area will be large and bulky. In such a configuration, there is a concern that restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become strong in coexistence with other game parts in the game area. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body (rolling surface) that functions as a guide unit is shared, and the inclination destination (guide destination) of the rolling surface changes depending on the change in the posture of the movable body. For this reason, compared with the case where a movable body (rolling surface) is individually provided as described above, the receiving width can be increased while suppressing the expansion of the area occupied by the movable body.

  In addition, for example, when a guide movable body is provided for each incoming ball part, each incoming ball part becomes independent, and only an effect (diversification) due to a plurality of incoming ball parts can be expected. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the guide destination is changed by the change of the posture using the movable body shared by the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. Is supposed to focus on the movement of the movable body while imagining which is the destination. As a result, it is possible to expect an effect (attention level improvement effect) that exceeds the effect obtained by simply increasing the number of balls.

Feature I2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed;
Pitching means (for example, variable winning units 83N, 83R, 83U, 83V, 83W) provided in the game area;
Game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU of the main controller 162) that transitions the game state to the special game state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied;
As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the first winning mode) and a second special gaming state (opening / closing execution mode corresponding to the second winning mode) are provided,
The entrance means is
A first incoming ball portion (first incoming ball portion 331) that becomes a destination of a game ball when the first special gaming state is entered;
A second incoming ball portion (second incoming ball portion 341) that is a destination for the game ball when the second special gaming state is entered;
A movable body (movable bodies 430N, 440N, 450R, 450U, 470V, 450W) having a rolling surface (for example, upper surfaces 452R, 452U, 472V, 452W) that is pivotally supported and on which a game ball can roll;
A drive unit (drive motor 321) for driving the movable body,
A posture changing means (MPU of the main control device 162) for changing the posture of the movable body by drive control of the drive unit;
The posture changing means is
By changing the posture of the movable body so that the movable body is rotated and the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the first ball-entry portion in the first special game state. First guide route forming means for forming a first guide route (first guide route GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entrance part;
In the second special game state, by rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the second entrance part And a second guide route forming means for forming a second guide route (second guide route GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entrance portion.

  For example, providing a guide means dedicated to the first entrance part and a guide means exclusive to the second entrance part to change the guide destination of the game balls according to the game state is intended to diversify the game. Is preferable. However, in such a configuration, by trying to increase the receiving width of the game ball in the guide means, the occupied area of these ball-entering devices is greatly increased. In such a configuration, there is a concern that restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entry device will become strong in coexistence with other game parts in the game area. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body (rolling surface) that functions as a guide unit is shared, and the inclination destination (guide destination) of the rolling surface changes depending on the change in the posture of the movable body. For this reason, compared with the case where a movable body (rolling surface) is individually provided as described above, the receiving width can be increased while suppressing the expansion of the area occupied by the movable body.

  In addition, for example, when a guide movable body is provided for each incoming ball part, each incoming ball part becomes independent, and only an effect (diversification) due to a plurality of incoming ball parts can be expected. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the guide destination is changed by the change of the posture using the movable body shared by the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion. Is expected to pay attention to the movable body while imagining which will be the guidance destination. As a result, it is possible to expect an effect (attention level improvement effect) that exceeds the effect obtained by simply increasing the number of balls.

Feature I3. The movable body is in any one of a first guiding state that forms the first guiding path, a second guiding state that forms the second guiding path, and the first and second landing parts. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
The gaming machine according to Feature I1 or Feature I2, wherein when the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the movable body is maintained in the non-guided state.

  When the gaming state is not a special gaming state (for example, when the gaming state is a normal gaming state), the movable body is maintained in a non-guided state, and the entrance to the first entrance part and the second entrance part is performed. Avoided. As described above, it is preferable that the movable body can be switched between the first guiding state / second guiding state / non-guiding state in order to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the pitching device.

  Feature I4. A first privilege is given to the player based on the entrance to the first entrance, and a second privilege different from the first privilege is provided based on the entrance to the second entrance. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3, further comprising a privilege granting unit (payout device 224) for granting to a player.

  In the case of using a plurality of ball clubs, the diversification of games can be promoted by providing a difference in the benefits obtained. In such a configuration, when the first entrance device including the first entrance portion and the second entrance device including the second entrance portion are separately provided, the occupied areas of the respective entrance devices Is bulky. Therefore, diversification of the game makes it difficult for the ball entering apparatus and peripheral parts to coexist, and the restrictions on the arrangement of the ball entering apparatus become stronger. Therefore, by applying the technical idea shown in the feature I1 or the like to the configuration shown in this feature, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed and a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

Feature I5. The first and second balls are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction,
The game according to any one of features I1 to I4, wherein the movable body is disposed between the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion in the predetermined direction. Machine.

  As shown in the feature I5, if the movable body is disposed between the two balls, it is possible to contribute to downsizing of the movable body and reduction in the change amount (operation region) of the posture of the movable body.

Feature I6. The center of rotation of the movable body is located between the first and second balls,
The first guide path forming means forms the first guide path by rotating the movable body in a first predetermined direction.
The second guide path forming means forms the second guide path by rotating the movable body in a second predetermined direction opposite to the first predetermined direction. Thru | or the game machine as described in any one of characteristics I5.

  According to the characteristic I6, the rotation direction when forming the first guide path is opposite to the rotation direction when forming the second guide path. With such a configuration, the operation area can be reduced as compared with the case where the rotation direction of the movable body is limited to one direction.

Feature I7. The movable body is in any one of a first guiding state that forms the first guiding path, a second guiding state that forms the second guiding path, and the first and second landing parts. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
When the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the movable body is configured to be maintained in the non-guided state,
The rotation direction of the movable body when switching from the non-guide state to the first guide state is opposite to the rotation direction of the movable body when switching from the non-guide state to the second guide state. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I6.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the non-guide state can be switched to the second guide state without going through the first guide state. Moreover, it is possible to switch from the non-guide state to the first guide state without going through the second guide state. Thereby, it can contribute to the improvement of the responsiveness at the time of switching to a guidance state.

Feature I8. The movable body is in any one of a first guiding state that forms the first guiding path, a second guiding state that forms the second guiding path, and the first and second landing parts. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
When the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the movable body is configured to be maintained in the non-guided state,
According to any one of features I1 to I7, wherein in the standby state, the movable body restricts entry into the first and second entrance parts. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I8, when the movable body is maintained in the standby state, the moving body restricts the entry of the balls into each of the entrance portions. Thereby, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of an accidental entry to each entry part under a situation where the special game state is not established.

Feature I9. The first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are arranged such that the entrance portions (inlet portions 332 and 342) face each other.
The game balls flowing down the game area are configured to enter the first and second entrance parts through the area between the first and second entrance parts,
When the movable body is in the standby state, the region between the first and second ball entering portions is covered by the movable body from the upstream side in the game area. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I8.

  According to the characteristic I9, when the movable body is maintained in the standby state, the entrance to each entry portion is restricted by the movable body. Thereby, it is possible to suitably avoid the occurrence of an accidental entry to each entry part under a situation where the special game state is not established.

Feature I10. The first entrance part and the second entrance part are arranged side by side,
The movable body is configured such that the rolling surface faces upward when in the standby state,
When the movable body is in the standby state, the rolling surface constitutes a portion on the rolling surface that becomes the first ball entry side and is inclined downward toward the first ball entry portion. A first inclined portion (for example, a first inclined portion 453R), and a second inclined portion that forms a portion on the rolling surface that becomes the second incoming ball portion side and that is inclined downward toward the second incoming ball portion side The gaming machine according to Feature I9, further including a portion (for example, a second inclined portion 454R).

  According to the feature I9, the game balls that have reached the ball entry means in the standby state are divided and flow down into the first ball entrance portion side and the second ball entrance portion side. With this configuration, the ball entry means can function as a branching portion that branches the flow-down path of the game ball.

  Feature I11. The second inclined portion is inclined downward toward the first entrance portion in a state where the first guide route is formed, and the first inclined portion is a state where the second guide route is formed. The gaming machine according to Feature I10, wherein the gaming machine is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the second entrance portion.

  According to the feature I11, the first guide path is formed by the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion in the first guide state, and the second guide path is also formed by the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion in the second guide state. Can be formed. Thereby, it can be avoided that the presence of the inclined portions becomes a factor of shortening the total length of the guide route.

  Further, the inclination angle of the first guide path is tighter on the downstream side than on the upstream side, and the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. When a plurality of game balls are guided to the first entrance part, the interval between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of balls that exceed the upper limit (so-called over winning). Similarly, with respect to the inclination angle of the second guide route, the downstream side is more rigid than the upstream side, and the acceleration of the game ball is higher on the downstream side. When a plurality of game balls are guided to the second ball part, the interval between the game balls can be increased. This is advantageous in suppressing the number of balls that exceed the upper limit (so-called over winning).

Feature I12. A wall portion (wall portion 491W) is formed on at least one of the front side and the rear side of the movable body,
The game ball is decelerated when the game ball comes into contact with the moving path (the detour paths TE1 and TE2) along which the game ball moves along the movable body in the standby state at the wall portion. The deceleration part (protrusion 492W, 493W) to be made is formed,
The gaming machine according to Feature I10 or Feature I11, wherein the speed reduction portion is disposed so as to avoid contact with a game ball passing through the first guide route or the second guide route. .

  For example, in a configuration in which the movable body is repeatedly switched between the standby state and the guidance state, the player can suppress unnecessary investment by devising the launch operation so that the game ball does not reach the movable body during the standby state. . When such technical intervention is allowed, a difference according to the skill of the player is generated in the benefits obtained. This can be an obstacle to improving the fairness of the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the game ball that has reached the movable body during the standby state does not immediately leave the movable body, but its movement is delayed. A game ball that has reached the movable body and is slowly moving during the standby state is guided to the ball-entry unit when the movable body is switched to the guide state. In this way, if it is configured such that an opportunity to enter the entrance part is given, useless investment can be suppressed without waiting for a waiting state and avoiding the operation of launching a game ball. Thereby, the problem concerning the fairness can be preferably solved.

  However, in the case where the acceleration of the game ball is suppressed by the deceleration unit, the effect is exerted on the game ball going to the entrance part, giving the player the impression that the entrance is delayed unnecessarily, and the player There is concern that it will be a factor that reduces the willingness to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of the above-described inconvenience can be suppressed by devising the arrangement of the speed reduction portion so that the game balls passing through the first guide route and the second guide route do not contact the speed reduction portion. .

Feature I13. The first entrance part and the second entrance part are arranged side by side,
The length of the first guide route and the length of the second guide route in the side-by-side direction are configured to be equal to the separation distance between the first ball entering portion and the second ball entering portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I12, characterized by:

  According to the characteristic I13, a game ball that falls toward the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion is guided to the first entrance portion in the first guidance state, and the first entrance ball in the second guidance state. The game ball falling toward the second entrance portion can be guided to the second entrance portion. Thereby, the gap between the first and second entrance parts can be used as an inlet to the first and second entrance parts, and while suppressing the increase in the size of the entrance means, The receiving width of the game ball in the entrance portion can be increased.

Feature I14. A housing portion (housing portion 461U) for housing the movable body;
One of the characteristics I1 to I13, wherein the movable body is configured to avoid protrusion of the movable body into the game area when the movable body is housed in the housing portion. Game machines.

  In the configuration in which the movable body functions as a ball receiving portion that receives the game ball as shown in the feature I1 or the like, the stress generated when the game ball hits is transmitted to the pivot support location. This hinders the stabilization of the posture of the movable body. Then, if it is set as the structure which retracts a movable body to an accommodating part as shown to this characteristic, the unnecessary contact with a game ball can be suppressed and a pivotal support location can be aimed at.

  Further, by retracting the movable body to the housing portion, the front of the movable body can be utilized as a game ball passing area. Thereby, the restrictions concerning the flow path of the game ball can be relaxed.

  Feature I15. A first operation region through which the movable body passes when forming the first guide path overlaps with a second operation region through which the movable body passes through when forming the second guide route. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I14.

  According to the feature I15, if the operation area of the movable body is overlapped, useless expansion of the operation area of the movable body can be suitably suppressed.

Feature I16. The movable body includes a first movable body (for example, a first movable body 430N) disposed on the first incoming ball portion side and a second movable body (for example, a first movable body 430N) disposed on the second incoming ball portion side. 2 movable body 440N),
In any one of the features I1 to I15, the first guide path and the second guide path are formed by rotating the first movable body and the second movable body, respectively. The gaming machine described.

  As shown in this feature, if each guide path is formed by a combination of the first movable body on the first entrance portion side and the second movable body on the second entrance portion side, Unnecessary spread can be suitably suppressed.

  Feature I17. The rotational directions of the first movable body and the second movable body when forming the first guide path are the same direction, and the first movable body when forming the second guide path and the The gaming machine according to Feature I16, wherein the rotation direction of the second movable body is the same direction.

  As shown in the feature I17, the driving mechanism can be simplified by unifying the rotation directions of the movable bodies. This is preferable for realizing downsizing of the ball entry device.

Feature I18. Of the first movable body and the second movable body, the movable body constituting the upstream portion of the guide path is disposed at the formation position where the rotating tip portion is raised to form the guide path, and the movable body constituting the downstream portion Is configured to be arranged at the formation position where the rotating tip part descends to form a guide path,
When the first movable body and the second movable body are disposed at the formation position, a rotation restricting portion (for example, guide grooves 433N, 434N, 443N, 444N) that restricts further rotation is provided. The gaming machine according to Feature I16 or Feature I17, wherein:

  According to the feature I18, an impact can be absorbed by the sinking of the movable body in the upstream portion of the guide path, and a shift in the rotational position of the movable body can be suppressed in the downstream portion to suppress variations in movement to the entrance portion. Thereby, it can contribute to smooth guidance of a game ball.

  Feature I19. In a standby state in which the game ball is not guided to any of the first and second balls, the first movable body is disposed at a position covering the entrance portion of the first ball portion and The game machine according to any one of features I16 to I18, wherein two movable bodies are arranged at positions that cover an entrance portion of the second ball entry portion.

  As shown in the feature I19, when each movable body is caused to function as a lid that covers the entrance portion of the ball-entry portion, a certain size is secured in the movable bodies. By forming the guide path using such a configuration, it is possible to preferably avoid unnecessary occupying the area occupied by the movable body when the guide path is lengthened and the receiving width of the game ball is increased.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristic A group-H group to the characteristic I1-characteristic I19.

<Feature J group>
The following group J is characterized in that “a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it has been made in view of the background and problems such as “the gaming machine of the type described above has room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game”.

Feature J1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a guide portion (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N, 470V) for guiding game balls is provided in the game area,
The guide portion includes a first rotation center portion (for example, a lower shaft portion 432N, an upper shaft portion 441N, a second shaft portion 482V) and a second rotation center portion (for example, an upper shaft portion 431N, a lower shaft portion 442N, A first shaft portion 481V), and the first guide path (for example, the first guide path GP1) is formed by rotating about the first rotation center portion, and the second rotation center portion is the center. A game machine characterized by forming a second guide route (for example, a second guide route GP2) by rotating to the right.

  If the guide portion provided in the game area is used to change the guide destination of the game ball, the movement of the game ball can be diversified and contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game. In the guide part shown in this feature, the rotation center part when forming the first guide path is different from the rotation center part when forming the second guide path. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress useless expansion of the operation area of the guide unit and improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the guide unit when forming the two guide paths using the guide unit. This is advantageous in exhibiting the above-described effect of improving attention.

Feature J2. A gaming machine that includes a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and is provided with a ball entry means (for example, a variable prize unit 83R) that allows a game ball to enter the game area. There,
The entrance means is
A first incoming part (first incoming part 331) and a second incoming part (second incoming part 341);
The first rotation center (for example, the lower shaft portion 432N, the upper shaft portion 441N, the second shaft portion 482V) and the second rotation center portion (for example, the upper shaft portion 431N, the lower shaft portion 442N, the first shaft portion 481V). ), And a first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entrance part by turning about the first center part of rotation. 2 Guide parts (for example, movable bodies 430N, 440N, etc.) that form a second guide path (for example, second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entrance part by rotating about the center of rotation. 470V).

  If the guide portion provided in the game area is used to change the guide destination of the game ball, the movement of the game ball can be diversified and contribute to an increase in the degree of attention to the game. In the guide part shown in this feature, the rotation center part when forming the first guide path is different from the rotation center part when forming the second guide path. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress useless expansion of the operation area of the guide unit and improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the guide unit when forming the two guide paths using the guide unit. This is advantageous in exhibiting the above-described effect of improving attention.

  Note that the configuration shown in this feature is “a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a ball entry means (for example, a variable prize unit 83R) that allows a game ball to enter the game area. ), And the entrance means includes a first entrance part (first entrance part 331) and a second entrance part (second entrance part 341), and two times One of the rotation center portions (for example, the upper shaft portion 431N, the lower shaft portion 432N, the upper shaft portion 441N, the lower shaft portion 442N, the first shaft portion 481V, the second shaft portion 482V). To form a first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) for guiding the game ball to the first entrance part and to rotate about the other of the rotation center parts. To form a second guide route (second guide route GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entrance portion. Guiding portion (e.g., a movable member 430N, 440N, 470V) gaming machine characterized in that it comprises a. "And may be.

  Feature J3. When the first guide path is formed by rotation about the first rotation center, the rotation direction of the guide portion and the second by rotation about the second rotation center. The gaming machine according to feature J2, wherein the game machine is configured such that the direction of rotation of the guide portion in the case of forming a guide route is opposite.

  According to the feature J3, a passing area (operation range) through which the guide unit passes when forming the first guide route and a passing area (operation range) through which the guide unit passes when forming the second guide route are defined. Can be duplicated. Thereby, compared with the case where the operation | movement range for guide parts is ensured separately, the useless expansion of the said operation | movement range can be suppressed.

  Feature J4. When the first guide path is formed by pivoting about the first pivot center, the passage region through which the guide passes, and pivoting about the second pivot center, The gaming machine according to Feature J2 or Feature J3, wherein when forming a two-guide route, at least a portion overlaps with a passing region through which the guide portion passes.

  As shown in the feature J4, if it is configured to overlap at least partly the passage area (operation range) at the time of forming each guide route, compared with the case of individually securing the operation range for the guide unit, The expansion of the operation range can be suppressed. Thereby, the occupation area of the ball entry means can be reduced, and the degree of freedom of arrangement of the ball entry means can be dramatically increased.

Feature J5. The guide portion is disposed between the first ball entrance portion and the second ball entrance portion, and extends in the juxtaposition direction of the first ball entrance portion and the second ball entrance portion,
The first rotation center portion is disposed at an end portion of the guide portion on the second entrance portion side,
The gaming machine according to any one of features J2 to J4, wherein the second rotation center portion is disposed at an end portion of the guide portion on the first entrance portion side.

  In the case where the guide route is formed, the center of rotation starting from the most upstream portion of the guide route is located. Thereby, it can suppress that a game ball hits the part which becomes upstream rather than a rotation center part. Even when the game ball hits the guide portion and the flow direction changes, it can be avoided that the pressing force by the game ball acts to urge the guide portion to return to the position before the rotation. Therefore, it can suppress suitably that the attitude | position of a guide part is disturb | confused by hitting a game ball.

  Feature J6. In the case where the guide portion is rotated around one of the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion, the ball entry means has the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion. Features J2 to J2 are characterized by having restricting portions (guide grooves 433N, 434N, 443N, 444N, 483V, 484V) for restricting the rotation of the guide portion around the other rotation center portion. The gaming machine according to any one of J5.

  In the case where the two rotation center portions are used in combination, the stability when the guide portion is operated may be lowered. Therefore, as shown in this feature, the occurrence of such an inconvenience can be suitably suppressed by adopting a configuration that restricts the rotation around both rotation centers.

Feature J7. The first entrance portion and the second entrance portion are arranged side by side, and the entrance portion (inlet portion 332) of the first entrance portion and the entrance portion (inlet portion 342) of the second entrance portion are opposed to each other. Are arranged like this,
The game balls that have reached the entrance means enter the first entrance section and the second entrance section through an area (specific area SE) sandwiched between the first entrance section and the second entrance section. It is composed,
One of the features J2 to J6, wherein the guide portion is disposed at a predetermined position that covers from above the region sandwiched between the first and second balls. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature J7, it is possible to prevent the entrance to the first entrance portion and the second entrance portion by the guide portion. From this state, when the guide portion is rotated, the first inclined passage and the second inclined passage are formed. At this time, the game ball that is rolling on the guide portion is the entrance portion that serves as a guide destination. Can be moved to and give opportunities to enter. Further, when the first guide route is formed, it is easy to enter the second entrance portion, and when the second guide route is formed, entrance to the first entrance portion is facilitated. This can be suppressed.

  In particular, in the combination with the feature J4 or the like, the rotation center portion is located closer to the entrance portion on the opposite side to the guidance destination, so that the rotation angle when forming the guide path can be reduced. Therefore, a rapid change in the movement of the game ball can be suppressed, and the above-described movement of the game ball can be prevented from becoming difficult to follow with the eyes. This is preferable for improving the player's attention to the movement of the game ball.

Feature J8. The positions of the first rotation center portion and the second rotation center portion when the guide portion is disposed at the predetermined position are initial positions,
The ball entry means includes first biasing means (second biasing member 486V) for biasing the first rotation center portion of the guide portion to the initial position, and the second rotation center of the guide portion. Second urging means (first urging member 485V) for urging the portion to the initial position,
Under the situation where the guide part is disposed at the predetermined position, the second turning center part descends against the urging force of the second urging means, so that the first ball entry part side The first guide path is formed so as to incline toward the first ball, and the first rotation center part descends against the urging force of the first urging means to incline toward the second ball entering part. A gaming machine according to Feature J7, wherein a guide route is formed.

  According to the configuration indicated by the feature J8, it is possible to simplify the drive mechanism for enabling switching between the first guide route and the second guide route. Moreover, when a game ball hits the guide part arrange | positioned in a predetermined position, the impact can be relieve | moderated by both biasing means. By protecting the guide portion in this way, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the durability of the ball entry means.

Feature J9. A gaming machine that includes a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and is provided with a ball entry means (for example, a variable prize unit 83V) that allows a game ball to enter the game area. There,
The entrance means is
A first incoming ball portion (first incoming ball portion 331) and a second incoming ball portion (second incoming ball portion 341) arranged side by side;
A guide unit (movable body 470V) capable of guiding a game ball to the first guide unit and the second guide unit;
The guide portion is disposed between the first ball entrance portion and the second ball entrance portion, and extends in a juxtaposition direction of the first ball entrance portion and the second ball entrance portion.
The game ball is guided to the first entrance portion by changing the height position of either the end portion on the first entrance portion side or the end portion on the second entrance portion side of the guide portion. A first guide route (guide route GP1) is formed, and the height position of the other of the end portion on the first entrance portion side and the end portion on the second entrance portion side of the guide portion is changed. A gaming machine characterized in that a second guidance route (guidance route GP1) for guiding a game ball to the second entrance is formed.

  As shown in feature J9, the first guide path is formed by changing the height position of one of both ends of the guide section, and the second guide path is formed by changing the other height position. If so, restrictions on the initial position (posture) of the guide unit can be relaxed while diversifying the guide route. Thereby, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of a ball entry means can be improved.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristics A group-I group to the characteristics J1-characteristic J9.

<Feature K group>
The following feature K group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When the game balls launched from the game ball launching means enter the ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems such as “the gaming machine of the above-mentioned type still has room for improvement in the diversification of games by the variable pitching means”. Is.

Feature K1. A gaming machine including a gaming board (gaming board 80a) in which a gaming area (game area PE) is formed,
An entrance part (for example, entrance part 331) provided in the game area and into which a game ball can enter;
Privilege granting means (for example, a payout device 224) for granting a privilege to the player based on the entrance to the entrance part;
Guidance means (for example, movable bodies 430P, 440P, 430Q, and 440Q) that can be switched between a guidance state for guiding the game ball to the entrance and a non-guidance state that does not perform the guidance,
As the guidance state, a first guidance state in which a game ball flowing down a first area (for example, the first area GE1) is guided to the entrance part, and a second area that includes the first area and is wider than the first area. A gaming machine comprising a second guiding state in which gaming balls flowing down (for example, the first region GE1 and the second region GE2) are guided to the entrance portion.

  According to the feature K1, when the guiding means is switched from the non-guidance state to the guidance state, the game balls flowing down the game area are guided to the entrance portion. Here, the first guidance state and the second guidance state are provided as the guidance state, and in the second guidance state, the region to be guided is expanded with respect to the first guidance state. For this reason, the entrance probability is higher in the second guidance state than in the first guidance state. In this manner, diversification of the ball entering mode is realized, and a difference is generated in the size of the obtained privilege, thereby contributing to improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

  In the game area, a first flow path that guides the game ball to the first area and a second flow path that guides the game ball to a portion that is out of the first area in the second area may be arranged in parallel. .

  By the way, the configuration shown in this feature is “a game machine having a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, which is provided in the game area and allows a game ball to enter. And a guide means (for example, movable bodies 430P, 440P, 430Q, 440Q) for guiding the game ball to the entrance section, and the guide means includes a first area ( For example, a first guiding state in which a game ball flowing down the first area GE1) is guided to the entrance part, and a second area (for example, the first area GE1 and the second area GE2) wider than the first area is allowed to flow down. It is also possible to use a gaming machine characterized in that it can be switched to the second guidance state in which the game ball is guided to the entrance part.

Feature K2. The guide means forms a first inclined passage that is inclined downward to the ball-entry portion in the first guiding state, receives a game ball that has flowed down to the first region, and determines the flow direction of the game ball The guide is performed by changing the direction of the first inclined passage in the inclination direction, and the second inclined passage is formed so as to be inclined downward to the entrance portion when the second guiding state is established. The guidance is performed by receiving a game ball that has flowed down to the area and changing the flow direction of the game ball to the tilt direction of the second inclined passage,
The second inclined passage formed in the second guiding state is characterized in that the first inclined passage formed in the first guiding state is extended to the side opposite to the ball-entry portion. The gaming machine according to feature K1.

  As shown in this feature, if the region to be guided is expanded by changing the entire length of the inclined passage so as to extend to the upstream side of the inclined passage, It is possible to easily show the difference in the advantage of the second guidance state.

  In addition, the movement of the guiding means can be partially shared between the first guiding state and the second guiding state. As a result, as shown in the feature K1, in realizing diversification of games, it is possible to prevent the configuration related to the operation from becoming excessively complicated.

  Feature K3. The guide means includes a first movable body (first movable body 430Q) and a second movable body (second movable body 440Q). In the first guidance state, the first movable body is disposed at a passage forming position. Thus, the first inclined passage is formed, and in the second guiding state, the second inclined passage is formed by arranging the first movable body and the second movable body at the passage forming position. The gaming machine according to Feature K2, wherein the gaming machine is configured.

  As shown in the characteristic K3, if the first movable body and the second movable body are used in combination to form the inclined passage, even if a relatively long second inclined passage is formed, the responsiveness can be improved. The decrease can be suitably suppressed.

Feature K4. In the second guide state, the first movable body forms a downstream portion of the second inclined passage, and the second movable body forms an upstream portion of the second inclined passage,
The gaming machine according to Feature K3, wherein the upstream portion formed by the second movable body is displaced upward from an extension of the downstream portion formed by the first movable body.

  In the case where a series of second inclined passages are formed by a plurality of movable bodies, it is assumed that the behavior of the game ball is disturbed by the game ball being caught by the joint portion. When the movable body functions as a ball receiving portion that receives a game ball, the position accuracy can be lowered due to the influence of distortion or the like. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by arranging the second movable body forming the upstream portion so as to be shifted (offset) above the extension of the downstream portion, occurrence of such inconvenience is suitably suppressed. it can.

Feature K5. The first movable body and the second movable body are rotatable along the front surface of the game board, and face each other across the second region,
When the guide portion is switched to the second guide state, the second inclined passage is formed by rotating the first movable body and the second movable body closer to each other. The gaming machine according to the feature K3 or the feature K4.

  As shown in the characteristic K5, if the second inclined passage is formed by turning the movable bodies toward each other, the appearance when the second inclined passage is formed can be greatly changed. . Thereby, the impact at the time of forming the 2nd inclined passage advantageous to a player can be strengthened.

Feature K6. The first movable body and the second movable body extend vertically.
The first movable body is pivotally supported so that a lower end portion thereof is a rotation base end portion,
The second movable body is pivotally supported so that an upper end portion thereof becomes a rotation base end portion,
The rotation direction of the first movable body and the rotation direction of the second movable body when the second inclined passage is formed are configured to be the same direction as described in the feature K5. Game machines.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, the movable body forming the inclined passage can be made to stand by in a vertical orientation. Thereby, the opportunity for a game ball to collide with these movable bodies in the non-guided state where the inclined passage is not formed can be reduced.

  Moreover, the amount of rotation at the time of forming a 2nd inclination channel | path can be decreased by making the axial support location in each movable body upside down, and making the rotation direction the same. Thereby, even if it is a case where the 2nd inclined passage with a long passage length is formed, the operation period can be prolonged and it can control that responsiveness falls.

  Feature K7. The movement of the first movable body when the first movable body is disposed at the passage formation position is synchronized with the movement of the second movable body when the second movable body is disposed at the passage formation position. Thus, the gaming machine according to the feature K6, wherein the switching to the second guidance state is performed.

  As shown in this feature, the configuration in which the movements of both movable bodies are synchronized is advantageous in improving the response to switching to the second guidance state. However, when the responsiveness is to be pursued in this way, there is a high possibility that a game ball will be sandwiched between both movable bodies. In this regard, in the combination with the feature K6, even if the game ball is sandwiched, even if it is incomplete, a path that slopes downward toward the entrance part as a whole can be formed. It is possible to prevent the game from proceeding without any guidance function being exhibited. This is preferable for suppressing the disadvantage of the player.

Feature K8. When the first movable body and the second movable body are arranged at the passage forming position, a regulation portion that regulates further rotation is provided.
The length dimension from the rotation base end portion to the rotation tip end portion of the second movable body is the same as or longer than the length dimension from the rotation base end portion to the rotation tip end portion of the second movable body. The gaming machine according to Feature K6 or Feature K7, which is shortened.

  In the case where the movable bodies are pivotable, a force is applied to rotate the movable bodies due to the collision of the game balls. As for the first movable body, when the second inclined passage is formed, since the further turning is prevented by the restricting portion, a change in posture can be avoided even if it is pushed by the game ball. On the other hand, for the second movable body, in the case where the second inclined passage is formed, the direction in which the rotation is induced by the collision of the game ball is not prevented by the restricting portion. This is the opposite of the regulatory direction. That is, it is not expected that the second movable body restricting portion is prevented from rotating due to the collision of the game balls. Therefore, as shown in this feature, for the second movable body that is susceptible to the impact of game balls, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed by making the entire length the same as or shorter than that of the first movable body. it can.

  Feature K9. The movement of the first movable body when the non-guide state is switched to the first guide state is the same as the movement of the first movable body when the non-guide state is switched to the second guide state. The gaming machine according to any one of features K3 to K8.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, it is possible to suppress exposure of whether the first movable body is switched to the first guide state or the second guide state from the movement of the first movable body when switching to the guide state. In this way, making it difficult to estimate whether the movement of the first movable body is switched to the first guidance state or the second guidance state is advantageous in improving the player's attention to the game. .

Feature K10. The entrance portion is formed with a first passage (first downstream passage portion 337Q) and a second passage (second downstream passage portion 338Q) through which the game ball passes,
A game ball guided from the portion other than the first region in the second region to the entrance portion flows into the second passage more than a game ball guided from the first region to the entrance portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features K1 to K9, which is configured to be easy to play.

  In this feature, although the guidance destination is a ball entry part, a difference is generated in the destination after the ball entry depending on which route is passed. With such a configuration, further diversification of games can be realized.

  For example, in the combination with the feature K2, the total length of the inclined passage formed in each guide state is different. Specifically, the total length of the second inclined passage is longer than that of the first inclined passage, and the acceleration section becomes longer. In view of the fact that there is a difference in the moving speed of the game balls that have entered the entrance, it is preferable that the moving destination change due to such a speed difference.

Feature K11. A game state transition means (a function for executing a game state transition process in the MPU of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state that is more advantageous to the player than usual when a predetermined transition condition is established;
Switching means for switching the guide means to the non-guide state, the first guide state, and the second guide state (a function that controls state switching in the MPU of the main controller 162);
As a switching mode by the switching means, a first switching mode that switches alternately between the non-guided state and the first guiding state and a second switching mode that switches alternately between the non-guided state and the second guiding state are provided. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K10, further comprising means for shifting the switching mode in the special gaming state from the first switching mode to the second switching mode.

  According to the configuration shown in this feature, by changing from the first switching mode to the second switching mode, it is possible to accelerate the privilege acquisition frequency (for example, the increasing speed of the holding ball), the progress speed of the game, and the like. Thereby, it can suppress suitably that the game in a special game state becomes monotonous.

Feature K12. As the special gaming state, a first special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R jackpot result A) and a second special gaming state (for example, an opening / closing execution mode corresponding to 16R jackpot result B) are provided,
The gaming machine according to Feature K11, wherein a period of the second switching mode is different between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state.

  According to the feature K12, the period of the second switching mode that is advantageous to the player depending on the transitioned special gaming state, that is, the period of time during which the privilege acquisition frequency (for example, the increasing speed of the holding ball) or the game progress speed is accelerated is changed. To do. With such a configuration, monotonization of the game in the special game state can be more suitably suppressed.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristics A group-J group to the characteristics K1-characteristic K12.

<Feature L group>
The following feature L group is: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball to the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When a game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters a ball entering means provided in the game area, a privilege such as payout of a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The diversification of the game is achieved by making the ball entry means variable and switching the ball entry means between the accepting state and the non-accepting state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, it was made in view of the background and problems such as “the gaming machine of the above-mentioned type still has room for improvement in the diversification of games by the variable pitching means”. Is.

Feature L1. A game provided with a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with a ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83, 83R) into which the game ball can enter the game area. Machine,
The entrance means is
A first incoming part (first incoming part 331) and a second incoming part (second incoming part 341) into which game balls enter;
A first guidance state for guiding a game ball to the first ball entry unit; a second guide state for guiding a game ball to the second ball entry unit; and the first ball entry unit and the second ball entry unit. A guide unit (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched to an unplanned state that does not guide the game ball in any way,
A drive unit (for example, drive motor 321) for operating the movable body,
A control unit (MPU of the main control unit 162) that performs drive control of the drive unit;
The control unit controls the driving unit to be in a first driving state by controlling the driving mode of the driving unit to be a first driving mode (for example, rotation in a first specific direction); And a means for bringing the guide unit into the second guide state by controlling the drive mode of the drive unit to be a second drive mode (for example, rotation in a second specific direction). A gaming machine.

  A structure in which a plurality of entrance areas are installed in the game area and the game balls are guided to the entrance areas by using a variable guide section is realized by diversifying the game and increasing the degree of attention to the game. It is preferable for improvement. However, when a driving unit (actuator) is provided for each ball entry unit, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine becomes complicated.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, the driving mode of the driving unit is set to the first driving mode, the guiding unit is set to the first guiding state, and the driving mode is set to the second driving mode to set the guiding unit to the second guiding state. A configuration for switching the guidance destination of the ball, that is, a configuration for switching to the non-guide state / first guide state / second guide state depending on the driving mode, while suppressing the complexity of the electrical configuration in the gaming machine, Diversification can be realized.

Feature L2. A game provided with a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and provided with a ball entry means (for example, variable winning units 83, 83R) into which the game ball can enter the game area. Machine,
The entrance means is
A first incoming ball portion (first incoming ball portion 331) and a second incoming ball portion (second incoming ball portion 341) into which game balls flowing down the game area enter;
A first guiding state in which a game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the first entrance part, and a second guide state in which the game ball flowing down the game area is guided to the second entrance part. A guide unit (for example, movable bodies 350, 360, 450R) that can be switched between a guide state and an unplanned state in which no game ball is guided to any of the first and second ball-injection units;
A drive unit (for example, drive motor 321) for operating the movable body,
A control unit (MPU of the main control unit 162) that performs drive control of the drive unit;
The controller is
When the guide unit is in the non-guide state, the drive unit is controlled such that the drive mode of the drive unit is set to a first drive mode (for example, rotation in a first specific direction). Means for switching to the first guidance state;
When the guide unit is in the non-guided state, the drive unit is controlled so that the drive mode of the drive unit is in a second drive mode (for example, rotation in a second specific direction). A gaming machine comprising means for switching to the second guidance state.

  A structure in which a plurality of entrance areas are installed in the game area and the game balls are guided to the entrance areas by using a variable guide section is realized by diversifying the game and increasing the degree of attention to the game. It is preferable for improvement. However, when a driving unit (actuator) is provided for each ball entry unit, there is a concern that the electrical configuration of the gaming machine becomes complicated.

  In this regard, as shown in this feature, the driving mode of the driving unit is set to the first driving mode, the guiding unit is set to the first guiding state, and the driving mode is set to the second driving mode to set the guiding unit to the second guiding state. A configuration for switching the guidance destination of the ball, that is, a configuration for switching to the non-guide state / first guide state / second guide state depending on the driving mode, while suppressing the complexity of the electrical configuration in the gaming machine, Diversification can be realized.

  Feature L3. In the first drive mode, the control unit performs drive control so that the output shaft (output shaft 322) of the drive unit operates in a first specific direction, and in the second drive mode, the output shaft is The gaming machine according to Feature L1 or Feature L2, wherein driving control is performed so as to operate in a second specific direction opposite to the first specific direction.

  When switching the guide destination depending on the operation mode of the drive unit as shown in the feature L1 or the like, when changing the operation direction of the output shaft of the drive unit as shown in this feature, the state is switched. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operational stability. Thereby, the fall of the reliability of the gaming machine resulting from malfunction etc. can be suppressed with a simple configuration.

Feature L4. The drive unit is a motor,
The controller rotates the motor in a first specific direction in the first drive mode, and rotates the motor in a second specific direction opposite to the first specific direction in the second drive mode. The gaming machine according to Feature L1 or Feature L2, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be configured.

  When switching the guide destination depending on the operation mode of the drive unit as shown in the feature L1 or the like, the state is switched by setting the rotation direction of the output shaft of the drive unit in the reverse direction as shown in this feature. It is possible to suppress a decrease in operation stability at the time. Thereby, the fall of the reliability of the gaming machine resulting from malfunction etc. can be suppressed with a simple configuration.

Feature L5. The guide unit includes a first movable body (for example, the first movable body 350) and a second movable body (for example, the second movable body 360). In the first guidance state, the first movable body is a first guide. A first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed by being disposed at a position (for example, a protruding position), and in the second guide state, the first guide path is formed. The second movable body is arranged at a second guide position (for example, a protruding position), thereby forming a second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entrance portion. And
A transmission unit (transmission block 325) for transmitting the power of the drive unit to the first movable body and the second movable body;
When the first movable body is disposed at the first guide position, the transmission portion avoids transmission of power to the second movable body, and the second movable body is disposed at the second guide position. In this case, the gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4 is configured to avoid transmission of power to the first movable body.

  When the first movable body for the first entrance part and the second movable body for the second entrance part are used in combination, the following inconvenience may occur if the drive part is simply shared for these movable bodies. That is, when the first movable body is moved, the second movable body follows the movement, and when the second movable body is moved, the first movable body follows the movement, thereby driving. There is a concern that the burden on the part increases and the responsiveness at the time of state switching decreases.

  Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the first movable body is moved, transmission of power to the second movable body is avoided, and when the second movable body is moved, transmission of power to the first movable body is avoided. By avoiding this, it is possible to suppress an increase in load when a plurality of movable bodies are driven, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in responsiveness.

Feature L6. The guide unit includes a first movable body (for example, the first movable body 350) and a second movable body (for example, the second movable body 360). In the first guidance state, the first movable body is a first guide. A first guide path (for example, a first guide path GP1) that guides the game ball to the first ball entry portion is formed by being disposed at a position (for example, a protruding position), and in the second guide state, the first guide path is formed. The second movable body is arranged at a second guide position (for example, a protruding position), thereby forming a second guide path (for example, a second guide path GP2) for guiding the game ball to the second entrance portion. And
A first transmission path capable of connecting the drive unit and the first movable body to transmit power of the drive unit to the first movable body, and connecting the drive unit and the second movable body to power of the drive unit. Including a transmission portion (for example, a transmission block 325) that forms a second transmission path capable of transmitting to the second movable body,
The transmission section cuts off the second transmission path when the first movable body is disposed at the first guide position, and the transmission section is disposed when the second movable body is disposed at the second guide position. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein one transmission path is cut off.

  When the guide unit is configured by the first movable body and the second movable body so that the drive unit is shared, the second movable body becomes a resistance when the first movable body is moved, or the second movable body There is a concern that when the body is moved, the first movable body becomes a resistance, so that the responsiveness of the state switching is lowered.

  Therefore, when the first movable body is moved, the power transmission path to the second movable body is cut off (disconnected), and when the second movable body is moved, the power to the first movable body is transferred. By breaking the transmission path (releasing the connection), it is possible to suppress an increase in load when a plurality of movable bodies are driven, and to appropriately suppress a decrease in responsiveness.

  Feature L7. When the first movable body is moved to the first guide position, the second movable body stays at the non-guide position, and when the second movable body is disposed at the second guide position, the first movable body. The gaming machine according to Feature L5 or Feature L6, wherein the body is configured to remain in the non-guide position.

  As shown in this feature, the configuration shown in the feature L5 and the like is suitable by devising the operation timings of the first movable body and the second movable body so as not to overlap and limiting the power transmission target from the drive unit. Can be realized.

  In addition, you may apply each technical idea shown to the said characteristics A group-K group to the characteristics L1-characteristic L7.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball passage (guide rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game parts (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area, and a predetermined passage of these game parts A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through a portion (general winning port 81 or the like).

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as a gaming machine, 80 ... Game board unit, 80a ... Game board, 82 ... Actuator unit, 83 ... Variable winning unit, 84 ... Through gate, 86 ... Out port, 162 ... Main controller, 224 ... Discharge device, 242 ... Discharge control device, 310 ... Housing, 311 ... Main body portion, 317 ... Communication passage, 321 ... Drive motor, 322 ... Output shaft, 325 ... Transmission block, 331 ... First ball entry portion, 332 ... Entrance portion 334: Detection sensor, 341: Second entrance portion, 342: Entrance portion, 344: Detection sensor, 350: First movable body, 351 ... Upper surface, 355 ... Arm portion, 360 ... Second movable body, 361 ... Upper surface 363 ... Notch, 365 ... Arm part, 370 ... First shutter, 380 ... Second shutter, 390 ... Core, 391 ... First inclined part, 392 ... Second inclined part, 395 ... 400: first guide part 401: upper left movable plate 402 ... lower right movable plate 410 ... second guide part 411 ... upper right movable plate 412 ... lower left movable plate 420 ... passage part 430 ... first DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Movable body, 431 ... Upper shaft part, 432 ... Lower shaft part, 433 ... Guide groove, 434 ... Guide groove, 435 ... Spring, 436 ... Spring, 440 ... Second movable body, 441 ... Upper shaft part, 442 ... Lower shaft part, 443 ... guide groove, 444 ... guide groove, 445 ... spring, 446 ... spring, 450 ... movable body, 451 ... shaft support location, 452 ... upper surface, 453 ... first slope part, 454 ... second slope Part, 456 ... end part, 457 ... end part, 461 ... accommodating part, 470 ... movable body, 472 ... upper surface, 473 ... first inclined part, 474 ... second inclined part, 481 ... first shaft part, 482 ... first Two shaft portions, 483 ... first guide groove, 484 ... second guide groove, E1 ... first region, GE2 ... second region, GP1 ... first guide route, GP2 ... second guide route, ME ... passing region, OE ... inlet, PE ... game region, TE1 ... first bypass passage, TE2 ... Second detour passage.

Claims (8)

A game board in which a game area is formed;
Entry means provided in the game area,
Game state transition means for transitioning the gaming state to the special gaming state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied,
As the special game state, a first special game state and a second special game state are provided,
The entrance means is
A first entrance part that is a destination for a game ball when the first special game state is entered;
A second incoming portion that is a destination for a game ball when the second special gaming state is entered;
A movable body pivotally supported and having a rolling surface on which a game ball can roll;
A drive unit for driving the movable body,
A posture changing means for changing the posture of the movable body by drive control of the drive unit;
The posture changing means is
By changing the posture of the movable body so that the movable body is rotated and the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the first ball-entry portion in the first special game state. A first guide route forming means for forming a first guide route for guiding the game ball to the first entrance part;
In the second special game state, by rotating the movable body and changing the posture of the movable body so that the rolling surface is inclined downward toward the second entrance part And a second guide route forming means for forming a second guide route for guiding the game ball to the second entrance part. The movable body is in any one of a first guiding state that forms the first guiding path, a second guiding state that forms the second guiding path, and the first and second landing parts. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
2. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein when the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the movable body is maintained in the non-guided state.   A first privilege is given to the player based on the entrance to the first entrance, and a second privilege different from the first privilege is provided based on the entrance to the second entrance. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising privilege granting means for giving to the player. The first and second balls are arranged side by side in a predetermined direction,
The said movable body is arrange | positioned between the said 1st entrance part and the said 2nd entrance part in the said predetermined direction, The one of Claim 1 thru | or 3 characterized by the above-mentioned. Game machines. The center of rotation of the movable body is located between the first and second balls,
The first guide path forming means forms the first guide path by rotating the movable body in a first predetermined direction.
The second guide path forming means forms the second guide path by rotating the movable body in a second predetermined direction opposite to the first predetermined direction. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4. The movable body is in any one of a first guiding state that forms the first guiding path, a second guiding state that forms the second guiding path, and the first and second landing parts. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
When the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the movable body is configured to be maintained in the non-guided state,
The rotation direction of the movable body when switching from the non-guide state to the first guide state is opposite to the rotation direction of the movable body when switching from the non-guide state to the second guide state. A gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that: The movable body is in any one of a first guiding state that forms the first guiding path, a second guiding state that forms the second guiding path, and the first and second landing parts. It is possible to switch to a non-guided state that does not guide the game ball,
When the gaming state is not the special gaming state, the movable body is configured to be maintained in the non-guided state,
7. In the non-guided state, the moving body restricts entry into the first entry part and the second entry part according to any one of claims 1 to 6. The gaming machine described in 1. The first entrance part and the second entrance part are arranged so that the entrance portions face each other,
The game balls flowing down the game area are configured to enter the first and second entrance parts through the area between the first and second entrance parts,
When the movable body is in the non-guided state, an area between the first and second balls is covered from the upstream side in the game area by the movable body. The gaming machine according to claim 7, wherein:

Images